Operation/Reference Guide

TPDesign4
Touch Panel Design Program
(v2.11 or higher)

S of t w ar e

Last Revised: 9/22/2009

Software License and Warranty Agreement
• LICENSE GRANT. AMX grants to Licensee the non-exclusive right to use the AMX Software in the manner described in this License. The AMX Software is licensed, not sold. This license does not grant Licensee the right to create derivative works of the AMX Software. The AMX Software consists of generally available programming and development software, product documentation, sample applications, tools and utilities, and miscellaneous technical information. Please refer to the README.TXT file on the compact disc or download for further information regarding the components of the AMX Software. The AMX Software is subject to restrictions on distribution described in this License Agreement. AMX Dealer, Distributor, VIP or other AMX authorized entity shall not, and shall not permit any other person to, disclose, display, loan, publish, transfer (whether by sale, assignment, exchange, gift, operation of law or otherwise), license, sublicense, copy, or otherwise disseminate the AMX Software. Licensee may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the AMX Software. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT. You hereby acknowledge that you are an authorized AMX dealer, distributor, VIP or other AMX authorized entity in good standing and have the right to enter into and be bound by the terms of this Agreement. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY. The AMX Software is owned by AMX and is protected by United States copyright laws, patent laws, international treaty provisions, and/or state of Texas trade secret laws. Licensee may make copies of the AMX Software solely for backup or archival purposes. Licensee may not copy the written materials accompanying the AMX Software. TERMINATION. AMX RESERVES THE RIGHT, IN ITS SOLE DISCRETION, TO TERMINATE THIS LICENSE FOR ANY REASON UPON WRITTEN NOTICE TO LICENSEE. In the event that AMX terminates this License, the Licensee shall return or destroy all originals and copies of the AMX Software to AMX and certify in writing that all originals and copies have been returned or destroyed. PRE-RELEASE CODE. Portions of the AMX Software may, from time to time, as identified in the AMX Software, include PRERELEASE CODE and such code may not be at the level of performance, compatibility and functionality of the GA code. The PRE-RELEASE CODE may not operate correctly and may be substantially modified prior to final release or certain features may not be generally released. AMX is not obligated to make or support any PRE-RELEASE CODE. ALL PRE-RELEASE CODE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITH NO WARRANTIES. LIMITED WARRANTY. AMX warrants that the AMX Software (other than pre-release code) will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt. AMX DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH REGARD TO THE AMX SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES LICENSEE SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. Any supplements or updates to the AMX SOFTWARE, including without limitation, any (if any) service packs or hot fixes provided to Licensee after the expiration of the ninety (90) day Limited Warranty period are not covered by any warranty or condition, express, implied or statutory. LICENSEE REMEDIES. AMX's entire liability and Licensee's exclusive remedy shall be repair or replacement of the AMX Software that does not meet AMX's Limited Warranty and which is returned to AMX in accordance with AMX's current return policy. This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the AMX Software has resulted from accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any replacement AMX Software will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Outside the United States, these remedies may not available. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL AMX BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS AMX SOFTWARE, EVEN IF AMX HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE SOME STATES/COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO LICENSEE. U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The AMX Software is provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph ©(1)(ii) of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs ©(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. SOFTWARE AND OTHER MATERIALS FROM AMX.COM MAY BE SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL. The United States Export Control laws prohibit the export of certain technical data and software to certain territories. No software from this Site may be downloaded or exported (i) into (or to a national or resident of) Cuba, Iraq, Libya, North Korea, Iran, Syria, or any other country to which the United States has embargoed goods; or (ii) anyone on the United States Treasury Department's list of Specially Designated Nationals or the U.S. Commerce Department's Table of Deny Orders. AMX does not authorize the downloading or exporting of any software or technical data from this site to any jurisdiction prohibited by the United States Export Laws.

• •

This Agreement replaces and supersedes all previous AMX Software License Agreements and is governed by the laws of the State of Texas, and all disputes will be resolved in the courts in Collin County, Texas, USA. For any questions concerning this Agreement, or to contact AMX for any reason, please write: AMX License and Warranty Department, 3000 Research Drive, Richardson, TX 75082.

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) ...............................................................................1
Overview .................................................................................................................. 1 What's New in Version 2.11...................................................................................... 1 Supported Windows Platforms and PC Requirements .............................................. 1
Supported Operating Systems ........................................................................................ 1 Supported Operating System Languages ...................................................................... 1 PC Requirements/Recommendations .............................................................................. 2

Supported Touch Panels/Screen Resolutions............................................................ 2
Supported Panel Types ................................................................................................... 2 Supported Screen Resolutions ........................................................................................ 3 Supported Screen Resolutions - NXI-TPI/4 ...................................................................... 4 Supported Screen Resolutions - TPI-PRO ........................................................................ 4 Supported Screen Resolutions - TPI-PRO-DVI ................................................................. 5 Video Capabilities for Modero Panels ............................................................................. 5 Video Capabilities for Enhanced Modero Panels ............................................................ 5 Intercom Capabilities for Modero Panels ........................................................................ 5 AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images ........................................... 6

True Type Font Support............................................................................................ 6 Supported Image File Types ..................................................................................... 6 Related Software Applications.................................................................................. 6
NetLinx Studio ................................................................................................................ 6 AMX WebUpdate ............................................................................................................ 7 G4 PanelBuilder .............................................................................................................. 7 G4 PanelPreview ............................................................................................................. 7

The TPDesign4 Work Area .................................................................................9
Overview .................................................................................................................. 9 Design View Windows ............................................................................................ 10
Design View Window tab controls ................................................................................ 11 Using the Zoom Controls .............................................................................................. 11 Magnifier Window......................................................................................................... 12

Workspace Window ................................................................................................ 12
Workspace Navigator - Pages Tab ................................................................................ 13 Workspace Window- Function Maps Tab ...................................................................... 14

Properties Window ................................................................................................. 14
Properties Control - General Tab .................................................................................. 15 Properties Control - Programming Tab ......................................................................... 16 Properties Control - States Tab..................................................................................... 17

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

i

Table of Contents

Using the Apply To All option ....................................................................................... 18 Using the Prev and Next buttons .................................................................................. 18

State Manager window........................................................................................... 19
State Manager Drag-and-Drop Menu ............................................................................ 20

Transfer Status Window.......................................................................................... 20 Status Bar ............................................................................................................... 21 Button Preview Window ......................................................................................... 22 Print Preview Window ............................................................................................ 23 Working With Dockable Windows .......................................................................... 23
Moving, Docking and Resizing Dockable Windows ....................................................... 23 Toggling the Windows .................................................................................................. 23

Using the New Project Wizard ..........................................................................25
Overview ................................................................................................................ 25 New Project Wizard dialogs.................................................................................... 26
New Project Wizard - Step 1 dialog .............................................................................. 26 New Project Wizard - Step Two dialog.......................................................................... 27 New Project Wizard - Final Step dialog......................................................................... 28

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4) .................................................................................29
Overview ................................................................................................................ 29 Inappropriate File Name Characters ....................................................................... 29 Creating a New Project........................................................................................... 29 System-Generated Project File Names ................................................................... 30 Edit Focus ............................................................................................................... 31 Quick Input ............................................................................................................. 31 Undo/Redo ............................................................................................................. 32 Cutting, Copying and Pasting ................................................................................. 32 Using the Selection Tool ......................................................................................... 33 Working With Video Fills ........................................................................................ 33 Drag and Drop Support .......................................................................................... 34 Using G4 PanelPreview ........................................................................................... 34 Setting Project Properties ...................................................................................... 34
Project Properties dialog - Project Information tab....................................................... 35 Project Properties dialog - Panel Setup Information tab ............................................... 37 Project Properties dialog - Sensors tab ......................................................................... 38 Project Properties dialog - IR Emitters and Receivers tab ............................................. 39

Applying Password Protection to Your Project File ................................................ 40 Setting a Power Up Page........................................................................................ 41 Setting Power Up Popup Pages.............................................................................. 41

ii

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Table of Contents

Setting an Inactive Page Flip .................................................................................. 42 Using the Workspace Window ................................................................................ 43
Workspace Window - Pages Tab ................................................................................... 43 Workspace Window- Function Maps Tab ...................................................................... 44 Opening Pages/Popup Pages Via the Workspace Window ........................................... 44

Using the Properties Window ................................................................................. 45
Properties Window - General Tab ................................................................................. 45 Properties Control - Programming Tab ......................................................................... 46 Properties Control - States Tab..................................................................................... 46

Working With Multiple Projects .............................................................................. 46
Opening Multiple Projects Simultaneously.................................................................... 46 Copying/Pasting Across Projects................................................................................... 46

Project Migration (From Previous Versions of TPDesign4)...................................... 47
Converting TPD3 files to TPD4 ..................................................................................... 47

R-4 Remote Controller Projects .............................................................................. 48
Creating a TPD4 Project for R-4 Remote Controllers .................................................... 48 R-4 Remote Devices - Unsupported Button Types ........................................................ 49

R-4 Setup Codes ..................................................................................................... 49
Levels: .......................................................................................................................... 49 Addresses ..................................................................................................................... 49 External Button Options ............................................................................................... 50 R-4 External Buttons - Default Channel Codes .............................................................. 50

Working With The Resource Manager ..............................................................51
Overview ................................................................................................................ 51 Working With Images ............................................................................................. 53
Resource Manager dialog - Images tab ......................................................................... 53 Static Image Files .......................................................................................................... 53 Supported Image File Types ......................................................................................... 54 Importing Image Files Into Your Project ....................................................................... 54

Working With Dynamic Images............................................................................... 56
Resource Manager dialog - Dynamic Images tab .......................................................... 56 Dynamic Images ............................................................................................................ 57 Adding Dynamic Image Files To Your Project ............................................................... 57 Dynamic Image Example - Adding a Dynamic Image .................................................... 58

DynaMo™ Dynamic Images .................................................................................... 60
Creating a DynaMo Image ............................................................................................ 60 Adding an Dynamo Resource Image to the Resource Manager .................................... 61 Scaling and Cropping of Dynamo Resource Images ...................................................... 62 Copy/Paste Operations on Dynamo Resource Images .................................................. 62

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

iii

Table of Contents

Cameras and Servers With M-JPEG Streaming Output........................................... 63
Network Path Information............................................................................................. 63 Dynamic Image Settings - Example 1: Axis.................................................................... 64 Dynamic Image Settings - Example 2: Panasonic .......................................................... 64 Dynamic Image Settings - Example 3: Vivotek ............................................................. 65 Working With Trendnet IP Cameras .............................................................................. 65 DynaMo Dynamic Image Example - Adding a Streaming Webcam Image..................... 65

Working With Slots ................................................................................................. 68
Resource Manager dialog - Slots tab............................................................................. 68 Assigning Images and Sounds to Slot Positions ............................................................ 69

Working With Icons................................................................................................. 70
Bitmaps vs. Icons ........................................................................................................... 70

Working With Sounds ............................................................................................. 71
Resource Manager dialog - Sounds tab......................................................................... 71 Supported Sound File Types ......................................................................................... 72 Importing Sound Files To Your Project.......................................................................... 72

Exporting Image and Sound Files From Your Project To a Specified Directory ...... 72 Editing Image and Sound Files Using External Programs ....................................... 73
Editing Image Files ........................................................................................................ 73 Editing Sound Files........................................................................................................ 73

Working With Pages .........................................................................................75
Overview ................................................................................................................ 75 Creating a New Page .............................................................................................. 75 Setting Page Properties.......................................................................................... 76
Setting General Properties: Pages ................................................................................ 76 Setting Programming Properties: Pages ....................................................................... 76 Setting States Properties: Pages ................................................................................... 76

Renaming a Page .................................................................................................... 77 Adding a Fill Color to a Page.................................................................................. 77 Adding a Bitmap to a Page..................................................................................... 78 Adding an Icon to a Page ....................................................................................... 79 Adding Text to a Page............................................................................................ 79 Displaying a Video Source on a Page ..................................................................... 81 Copying/Pasting Pages ........................................................................................... 81
Copying Pages .............................................................................................................. 81 Pasting Pages ................................................................................................................ 81

Deleting Pages From a Project ............................................................................... 81 Exporting Pages as Image Files .............................................................................. 82 Printing Pages......................................................................................................... 83

iv

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

....................................................................................................................... 90 Adding a Fill Color To a Popup Page..................................................................................................................................................................................... 93 Copying/Pasting Popup Pages............................................. 92 Displaying a Video Source on a Popup Page .................................................................................. 100 Foreign Language Support for Text ................................................................................................................ 87 Setting Popup Page Properties .....................................................................................85 Overview ...... 100 Adding Text to a Button ................................ 88 Setting General Properties: Popup Pages.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 90 Adding a Bitmap to a Popup Page ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 95 Working With Buttons .. 99 Specifying the Button Type ................................ 85 Using the Popup Draw Tool............................................................................................... 88 Setting Programming Properties: Popup Pages............................ 94 Deleting Popup Pages From a Project .................................................................................. 97 Drawing a Button.................................. 89 Drawing Assist Support for Popup Pages ......................................... 85 Creating a Popup Page...............97 Overview .................................. 101 Adding a Fill Color To a Button ........................................................................................... 106 Displaying a Video Source on a Button........................................................................................................................................................................ 100 Specifying a Button Border........................................................11 or higher) v .......... 91 Adding an Icon to a Popup Page .................................................. 89 Setting States Properties: Popup Pages ................................................................................................... 107 TPDesign4 (v2................................................................................................................................... 93 Creating Popup Page Groups ............................... 94 Pasting Popup Pages............ 91 Adding Text to a Popup Page ..Table of Contents Working With Popup Pages ........................................................................................................................................................................... 107 Adding Text Effects .......................................................................................................... 107 Page Flips ........................................................................................................... 103 Adding an Icon to a Button................................................................. 94 Copying Popup Pages ............................................. 98 Generated Button Names .............................................................................................................................................. 97 Button Draw Tools ................................................................ 102 Adding a Bitmap to a Button ...................... 104 Working With Transparent Backgrounds.... 102 Changing the Button Fill Color........................ 90 Renaming a Popup Page................... 94 Show/Hide Popup Pages .....................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................. 114 Bargraph Buttons........................................................................................................................ 111 Editing Multiple Selections...................................... 110 Copying Buttons.......................................................................................................................... 117 Creating a Custom Slider .................................................. 109 Page Flip Actions........................................................................................ 127 Position Assist toolbar................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 123 Input Mask Operators ................................................................................................. 123 Input Mask Next Field Characters ..... 115 Multi-State Bargraph Buttons ............................................................................................................. 113 Level Control Parameters ............................................................... 113 Setting Properties: Multi-State General Buttons ..... 123 Computer Control Buttons ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................11 or higher) ..... 108 Drag & Drop To Set Page Flips ............... 125 Setting Default New Button Parameters ........................ 131 vi TPDesign4 (v2........................................................... 112 Setting Properties: General Buttons ............................................................................................ 109 Copying/Pasting Buttons ............................................................................................................................. 120 Joystick Buttons......................................................Table of Contents Creating a Page Flip ............................................................................................................................................................................ 118 Working With Touch Maps ........................... 110 Pasting Buttons . 127 Order Assist toolbar .............................................................. 112 Multi-State General Buttons ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 124 Setting Properties: Computer Control Buttons ........ 128 Using the Alignment & Sizing dialog ............................................................................................... 121 Setting Properties: Joystick Buttons ...................................................... 126 Using the Drawing Assist Features ....................... 130 Creating a Date Button.................................................... 116 Slider Types.............................................................................................................. 121 Text Input Buttons ............................................................................................................................................................................ 125 Setting Properties: TakeNote Buttons ............................ 129 Previewing a Button ......................................................................... 124 TakeNote Buttons.... 111 General Buttons ................................ 127 Size Assist toolbar ............................ 110 Editing Button Properties ............................. 122 Input Mask Characters.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 117 Formatting Codes ............................................................................................... 116 Setting Properties: Multi-State Bargraph Buttons.................................................. 123 Input Mask Ranges .....................................................................................................................

.................... 140 List Box Buttons: Managed Mode....................................................................................................................... 141 Creating List Box Buttons (Managed Mode) .................Container Button................................................................. 143 Cutting.....139 Overview ............ 146 List Box Buttons .............. Column Properties.......................................................................................................................................... 144 List Box Container Properties vs..... 147 Subordinate Buttons .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 135 Global Properties for External Pushbuttons/LEDs ................................................................................................................................................ 141 Adding Rows .................................................................... 147 Subordinate Button Placement ................................................................ Copying and Pasting a List Box ....................135 Overview .......................................................................................... 135 Copying/Converting External Controls Between Panels .................. 145 Setting Properties: List Box Container Buttons.................................. 150 Rules for Unmanaged List Box Buttons ................Columns.................................................................................................................. 136 Page-Specific Properties for External Pushbuttons/LEDs ..............................................................................................Resizing......... 151 Creating List Box Buttons (Unmanaged Mode) ............................ 148 Setting List Box Button Column Properties......................................................................................Drag and Drop Capability............................. 154 Using the Drawing Toolbar With List Box Buttons .... 153 List Box Buttons ..............................................................................................................Table of Contents Creating a Time Button............................................. 138 Working With List Box Buttons ...... 148 List Box Buttons ....... 137 Setting Page-Specific General Properties: External Pushbuttons........................................................................................... 140 List Box Toolbar................ 145 Setting List Box Container Button Properties ...... 144 List Box Buttons .................................................................. 132 Working With External Controls .................................... 154 TPDesign4 (v2...............................................................................................................11 or higher) vii ................................. 152 List Box Buttons ............................................................................Subordinate Buttons .......... 139 G4 Devices That Support List Box Buttons .................................................................................... 135 External Button Options ....... 137 Setting Page-Specific General Properties: External LEDs ................................ 149 List Box Buttons: Unmanaged Mode ....................................... 143 Deleting Columns............................... 142 Adding Columns.................. 136 Setting Global Properties for External LEDs ............................................... 148 Setting Properties: List Box Columns ................................................. 136 Setting Global Properties for External Pushbuttons ..............................Z-Order .................................................................................................................................................... 143 Deleting Rows ............................................................. 140 List Box Buttons: Managed / Unmanaged Mode ..............................................

...................................................................................................... 179 Column Display Order ......................... 159 Dynamic List Box Data................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 179 Auto-Repeat .......................................................................................................................................................... 178 General Properties................................................................................... 176 Working With The Property Painter.................................................................. 179 Column Sort Order ............................................................................ 157 Navigation Buttons ............................................................................ 169 Attaching a Dynamic List Data Table to a List Box Button ............................................................................Table of Contents List Box Buttons .................. 180 Compression............................. 179 Animate Time Up................................................. 164 Data List Command Rules......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 157 Scroll Bar Components ...... 160 Creating a Static List Data Table......................................................................... 164 Data List Commands ........................................................................................... 180 Cursor Name .... 166 Command Structure List View ................................................................................................................................................ 159 Attaching a List Data Table to a List Box Button....................................... 155 Creating a List Box Navigation Scroll Bar............................................................................. 163 Deleting a List Data Table ............................. 167 Dynamic List box Table Example . 159 Static List Box Data ...............................................................................................Navigation Buttons ....................... 164 Creating a Dynamic List Data Table ............. 176 Using the Prev and Next buttons .............. 179 Above Popups .............................................................175 Overview ...... 158 List Data Table Properties ........................................... 156 Creating a List Box Feedback Scroll Bar....... 172 Working With Properties .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 179 Border Style ................................................................................................................................... 179 Animate Time Down ...................... 175 Drag and Drop Support .................... 180 Cursor Color ......................................... 180 viii TPDesign4 (v2............................. 160 Attaching a Static List Data Table to a List Box Button ...............................................................................................................................................................Channel Code Values ............... 154 Creating List Box Navigation Buttons ........................................................................... 158 List Data Table ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................11 or higher) ............................................................................................................ 171 Changing Port and Address Assignments for a List Data Table ......................................................................................................................... 175 Using the Apply To All option .................................... 177 Saving a Properties Set ....................... 179 Color Depth...............

................................................................................................ On Show ......................................................................................... 181 Hide Effect ................................................................................................................................................................ 182 List Display ........................................................................................................................... 184 List Preferred Row Height................................... 186 TPDesign4 (v2.....Table of Contents Description.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 185 Page Flip ......................................................................................................................................... 185 Password Protection ................................................................. 183 List Managed.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 185 Remote Port.......................................................................................... 180 Disabled ................................................................................................. 183 List Preferred Row ......................................................................................................................................... 186 Show Effect Time ................................................................................................ 181 Hide Effect X/Y Pos.............................................................. 185 Password ............................................... 184 Lock Button Name........................................................................................................................ 184 List Row Padding........................................................................ 182 List Table Port ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 185 Name............................................................ 183 List Offset Enabled.................. 185 Password Character ....................... 181 Hide Effect Time .................................. 181 Input Mask ................................................................................................................................................................ 181 Left......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 186 Scale To Fit................................................................................................... 183 List Table Wrap .............. 185 Remote Host .............. 186 Show Effect .............................................................................................................................. 185 Modal ............. 180 Height ............................................... 182 List Column ..........................................11 or higher) ix . 185 Reset Pos........................................ 185 Max Text Length ............................................................................... 181 Hidden ................................................................................................................ 183 List Filter Column .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 182 List Table Address. 184 List Row Height ............. 182 List Column Padding ............................................................................... 180 Group .................................................................................................................... 180 Display Type............. 184 List Row.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 184 List Selectable ...........................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................ 187 TakeNote Host ................... 191 Range Time Up .................................................................................................................................................................................... 191 String Output Port .............................................................................................................................................................. 189 Level Code ....................................... 191 Range Inverted ...................................... 190 Level Control Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 192 x TPDesign4 (v2................................................................. 190 Range Drag Increment .. 187 Timeout ............. 186 Slider Color ......................................... 188 Width...................................................................... 190 Level Function ................................................ 191 String Output . 189 Address Port ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 189 Command Output .................................................................................. 187 Touch Map.............................................................................................. 187 Top .............................................................................................................................................................................. 189 Address Code..... 190 Level Port ................................................................................... 189 Level Aux...........11 or higher) ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 191 State Properties...................................................................................................................................................... 187 TakeNote Port...................................................................................................................................................... 191 Range Time Down .................. 186 State Count ................................................................................................................................ 189 Channel Port.................... 189 Channel Code ..................................................................................................................................... 190 Level Control Value ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 187 Touch Style................................................................................................................... 188 Programing Properties....................................................................................................................................................................................... 189 Feedback............................................................................................................... 191 Range Low............. 189 Command Port ................................................................................................ 192 Bitmap...................................................... 188 Value Direction...........................................................................................................................................................................Table of Contents Show Effect X/Y Pos..................................................................................................... 187 Type ................................................................................... 190 Range Aux Inverted...................................................................................................................................................... 190 Level Control Repeat Time ....................................................... 186 Slider Name...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 191 Range High.................................................................................................................. 186 TakeNote Enabled..........................................................................................................................................................

. 194 Overall Opacity ................................................................................................................................................... 195 Text ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 193 Icon X Offset ................... 193 Icon Y Offset ....................................................................................... 201 State Manager Context Menu ................................................................... 196 Video Fill ........... 192 Border Color ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 193 Fill Color........................................ 195 Text Effect......................................................................................... 198 Working With States ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 195 Text X Offset.........................................201 Overview .....................................................................................Table of Contents Bitmap Justification...................................................................................... 193 Icon Justification ............... 196 Using the All States Option ...................................................................................................................................................... 195 Text Y Offset...................................................................................................................... 196 Searching For Button Properties ...................................... 202 Adding States From the Clipboard .............. 203 TPDesign4 (v2.............................................................................. 194 Scale Bitmap To Fit .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 196 Video Cropping........ 192 Bitmap Y Offset.............................................................................................................................. 193 Marquee Direction ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 195 Text Color ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 192 Border Name............................. 193 Font.................................................................................................... 201 Adding States To a Button ............................................................ 201 State Manager Window ....... 195 Text Effect Color .............................. 195 Streaming Source ............................................ 196 Word Wrap....................... 195 Text Justification ....................................... 192 Bitmap X Offset .................. 193 Icon Slot ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 194 Sound ........................ 194 Marquee Repeat ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 196 Video Touch Pass-Thru ..................................11 or higher) xi .... 192 Chameleon Image .............................................................................................................................................................. 197 Searching and Replacing Button Properties ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 192 Draw Order ................... 202 Duplicating an Existing State on the Button .....................................................................................................

............................................................ Popup Page or Button .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 211 Working With Colors and Palettes .............................. 215 Creating Custom Palettes........................................................................Table of Contents Drag & Drop To Add States ..................................................................... 217 Copying Palettes .............................................................213 Working With Colors. 211 Wrap Within Port ID (Power Assign)............................................. 203 Setting the Maximum Active State For a Button ................. 206 Changing the Draw Order for Selected States......... 204 Cutting States To the Clipboard................................... 205 Pasting a State from the Clipboard .................................................................................................... 205 Copying/Pasting States From a Page...............................11 or higher) ........................................................................ 208 0...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Setup Port........................................... 204 Removing States From A Button..................................Limitations.......... 205 Draw Order (Z-Order) ............... 217 Using Custom Palettes to Enable Color Schemes in G4 PanelBuilder ............................................................................................................................................................... 210 Clear Channels First....................... 213 Working With Palettes .......................................... 208 Function Code Map ................................. 211 Ensure Contiguous Code Assignment (Power Assign) ............................. 205 Reordering States Through the Clipboard ..................... 207 Show/Hide Function Codes............... 216 Changing the Active Palette........................................................................ 209 Using Power Assign ........................................................................207 Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 216 Renaming Palettes................ 215 Creating New Palette Entries ......................... 215 Working With Multiple Color Palettes.................... 217 Importing Palette Files .................................................................................................................................................................. 217 Exporting Palette Files ............. 218 Using the Microsoft® Paint Utility Program..................................................................................................................................................................................... 204 Deleting States................................................................................................................................................................. 205 Changing the Order Of States On A Button ............................................................................................ 206 Working With Function Codes ................................................................................................. 210 Begin Assignment At (Power Assign) ................. 217 Copying Palette Entries............................................ 205 Reordering States Through Drag-and-Drop ...................... 208 Function Codes ..................... 210 Assign Codes........................................................................................... 218 xii TPDesign4 (v2............................................................................................................................. 205 Copying a State to the Clipboard..................................................................................

.............................................................. 231 File Transfer Operations ............................................................................................ 220 Working With Animation Effects ............ 230 Chameleon Images..... 228 Chameleon Images ................... 228 Tweeners sub-menu ............. 226 Creating Animated Bitmap Effects................. 229 Requirements for Chameleon Images ...............................................................................11 or higher) xiii ...............................................................................233 Overview ..............Assign Frames (Step 4 of 6) ......................................................................................................................... 219 Displaying a Video Source on a Page.....219 Overview ...................................... 235 Connecting to a NetLinx Master via TCP/IP ............................................................................................................................................................................... 238 TPDesign4 (v2.......................................................... 233 Working With Communications Configurations .......................................................Table of Contents Working With Video Fills ............. 229 Working With Chameleon Images ..................... 236 Connecting to a NetLinx Master via Modem........................................................................................... 220 Displaying a Video Source on a Button ....................................... 238 Sending a Panel File To a NetLinx Master.... 224 Animation Wizard ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................Finish (Step 6 of 6) .........Size & Position (Step 3 of 6) ...................................................................................................................................................................Select Type (Step 1 of 6)......... 219 Streaming Video Fills ..... Custom Palettes and G4 PanelBuilder............................................................................. 223 Animation Wizard ...................... 238 Panel File Transfers via TCP/IP ........................... 219 Displaying a Video Source on a Popup Page ............................................................................................................................................................................... 235 Connecting to a NetLinx Master ....... 234 Editing the Settings on an Existing Communication Configuration..................................................................................................... 227 Creating Animated Text Effects .............................................................................................Create Sequence (Step 2 of 6) ....................................................................................................................................................................... 233 Secure NetLinx Connections ....................................... 225 Tweening .................... 223 Animation Wizard .............. 225 Creating Color Transition Effects ...................................................................................Appearance (Step 5 of 6) ....223 Overview .. 225 Animation Wizard ............................................................Example .............. 230 Working With Chameleon Images ...................................................................... 238 Receiving a Panel File From a NetLinx Master ................................................................................ 235 Connecting to a NetLinx Master via Serial Port ............................................................. 224 Animation Wizard .......................... 237 Transferring Touch Panel Files to/from a NetLinx Master.............................................................................. 234 Saving and Recalling Communication Configurations ......................................................... 223 Animation Wizard ....................................................................................................................... 223 Using the Animation Wizard ............

Table of Contents

Panel File Transfers via Serial Port .............................................................................. 239 Panel File Transfers via Modem................................................................................... 240 Transfer Options ......................................................................................................... 241

Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers............................................................... 241
Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers.................. 241 Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers .................................. 242 Powering Up and Connecting the Panel (via TCP/IP)................................................... 242

Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Connection .................. 242
Sending Files To the Panel .......................................................................................... 242 Receiving Files From The Panel ................................................................................... 243

Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers................................................................... 243
Installing the AMX USB Driver for G4 Touch Panels.................................................... 243 Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers...................... 243 Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers ...................................... 244 Powering Up and Connecting the Panel (via USB)....................................................... 244

Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master USB Connection ...................... 244
Sending Files To the Panel .......................................................................................... 244 Receiving Files From The Panel ................................................................................... 244

MVP-5200i USB Driver .......................................................................................... 245

Working With Templates ................................................................................247
Importing Template (*.VAT or *.TPT) Files ............................................................ 247 Working With the System Page Template ............................................................ 247
Copying/Pasting Entire System Pages into a Project .................................................. 248 Copying/Pasting System Page Elements into a Project page ...................................... 249 Working with System Page Keyboards and Keypads .................................................. 249 System Page Template Reference ............................................................................... 250 System Page Template Popup Pages .......................................................................... 251

Exporting Your Project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template........................................ 252 G4 PanelBuilder Templates - Required Template Elements.................................. 254
Navigation Elements ................................................................................................... 254 Placeholder Elements .................................................................................................. 255

G4 PanelBuilder Templates - Optional Template Elements .................................. 256
Mode Elements ........................................................................................................... 256 Sub-Navigation Elements ............................................................................................ 257 Splash Elements .......................................................................................................... 257 Device Elements .......................................................................................................... 258 Feature Elements ........................................................................................................ 258 Sub-Feature Elements ................................................................................................. 259

xiv

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Table of Contents

Rules for Navigating a G4 PanelBuilder Template ................................................ 259 G4 PanelBuilder Templates - Template Wide Conventions................................... 260 G4 PanelBuilder Templates - AMX Naming Conventions...................................... 261 Exporting Your Project as a VisualArchitect Template.......................................... 262
VA Templates - Navigations as Pages ......................................................................... 262 VA Templates - Logical Page Scroll Bar Elements ....................................................... 262 VA Templates - Logical Page Info Element.................................................................. 263 VA Templates - Logical Page Up and Down Elements ................................................ 263 VA Templates - List Box Page Up and Down Elements ............................................... 263

Program Preferences ......................................................................................265
Overview .............................................................................................................. 265 Preferences Dialog - Application tab .................................................................... 265
Startup ........................................................................................................................ 265 Miscellaneous .............................................................................................................. 266 Warning Messages ...................................................................................................... 266

Preferences Dialog - Appearance tab ................................................................... 267
Window ....................................................................................................................... 267 Grid ............................................................................................................................. 268 Transparency ............................................................................................................... 268

Preferences Dialog - Directories tab..................................................................... 269
Default Directories ...................................................................................................... 269

Preferences Dialog - Editor Selection tab ............................................................. 270 Preferences Dialog - Undo/Redo tab .................................................................... 271
Undo / Redo Support .................................................................................................. 271

Adding an External Editing Program for Image Files............................................ 272 Adding an External Editing Program for Sound Files ........................................... 272 Changing the Default External Image or Sound Editor Program .......................... 273 Customizing the Menus and Toolbars................................................................... 274 Customizing the Toolbars ..................................................................................... 274
Adding Buttons To Existing Toolbars.......................................................................... 274 Removing Buttons From Existing Toolbars ................................................................. 275 Associating an Icon With a New Command................................................................. 275 Creating a New Custom Toolbar ................................................................................. 276 Renaming Custom Toolbars ........................................................................................ 276 Deleting Custom Toolbars........................................................................................... 277

Customizing the Menus ........................................................................................ 277
Adding Commands To Existing Menus........................................................................ 277 Removing Commands From Existing Menus ............................................................... 277 Creating a New Custom Menu .................................................................................... 278

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

xv

Table of Contents

Adding a Shortcut To an Application In the Tools Menu ...................................... 279 Hotkeys (Keyboard Accelerators) ......................................................................... 280
Setting Custom Hotkeys.............................................................................................. 280

xvi

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)
Overview
The TPDesign4 (or "TPD4") Touch Panel Design program is designed to assist you in creating a state-of-theart touch panel interface for AMX's G4 Level touch panels (including the Modero line, MIO-R4 remote controllers, and the NXP-TPI/4 Touch Panel Interface). Use TPD4 to create Project Files (*.TP4) containing all of the information required to define a user-interface to be utilized on a G4 touch panel. This includes Pages, Popup Pages and associated navigation/page-flip information, as well as buttons (including function code information), and all image and sound-related files that are used in the design (including dynamic images and video feeds).

What's New in Version 2.11
Support for Dynamo Resource Images on the following panel-types: NXD-1000Vi MVP-8400i MVP-8400 MVP-5200i NXD-700Vi NXD-500i

Supported Windows Platforms and PC Requirements
Supported Operating Systems
Windows 2000® (service pack 4 or greater) Windows XP® Professional (service pack 2 or greater) Windows Vista-Business You must have Power User (or Administrator) rights to install and run all required System files.

Supported Operating System Languages
Windows XP® Professional / Windows 2000®: • English (US) • French • German • Spanish Windows Vista-Business®: • Chinese (Classic, HK) • French • Japanese • Spanish • English • Chinese (Simplified, PRC) • Arabic • German • Turkish • Greek • Italian • Portuguese • Flemish (Dutch) • Russian • Turkish

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

1

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

PC Requirements/Recommendations
Pentium III 750MHZ processor (minimum requirement); 1.5GHz or faster recommended. 700 MB of free disk space (minimum requirement) 512 MB of RAM (minimum - SQL Server 2005 Express Edition requires 512MB) Minimum (VGA) screen resolution of 800x600. Windows-compatible mouse (or other pointing device). If the mouse wheel on your Microsoft® IntelliMouse® doesn't work with VA, try downloading the latest IntelliMouse drivers from Microsoft.

Supported Touch Panels/Screen Resolutions
Supported Panel Types
TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) supports the following AMX (G4) touch panel types: Supported Panel Types
Name MVP-5100 MVP-5150 MVP-5200i MVP-7500 MVP-8400 MVP-8400i NXD-430 NXD-435 NXD-CV5 NXD-500i NXD/NXT-CV7 NXD-700vi NXD/NXT-CV10 NXT-CV10/PB NXD-1000vi NXD/NXT-CA12 NXD/NXT-CV12 NXD/NXT-1200V Description 5.2" Modero® ViewPoint® IR Touch Panel 5.2" Modero® ViewPoint® Wi-Fi Touch Panel 5.2" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom 7.5" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel 8.4" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel 8.4" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom 4.3" Modero Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel 4.3" Modero Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel 5" Modero® Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel 5" Modero® Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel 7" Modero Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels 7" Modero® Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel with Intercom 10" Modero Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels 10" Modero Table Top Touch Panel with Pushbuttons 10" Modero® Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel with Intercom 12" Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels 12" Flush Mount & Table Top Video Touch Panels 12" Modero® Video Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels FG#(s) (FG5966-08) (FG5966-07) (FG5966-01) (FG5965-01) (FG5965-05) (FG5965-04) (FG2262-01) (FG2262-03) (FG2261-01) (FG2261-02) (FG2258-02K, FG2258-01K) (FG2258-04K) (FG2259-02K, FG2259-01K) (FG2259-03K) (FG2259-04K) (FG2251-10, FG2250) (FG2251-12K, FG2250-11K) (FG2251-60K, FG2250-60K) (FG225161RGB, FG2250-61V)

NXD/NXT-1200VG 12" Modero® VG Series Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels with RGB

2

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Supported Panel Types (Cont.)
Name NXD/NXT-CA15 NXD/NXT-CV15 Description 15" Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels 15" Flush Mount & Table Top Video Touch Panels FG#(s) (FG2253-10, FG2252) (FG2253-12K, FG2252-11K) (FG2253-61V, FG2252-61V) (FG2256K, FG2257K) (FG2256-61V, FG2257-61V) (FG630-100) (FG2275-01) (FG2275-102, FG2275-104) (FG2275-112, FG2275-114) (FG148-04)

NXD/NXT-1500VG 15" Modero VG Series Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels NXD/NXT-CV17 17" Flush Mount & Table Top Color Video Touch Panels

NXD/NXT-1700VG 17" Modero VG Series Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels NXP-PLV NXP-TPI/4 TPI-PRO TPI-PRO-DVI R-4 Modero PosiTrack Pilot Camera Controller NetLinx® Touch Panel Interface Total Presentation Interface, 2/4 Source Input Total Presentation Interface with DVI, 2/4 Source Input Mio R-4 Remote

The prefix " NXT" indicates the table-top (tilt) model, and "NXD" represents the wallmount version.

Supported Screen Resolutions
While most touch panels support a single screen resolution, the NXI-TPI/4, TPI-PRO, TPI-PRO-DVI and NXV-300 support multiple resolutions, selectable in the New Project Wizard - Step 1 dialog. The screen resolution setting for these panel devices can be changed later via the Screen Size option in the Save As Different Panel Type dialog. Supported Panel Types Per Resolutions
Resolution 640x480 720x480 CEA 720x576 CEA 800x480 • MVP-7500 • NXP-TPI4 • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO-DVI • MVP-5150 • MVP-5200i • CV5 • MVP-8400i • MVP-8400 800x600 • 1200V • 1200VG • 1500VG 1024x768 • CV15 • CA15 • CV7 • CV10 • CV10/PB • CA12 • CV12 • NXP-TPI4 • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • NXP-TPI4 • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI Panel Type • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

3

Supported Screen Resolutions .TPDesign4 (v2.Pro Edition (2/4 Source Input)): • 640x480 • 800x600 • 1024x768 • 1280x1024 • 1360x768 • 1440x900 • 1600x1200 • 1680x1050 • 1920x1080 • 1920x1200 4 TPDesign4 (v2.NXI-TPI/4 TPDesign4 supports 24-bit RGB color at the following screen resolutions for the NXI-TPI/4 (NetLinx Touch Panel Interface 4): • 640x480 • 800x600 • 1024x768 • 1280x1024 Supported Screen Resolutions .) Resolution 1280x720 VESA/CEA 1280x768 • TPI-PRO-DVI • 1700VG • CV17 • NXP-TPI4 1280x1024 • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI 1360x768 1440x900 1600x1200 1680x1050 1920x1080 1920x1080 VESA/CEA 1920x1200 • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI Panel Type TPD4 provides scrolling if a Design View is larger than the available visible work area.11 or higher) Supported Panel Types Per Resolutions (Cont.11 or higher) .TPI-PRO TPDesign4 supports 24-bit RGB color at the following screen resolutions for the TPI-PRO (Total Presentation Interface .

Component/RGB and Streaming video inputs. it also supports Composite video (only). These include: NXT/NXD-CV7 NXD/NXT-CV10 NXD/NXT-CV10/PB NXT/NXD-CV12 NXT/NXD-CV15 NXT/NXD-CV17 Video Capabilities for Enhanced Modero Panels Video capable Enhanced Modero Panels all support Composite. These include: NXT/NXD-1200V (Composite only) NXT/NXD-1200VG NXT/NXD-1500VG NXT/NXD-1700VG While the NXT/NXD-1200V panel is considered to be part of the enhanced Modero family of Panels.TPDesign4 (v2. Intercom Capabilities for Modero Panels Intercom-equipped Modero Panels support 2-way full-duplex intercom capabilities.11 or higher) Supported Screen Resolutions . These panels include: MVP-5200i MVP-8400i NXD-1000vi NXD-700vi TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 5 .TPI-PRO-DVI TPDesign4 supports 24-bit RGB color at the following screen resolutions for the TPI-PRO (Total Presentation Interface PRO with DVI (2/4 Source Input)): • 640x480 • 720x480 CEA • 720x576 CEA • 800x600 • 1024x768 • 1280x720 VESA • 1280x720 CEA • 1280x768 • 1280x1024 • 1360x768 • 1440x900 • 1600x1200 • 1680x1050 • 1920x1080 VESA • 1920x1080 CEA • 1920x1200 Video Capabilities for Modero Panels Video Capable Modero Panels all support Composite video inputs.

the PNG file must be saved with RGB colors. Related Software Applications The related AMX software applications described in the following sections are available to download from www. NetLinx Studio is available for free download from www. The TTF files listed represent those TTF files installed in Windows with their available point sizes. TPD4 directly utilizes TTF files. Unless you are actually using transparency. For the transparent color to be interpreted correctly by TPD4. Supported Image File Types TPD4 supports the following image file types: BMP (Windows bitmap) IFF (Interchange File Format) JPG (Joint Photographic Expert Group) PCT (Macintosh Pict) PCX (PC (Zsoft) Paintbrush) PNG (Portable Network Graphic) PSD (Photoshop) TGA (TrueVision Targa) WMF (Windows Meta File) EPS (Encapsulated Post Script) FPX (FlashPix) Notes: Of all the image file formats supported by TPD4. Refer to the NetLinx Studio online help and Instruction Manual for instructions.11 or higher) AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images The following list indicates the AMX Touch Panels that support Dynamo Resource Images (at the time of this TPDesign4 release). This list will be updated as support for Dynamo Resource Images is added to new and existing panels: NXD-1000Vi MVP-8400i MVP-8400 MVP-5200i NXD-700Vi NXD-500i True Type Font Support Since G4 panels have the ability to decode and display Windows True Type Font files (TTF). Fonts are presented in the Properties Control window (States tab).com.TPDesign4 (v2.amx.com: NetLinx Studio NetLinx Studio is a full featured Integrated Development Environment (IDE) for NetLinx and Axcess Control Systems. See the Working With Transparent Backgrounds section on page 106 for details. 6 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) . since they are usually slightly smaller in size.amx. as well as the Button Selection/Draw toolbar and the Add Page and Add Popup Page dialogs. JPGs are recommended over PNGs. only one accommodates transparency as a color: PNGs.

or user-designed templates. Select Help > Web Update to launch this application.11 or higher) 7 . select Panel > Send To G4 PanelPreview (or click the toolbar button) to launch the G4 PanelPreview application. refer to the G4 PanelBuilder online help. (including multi-state and bar graph buttons) via the mouse and keyboard on your PC.com. To preview your panel project. Use the set of options in the File menu to access the key functions of the G4 PanelBuilder application: Click File > New From G4 Panel Builder to create a new TP4 panel project using G4 PanelBuilder. determines the latest version of the selected applications. returns a listing of available updates. TPD4 is required to complete the project by specifying channel mapping information.TPDesign4 (v2. For details on using G4 PanelBuilder to generate G4 PanelBuilder project files (*. Note: The WebUpdate application is not installed by TPD4. If not found. G4 PanelPreview G4 PanelPreview is a stand-alone application (installed separately) from AMX that allows you to preview TPD4 projects for G4 touchpanels.TPT) or Visual Architect template file (*.PB4).amx. allows a user to select from a list of available AMX Software programs to choose for updating. allows a user to download the selected installation files. Click File > Export G4 PanelBuilder Template to export the active TP4 project as a PanelBuilder Template file (*. where you can preview the project and simulate push and release of buttons. and to generally fine-tune the project as needed.TPT). and upon request. Refer to the G4 PanelPreview online help file for details. For example. The G4 PanelBuilder application is designed to do the bulk of the basic layout and navigational design of a touch panel design.com. and must be installed separately.11 or higher) AMX WebUpdate The AMX WebUpdate program is a stand-alone application that communicates with the AMX website. G4 PanelBuilder G4 PanelBuilder is a stand-alone application (installed separately) from AMX that allows you to quickly create TPD4 projects for G4 touchpanels. and must be installed in order to activate this menu option.VAT) into TPD4 as a starting point for your panel design. Click File > Import Touch Panel Template to import an existing PanelBuilder (*. using either pre-fabricated templates from AMX.amx. it is fully integrated with TPD4. Refer to the WebUpdate on-line help for details and instructions. TPDesign4 (v2. launches the installation of those downloads. Although G4 PanelBuilder is installed separately. the File > New From G4 PanelBuilder option (available only if G4 PanelBuilder is installed) launches the G4 PanelBuilder application to allow you to create a new TPD4 project. TPD4 will prompt you to download the application from www. The G4 PanelPreview application is available from www.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 8 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .

Design View Windows . so they'll apply the next time the application is launched. When this option is enabled. 1 TPDesign4 Work Area In its default configuration. the main components are: Title Bar . left to right. Use the View > MDI Page Tabs option to toggle the page tabs. These settings are saved. Menu Bar . 1): Title Bar Menu Bar Toolbars Workspace Window Design View Windows Properties Window State Manager Window Status Bar FIG. Edit.Lists the name of the active Project file. Window. but can be moved. Transfer. Toolbars . States. Click View. then click in the checkboxes to select/de-select the listed toolbars (including custom toolbars). Page.Contains the main menu options (File. Layout. Workspace Window . Use the Pages tabs to open/edit the pages / popup pages in each project. from top to bottom. These tabs normally appear along the bottom edge of the Design View window area. The Function Maps tab allows you to view/edit the function codes associated with each page.Each tabbed Design View Window represents a Touch Panel page or popup page. View. toggled or modified via the MDI tabs context menu (right-click inside any of the tabs to open). TPDesign4 (v2. and Help).Contains two tabs: The Pages tab contains a tree structure representing all open projects.You can choose which toolbars to show in the workspace via the View > Toolbars submenu. Button. Tools. and their pages and popup pages. If a toolbar has a check next to it in the sub-menu. then it is displayed. Note that a MDI tab is displayed for each opened page. Panel. a tab is displayed for each open page.11 or higher) 9 .The TPDesign4 Work Area The TPDesign4 Work Area Overview The TPD4 work area consists of several main components (FIG.

button size.Contains three tabs: the General tab allows you to view/edit general (non-state oriented) button properties. 2) represent pages or popup pages in the panel file you are creating. The status bar also indicates the status of your connection to the NetLinx Master. Design View Windows Design View windows (FIG. Design Views that represent pages are not resizable. Select the Toggle Information Overlay toolbar button (in the View toolbar) to display function codes associated with each button (FIG. The page tabs normally appear along the bottom edge of the Design View window area. They provide a canvas upon which you may place buttons of any size that will fit within the confines of the windows. panel revision. but can be moved. State Manager Window . toggled or modified via the MDI tabs context menu (right-click inside any of the tabs to open). you can click and drag to resize and position it manually. the Status Bar shows the current XY cursor position. Alternatively. Top. Level code. Feedback and Initial page file target information. FIG. 3 Toggle Information Overlay toolbar button (View toolbar) Use the View > MDI Page Tabs option to toggle the page tabs. 3). The State Manager window allows you to view/edit the various states of a selected button. Address code.The TPDesign4 Work Area Properties Window .11 or higher) .By default. When this option is enabled. 10 TPDesign4 (v2. Width or Height properties. toggled or modified via the MDI tabs context menu (rightclick inside any of the tabs).Displays each state of the selected button as a thumbnail image in this window. and (for the button the mouse is over): Channel code. a tab is displayed for each open page. and the States tab allows you to view/edit button state information. the Programming tab allows you view/edit programming-oriented properties. Popup pages are resizable through the Properties Window by adjusting their Left. Since Design View windows represent the pages on the panel themselves. but can be moved. Once the Popup is displayed on the page. you can set their size and dimensions manually by first enabling the Show Popup Page option in the Page menu. Use the Zoom and Magnifier Window features to control the size of the view. FIG. 2 Design View windows The page tabs normally appear along the bottom edge of the Design View window area. Status Bar .

etc). Right mouse click anywhere within a Design View window to open the Design View context menu. The monitor size should represent the diagonal measurement of the visible portion of the monitor or of the space occupied by a full-screen image. the tabs automatically disappear. containing options for layout/design control (send to front/back. 4 Zoom toolbar The following Zoom Controls are available via the Zoom toolbar: Full Page: Automatically adjusts the zoom to show the entire page at 100% size.The TPDesign4 Work Area TPD4 will display up to a maximum of 15 page tabs. If you open more than 10 pages. Use these tabs to easily flip from page to page.11 or higher) 11 . This context menu contains shortcuts to many key design tools. No data will be lost. Use these options to control the zoom factor on the selected page or popup page. only the view is closed. TPD4 displays up to a maximum of 10 page tabs. Right-click inside any of the page tabs to access the MDI Page tabs context menu. TPDesign4 (v2. Fit Page: Automatically adjusts the zoom to fit inside the Design View window. 4) contains shortcuts to the main Zoom Controls. once you have several pages open. only the way it is represented in the workspace area. FIG. Select Layout from the Design View context menu to access the Layout sub-menu. each of these windows has its own page tab (normally appearing along the bottom edge of the Design View window area) that shows the Page name. Zoom Out/In: With a page or popup page selected. In TPD4. center. these page tabs are referred to as "MDI tabs".5” and 20” viewable area. you must first specify the monitor’s visible size (in the Monitor Size field of the Appearance tab of the Preferences dialog). This context menu contains shortcuts to many key design tools. For example. Using the Zoom Controls The Zoom toolbar (FIG. accessible from the main menu bar. If you open more than 15 pages. Right mouse click anywhere within a Design View window to open the Design View context menu. By default. align. most 21” monitors typically have between a 19. Zoom controls do not affect the actual size of the selected object. Select Display from the Design View context menu to access the Display sub-menu. containing options that allow you to select which state of a selected button to display in the Design View. Actual Size: Automatically adjusts the zoom to represent how large a page will appear when actually displayed on the target panel type. Design View Window tab controls Each panel page that you open is shown in its own Design View window for editing. and they can be toggled on/off via the View > MDI Page Tabs option. only the most recently opened 15 pages will remain open (the others will be automatically closed). as opposed to the monitor’s overall diagonal size. by the increments listed in the Zoom Control drop-down. click the Zoom Out and Zoom In toolbar buttons to adjust the display size of the selected object. This menu is identical to the Layout menu. To use this option.

150%. Use this list to manually set the zoom to by incremental percentages (25%. where you can select a zoom factor from 2 to 8 times actual size. 75%. Workspace Window The Workspace Window is used to open the pages / popup pages in the file (establishing edit focus). where you can specify any zoom percentage within the range of 25 . The Workspace Window contains two tabs: Pages and Function Maps (FIG.11 or higher) . 50%. FIG. This floating window is resizable and dockable.The TPDesign4 Work Area Zoom Control Drop-down: Click the down-arrow to open the Zoom control options list. 6 Workspace window 12 TPDesign4 (v2. or by Fit Page. 5 Magnifier Window toolbar button (View toolbar) Right-click inside the Magnifier window to access the Magnify Control context menu. For Width or Fit Height.400% (in 1-percent increments). Custom: Opens the Custom Window Zoom dialog. Additional Zoom options are available via the Window > Zoom submenu: Fit Width: Automatically adjusts the zoom to accommodate the width of the selected object inside the Design View window. 100%. 200% or 400%). Magnifier Window The Magnifier window allows you to magnify a given area of a design view for temporary viewing in a separate floating window. without zooming the entire design view. Fit Height: Automatically adjusts the zoom to accommodate the height of the selected object inside the Design View window. and to view/edit the function codes associated with each page. 6): FIG. Select View > Magnifier Window (or click the toolbar button) to access the Magnifier Window.

In the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator you will see that there are two panel level folders. Right-click anywhere within the Pages tab to access the Workspace Navigator context menu. Click the + symbol next to the folders. Inside the Popup Page folder you may also see additional folders.11 or higher) 13 . each one with a different colored panel icon (FIG. and the presence of a Popup Page in one of these folders indicates that the particular Popup Page belongs to that group.Pages Tab Click the Pages tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Navigator window) to view the pages/popup pages contained within each open Project. 7): FIG. TPDesign4 (v2. Use the Workspace Navigator to view/open and rename panel pages. These folders represent Popup Page Groups. in the Workspace Navigator. 7 Workspace Navigator .The TPDesign4 Work Area Workspace Navigator . Popup Pages can belong to only one group at a time. or double-click on the folders to view the pages and popup pages they contain.Pages Tab Note that each Project folder contains two folders: Pages and Popup Pages. and of course they can live outside of any group at the same level as the group folders (see Popup Pages for additional information). one for Pages and one for Popup Pages. Each open Project is represented by a folder.

Properties Window The Properties Window is typically located on the right side of the screen (although you may move it anywhere you like) and is used to view/edit page.The TPDesign4 Work Area Workspace Window. 8 Workspace Window. the selected button is named "pause". Note that the title bar of the Properties Control window indicates which element of the workspace is currently selected. the title bar of the Properties Control window indicates the number of buttons selected. popup page and button properties. Select View > Properties (or click the toolbar button) to display the Properties window. and the button type is general. String Outputs and Command Outputs utilized in the panel file.11 or higher) . If one or more buttons are selected in the Workspace. and within Port by Code.Function Maps Tab Click the Function Maps tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Window) to view the Function Code Map. The Function Code Map is a representation of the Channel codes. Programming and States: 14 TPDesign4 (v2. Selecting a button from this list is the same as selecting it in a Design View window: the edit focus shifts to the selected button.Function Maps Tab This list is sorted by Port. Click the down arrow next to this field to view a list of all buttons on the active page. and the Properties window reflects the properties of the newly selected button. and to view/edit the states information associated with each element in your project. displayed in a hierarchical tree format in the Function Map tab of the Workspace Window (FIG. FIG. Address codes. Also note that the button name and type are displayed in the text box above the tabs (in the example below. The Properties Window contains three tabs: General. 8). Level codes.

General Tab To edit any of the listed button properties. 9). The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself). and drag it to another field. 9 Properties Control .11 or higher) 15 .The TPDesign4 Work Area Properties Control . When you release the mouse button. and the original value is left unchanged. Properties from the Properties window can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page. Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column.General Tab Click the General tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to set/edit general properties for all button types (FIG. select from a drop-down menu. click on an item in the right column to activate that field for editing. and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field. TPDesign4 (v2. FIG. Depending on the item selected. With an item selected. you can either set the item manually. the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value. the value is copied to the new location. or both. The General tab contains a table that lists the button properties for the selected button type (in this case. or the Page itself). TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog. General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms. General buttons).

16 TPDesign4 (v2. General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms. or the Page itself). The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself). similar to the General tab. 10). With an item selected. you can either set the item manually.The TPDesign4 Work Area Properties Control . and drag it to another field. Properties from the Properties window can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page. and the original value is left unchanged. 10 Properties Control . or both. the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value.Programming Tab Click the Programming tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to view/edit programming-related information for the selected button (FIG. select from a drop-down menu. This information is displayed in a table format. the value is copied to the new location.Programming Tab To edit any of the listed button properties. Depending on the item selected.11 or higher) . FIG. Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column. When you release the mouse button. TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog. and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field.

Properties from the Properties window can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. This information is displayed in a table format. and drag it to another field. Depending on the item selected. 11). the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value. FIG.11 or higher) 17 . TPDesign4 (v2.States Tab Click the States tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to view/edit the state information for each state associated with the selected button (FIG. 11 Properties Control . similar to the General tab. and the original value is left unchanged. meaning that the upper-left corner of each page is represented by the X-Y value of 0. or both. With an item selected. 0. TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog. Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column. The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself).The TPDesign4 Work Area Properties Control . The State tab contains a table that lists the properties for each state for the selected button.States Tab To edit any of the listed button properties. the value is copied to the new location. you can either set the item manually. General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms. All position (X-Y) values in TPD4 are zero-based (measured in pixels). and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field. or the Page itself). When you release the mouse button. select from a drop-down menu.

Also note that while you have multiple buttons selected. The button represented in the Properties Control window is the one with edit focus. FIG. Use the Prev and Next buttons to cycle through the selected buttons to view each button's properties in the Properties Control window. Using the Prev and Next buttons The Prev and Next buttons. the Prev or Next buttons will activate on the Properties Control window. 12 Apply To All toggle button If the Apply To All button is not depressed. located at the bottom of the Properties Control window (next to the Apply to All button) are activated only when more than one button is selected on a page. 12). you will see a message that states that the value was only applied to those buttons for which it was valid. You may also notice that one or more (if not all) of the property values in the grid are blank. These buttons allow you to quickly edit the selected buttons individually. Typing in or changing a value in any property box will immediately affect all selected buttons. but not on multiple states for a single button. To make state-oriented changes across multiple states. The only values that will display in the grid while the Apply To All button is depressed are those values that are common among all selected items. To make changes that affect all states on a button at once. only one of them has the edit focus at any given time. The button represented in the Properties Control window is the one with edit focus. use the All States option in the States tab (located directly above the other listed states for the selected button). When you have multiple buttons selected.11 or higher) . and the Apply To All button is not depressed (in its active state). All modifications are always done on the button with the edit focus. If the Apply To All button is depressed and you select more than one button to act on. 18 TPDesign4 (v2. This Apply To All button works on multiple button selections. In the event that a value is appropriate for one (or more) buttons but inappropriate for others. the Prev or Next buttons are unavailable and every selected button has the edit focus. Use the Apply to All option to set button properties to edit multiple buttons simultaneously.The TPDesign4 Work Area Using the Apply To All option The Apply To All toggle button is located at the bottom of the Properties Control window (FIG. select the states that you want to edit and they will appear listed in the States tab of the Properties Control window. Use the Prev and Next buttons to cycle through the selected buttons to view each button's properties in the Properties Control window. only one of them has the edit focus at any given time. Hold down the Shift key and click to select multiple buttons. provided that the change can be applied to them all. and you select more than one button to act on. All modifications are always on the button with the edit focus.

Insert. For buttons with multiple states. Replace states. Anything outside of that range will not be represented by a state. Use Shift+click to select a range of states (between two selections). the states will be displayed in reverse order. When the button is turned on it will display all the assigned states from first to last with a specified time interval between each state's display. When the button is turned back off. TPDesign4 (v2. Replace and Paste as well as drag and drop capabilities. To display the State Manager window. Copy. select View > State Manager. some visual distortion may occur. Right mouse click on any thumbnail in the State Manager window to open the State Manager context menu. which includes options to add single or multiple states. FIG. which includes options to Add single or multiple states. and does not represent distortion on the button itself. The State Manager window allows the viewing and modification of individual states. and remove states. Insert single or multiple states and Remove states. This is only a result of the scaling. and supports full Cut. Select a Page. The user will be able to set an allowable range within a bargraph that has states. 13 State Manager window The State Manager interacts with the Properties Control window to allow the visual aspects of a page. insert single or multiple states. Use Ctrl+click to select multiple individual button states. The interstate time intervals are user definable in 1/10th second increments. For Multi-General buttons. Each state of the selected button is displayed as a thumbnail image in this window. A zero entry will automatically advance / retreat to the ending / beginning state without displaying any intervening states. Send Commands can set the state number provided it is not a level type button. the level will directly reflect the displayed state. For Multi-Bargraph buttons. and back again to Off (Range Time Down in the States tab). replace states. Delete. Popup page or button to view the state or states associated with it. popup page or button to be set. Right mouse click on any thumbnail to open the State Manager context menu.The TPDesign4 Work Area State Manager window The State Manager is typically located along the bottom edge of the screen (although it is a dockable window and you may move it anywhere you like) and is used to view/edit the various states of a selected button (FIG. Double-click on any thumbnail in the State Manager window to view/edit the properties for the selected state. 13). in the Properties Control window (States tab). Use Ctrl+A to select all button states. Note that because the thumbnails displayed in the State Manager window are scaled versions of the button images.11 or higher) 19 . the different states (up to 256) are used to animate a button from Off to On (Range Time Up in the States tab).

unless all states have been selected. FIG. prior to the first state. or "Cancel".This column gives the Device # and a description of the target/source device. or after the last state is disallowed. and hold the mouse button down while dragging the selected state to another location in the State Manager window. For all other button types: A left or right mouse button drag-and-drop over a state will execute a replace operation. or after the last state will present a drag-and-drop menu with options to "Insert copy…". "Move…". The contents of the Drag-and-Drop menu change depending on the type of button selected: For Multi-General or Multi-Bargraph Buttons: A left mouse button drag-and-drop over a state executes a replace operation. containing options for establishing a connection to the NetLinx Master and panels. prior to the first state. Transfer Status Window The Send To Panel and Receive From Panel dialogs place the requested transfer into a queue. "Move…". 14 Transfer Status Window This window displays the following data for each transfer: Status .The status bars indicate the progress of each file in the transfer. A right mouse button drag-and-drop between states. A right mouse button drag-and-drop over a state presents a drag-and-drop menu with options to "Copy over…".The TPDesign4 Work Area State Manager Drag-and-Drop Menu To access the State Manager Drag-and-Drop menu. A left or right mouse button drag-and-drop between states. Device . Note that this context menu is identical to the Transfer Menu. which may be docked/undocked from the main application window (FIG. select a button state (thumbnail view). Right mouse click anywhere in the Transfer Status Window to open the Transfer Status context menu. and for transferring TP4 files to the panels. or "Cancel".This column indicates the name of the Project to which the files belong. A left mouse button drag-and-drop between states. "Insert copy…". and the overall status of the transfer. Project . or after the last state executes a move operation. accessible through the main menu bar: 20 TPDesign4 (v2. the status of which is displayed in the Transfer Status window.11 or higher) . 14). prior to the first state.

and (for the button the mouse is over): Location. and Feedback (FIG. Size: Displays the size of the button that the cursor is over. In the secondary view. All position (X-Y) values in TPD4 are zero-based (measured in pixels). meaning that the upper-left corner of each page is represented by the X-Y value of 0. it shows the current Cursor position. 0.The TPDesign4 Work Area Status Bar There are two views available for the status bar (located along the bottom edge of the application window). Address code and Level code (FIG.secondary view Cursor: Displays the current X-Y cursor position. 15): FIG. Add: Displays the Address code (port number:address code) associated with the button that the cursor is over. 17): not connected connected to an unsecured master connected to a secured but unencrypted master connected to a secured and encrypted master FIG. and the secondary view which is available via a double-click anywhere inside the status bar. 17 Status Bar . it shows the current Cursor position. and (for the button the mouse is over): Channel code.default view Cursor: Displays the current X-Y cursor position. 15 Status Bar . Size. Double-click anywhere on the status bar to view this secondary position. Lvl: Displays the Level code (port number:level code) associated with the button that the cursor is over. 16 Status Bar . Loc: Displays the X-Y location of the button that the cursor is over (relative to the upper-left corner of the button). In the default view. Ch: Displays the Channel code (port number:channel code) associated with the button that the cursor is over. FbBk: Displays the type of feedback associated with the button that the cursor is over. The Status Bar also indicates connection status as follows (FIG.connection status TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 21 . The default view. 16): FIG.

This window includes three command buttons: Click the Disable button to disable the button preview. 22 TPDesign4 (v2. Click again to enable the preview.The TPDesign4 Work Area Button Preview Window Select View > Button Preview to open the Button Preview window (FIG. Button Preview is not available for Joystick or Listbox Buttons. Initially the button is shown in its Off state. Right-click inside the preview area of the Button Preview window to access the Button Preview context menu. Like the other windows in TPD4. This allows you to visually preview the On/Off states (and all states in between.11 or higher) . Double-click inside the title bar to dock the window. Disable Mute Push FIG. the Button Preview window is fully dockable. for multi-state buttons). Click to Mute any sounds associated with this button. but initially it opens undocked. 18 Button Preview window The Button Preview window displays a preview of the selected button. Click on the button in the Button Preview window to "push" the button in an identical fashion to utilizing the Push command button. but not close the Button Preview window. Click the Push button to simulate a push on the selected button. 18).

State Manager and Button Preview windows) can be toggled on/off via the options in the View menu.Prints the current page view Next Page . The options in the Print Preview window toolbar include: Print .Zooms in on the page view Zoom Out .Toggles the page view to one or two pages. or along the edges of other docked windows. with the image centered on the printed page.Displays the next page of the selected file Prev Page . the File > Print and File > Print Preview options invoke a message alerting you to install a printer. as they will appear when printed. Working With Dockable Windows All windows in TPD4 are fully dockable. TPDesign4 (v2. To dock these windows.Zooms out from the page view Close . To dock/undock a window. To stretch the windows. drag the window to reposition it next to any border or window frame and the window will automatically snap to the nearest border. The printed output maintains a constant scaling factor across all pages. click on the title bar and drag and drop the window into place. Dockable windows can be re-arranged within the application window.Displays the previous page of the selected file One Page/Two Page . right or left side of the application window. Each page and popup page in the project is printed one per page. Properties Control. The dockable windows in TPD4 are: Design View Properties Control Workspace Navigator State Manager Transfer Status Window Button Preview Magnifier Window Moving.The TPDesign4 Work Area Print Preview Window Select File > Print Preview to display a preview of the pages and popup pages in the active project. bottom. Dockable windows automatically snap into place once they are positioned near an available docking area (along the edges of the application window. Zoom In . Workspace Navigator. To resize the windows. Select or de-select each window to toggle by checking or un-checking the window listings in this menu (checked = window is on/ displayed). Docking and Resizing Dockable Windows To move the windows.11 or higher) 23 . or along the edge of another dockable window. click on any border and drag the border either vertically or horizontally. double-click inside the window's title bar.Closes the Print Preview window If you don't have a printer installed on your PC. Toggling the Windows Each of the dockable windows (Design View. click on the bottom-left corner of the window border in the area shaded with parallel diagonal lines and drag the corner in any direction. This option is enabled only if the active file is longer than one page. They automatically snap to the top.

11 or higher) .The TPDesign4 Work Area 24 TPDesign4 (v2.

You can add pages manually via the Panel > Add Page command. The last dialog in the wizard (New Project Wizard . from a list of all available fonts on your PC.. Job Name: Enter a name for the new project. If the Use System Generated File Names option (in the Step 1 dialog) is not selected. select File > New. If you choose not to populate one or more of these fields. Fill out this information and click Next to proceed. DealerID: Enter the Dealer ID in this field. Click Finish to close the wizard.Step 2) contains fields for System-Generated File Names. If you close the wizard after step 1. The New Project Wizard is by its nature self-explanatory and intuitive. Use System Generated File Name: Click this checkbox to use a System Generated File Name for this project. FileRevision: Enter the Revision in this field. and has the edit focus. The first dialog to appear (New Project Wizard . 3. Use the New Project Wizard as a shortcut to starting new TPD4 projects. this dialog is skipped since the information entered here would not apply. Font: Click the down arrow to select the Page Font. Resolution: Click the down-arrow to select the target resolution for the project.Final Step) contains fields for setting up the initial touch panel page in the project. JobComments: Enter any project-related comments in this field.11 or higher) 25 . they will not be included in the System Generated File Name. The initial page is listed under the Pages folder. PurchaseOrder: Enter the Purchase Order number in this field.) to open the Colors dialog. TPDesign4 (v2. click Cancel. Designer: Enter the name of the project designer in this field. The next dialog in the wizard (New Project Wizard . Fill out this information and click Next to proceed.. you will have created a project with a single page. Fill out this information and click Finish to exit the New Project Wizard. You can change the target panel type for any existing panel file via the File > Save as Different Panel Type option. To launch the New Project Wizard. When you finish the New Project Wizard. Colors (Page background and Text): Click the browse button (.Using the New Project Wizard Using the New Project Wizard Overview The New Project Wizard steps you through the process of creating a new Project file (also known as a Panel file). FontSize: Click the down arrow to select the Page Font size. Every project created will have at least one page. Name: Enter a name for the page. where you can select the colors for the Page Background and Page Text. and consists of up to three dialogs: 1. Panel Type: Click the down-arrow to view a list of supported panel types. note that the new project appears in the Workspace Navigator window (Pages tab). To cancel the wizard at any point in the process. complete with a start page. SalesOrder: Enter the Sales Order number in this field. 2.Step 1) contains fields to allow you set up the basics of your new project.

New Project Wizard . Use the New Project Wizard as a shortcut to starting new TPD4 projects. Resolution: If the Panel Type selected supports multiple screen resolutions (such as the TPIs and NXV-300). The External Button Options and Panel Resolution selections cannot be modified once the panel project has been created. the extension is provided with the associated resolution (not all resolutions require an extension).Step 1 dialog The options in this dialog include: Job Name: Enter a name for the new project.Final Step dialog New Project Wizard .Step 1 dialog To launch the New Project Wizard (to create a new TPD4 Project). To launch the New Project Wizard.Step Two dialog 3. This invokes the first of three dialogs in the wizard (FIG. Select the desired external button layout from the drop-down list (MIO R-4 only). Use System Generated File Name: Click this checkbox to use a System Generated File Name for this project. click the down-arrow to select a target resolution for the project. The External Button Option selected here is represented in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog. use the Save As Different Panel Type option (File Menu) 26 TPDesign4 (v2. New Project Wizard . select File > New. CEA etc. The New Project Wizard consists of up to three dialogs: 1. Panel Type: Click the down-arrow to view a list of supported panel types. 19). If the selected panel type supports resolution extensions (VESA. to support transport and Teletext keypads.11 or higher) . complete with a start page. To change either of these. select File > New. click Cancel. New Project Wizard . FIG.Step One dialog 2. External Button Options: MIO-R4 remotes support multiple external button options. 19 New Project Wizard .Using the New Project Wizard New Project Wizard dialogs The New Project Wizard steps you through the process of creating a new Project file (also known as a Panel file).). To cancel the wizard at any point in the process.

Step 2 dialog If the "Use System Generated File Names" option (in the Step 1 dialog) is not selected. Job Comments: Enter any project-related comments in this field. TPDesign4 (v2. they will not be included in the System Generated File Name.Step One dialog to access the second of three dialogs in the wizard (FIG. File Revision: Enter the File Revision identifier in this field. 20 New Project Wizard . Sales Order: Enter the Sales Order number in this field. Purchase Order: Enter the Purchase Order number in this field.Step Two dialog Select Next in the New Project Wizard . The options in this dialog include: Designer: Enter the name of the project designer in this field. 20). If you choose not to populate one or more of these fields. Dealer ID: Enter the Dealer ID in this field. this dialog is skipped since the information entered here would not apply.11 or higher) 27 . FIG.Using the New Project Wizard New Project Wizard .

21).11 or higher) . Font Size: Click the down arrow to select the Page Font size.Final Step dialog Select Next in the New Project Wizard . FIG. where you can select the colors for the Page Background and Page Text. from a list of all available fonts on your PC. Colors (Page background and Text): Click the browse button (..) to open the Colors dialog.Step Two dialog to access the third of three dialogs in the wizard (FIG. Font: Click the down arrow to select the Page Font.Final Step dialog The options in this dialog allow you to set up the initial touch panel page in the project: Name: Enter a name for the page.Using the New Project Wizard New Project Wizard . 21 New Project Wizard .. 28 TPDesign4 (v2.

including pages and popup pages and associated navigation/page-flip information. popup pages and buttons (including External Controls. select File > New. TPD4 has a limit of 59 characters for the project name/filename. The New Project Wizard is designed to be simple and intuitive. When creating a new Project file. TPDesign4 (v2. Refer to the Using the New Project Wizard section on page 25 for details. Each page / popup page name must be unique within their respective panel files in order to be accepted by the program. if the selected panel type features external pushbuttons). To launch the New Project Wizard. and click Next to proceed to the next dialog. Simply fill in the fields in each New Project Wizard dialog. avoid using inappropriate file name characters.TPD4 Project Files (*. Click the Finish button in the last dialog in the wizard to close the wizard. and is ready for you to start adding pages. TPD4 will automatically truncate the name to 59 characters. Creating a New Project TPD4 includes a New Project Wizard. unless you explicitly choose to save them in another location. All name collision checks in the program are case insensitive. buttons including function code information.11 or higher) 29 . At this point. Project Files contain all of the information required to define the user-interface that is displayed on the touch panel.TP4) TPD4 Project Files (*. or click the toolbar button. the project is created with one generic page.TP4) Overview TP4 Project (or Panel) files are created in the folder specified in the application preferences. If you try to save with a longer name. to quickly guide you through the process of setting up a new project. and all image and sound-related files that are used in the design. Inappropriate File Name Characters Avoid using the following characters when naming TPD4 project files: Inappropriate File Name Characters • Vertical Bar • Question Mark • Asterisk • Less Than Sign • Greater Than Sign • Forward Slash • Back Slash • Double Quotes • Colon • Period | ? * < > / \ " : .

5678-9876. All information entered in this dialog can be viewed/edited at any time via the Panel Properties dialog.TP4) System-Generated Project File Names When you are creating a new Project.TPD4 Project Files (*. FIG. Dealer ID. If you select not to use System-Generated File Names. they are simply omitted from the file name.Step 2 dialog (System-Generated File Names) The resulting file name would be: "1234. When you utilize System-Generated File Names. 22. and Revision).Super-Dave Osborne. Use these fields to enter this additional information for this project.My TP Project. Purchase Order. 22 New Project Wizard . the resulting filename for this project file consists of each of these entries separated by commas. System-generated file names are generated automatically based on several fields that hold various types of project information (Designer. if all fields are filled in as shown in FIG. 30 TPDesign4 (v2.rev a. If you leave any of the fields blank. you are given the option to use System Generated File Names (in the New Project Wizard dialog).11 or higher) . These fields are all optional. the file name will match the Job Name entered in the first dialog of the New Project Wizard. Sales Order.TP4" The Purchase Order field and the (optional) Job comments field are not incorporated into the generated filename. For example.

TPD4 Project Files (*. 23 Page Edit Focus as Indicated In the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab) For buttons. edit focus is indicated in the Design View window with small red squares (with yellow outlines) on the edges of the selected button. If for example you had copied the value "410" from the Left (position) field in the Properties window. This means the last thing selected (not necessarily a button displayed in the Design View windows) has the edit focus. For pages and popup pages. TPDesign4 (v2. The Quick Input setting determines how typing directly into a Design View or into the State Manager will be handled: Current Property . and you perform a "Copy". 23 shows that "Page 1" has the edit focus. since it is not a valid Address Port number . popup page. FIG. then you will have copied only the Channel Port entry in the Properties Control window.This setting redirects keyboard input to the currently selected property on the currently visible tab of the Properties Window (assuming one is selected). Quick Input Select Quick Input from the Edit menu or Design View context menu to access the Quick Input sub-menu. Copy and Paste functions in TPD4 always work on the element which has the current edit focus. you can just type and press the Enter key to enter a new button name for the selected button. you are not allowed to paste it to the Address Port field.TP4) Edit Focus The page.these errors are indicated by a TPD4 error dialog. any time you select a button in the Design View. Button has Edit Focus Button does not currently have Edit Focus FIG. For example. For example. or button(s) that are the target for change actions are said to have the Edit Focus. edit focus is indicated in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab) by a small arrow at the lower-left corner of the icon for the selected page or popup page. "Page 2" has current Edit Focus FIG. The Cut. You can then paste the Channel Port number anywhere else in the Properties Control window (where the copied data is considered to be a valid entry). if you have selected an item in the Properties Control window (let's say you've selected "Channel Port". 24 Button Edit Focus as Indicated In the Design View windows Buttons that do not currently have edit focus are displayed with selection handles that are black squares (with white outlines). and not the associated button (even though it is selected in the Design View window).11 or higher) 31 . if you select the Name property (in the General tab of the Properties control window).

has the edit focus. For example. 32 TPDesign4 (v2. Text . or click Edit > Undo or Edit > Redo.This setting redirects keyboard input to the button Text property for all selected button states (in the States tab of the Properties Control window). You can then paste the Channel Port number anywhere else in the Properties Control window (where the copied data is considered to be a valid entry).see the Copying/Pasting Buttons section on page 110 Copying/Pasting States . If no states are selected. and you perform a "Copy". text is will be applied to all states of the button selected in the Design View. if you have selected an item in the Properties Control window (let's say you've selected "Channel Port".see the Copying/Pasting Pages section on page 81 Copying/Pasting Popup Pages . The following actions may be undone/redone: Button Property Changes Page / Popup Page Renames Button Deletions / Cuts Button Creations / Pastes Page / Popup Page Deletions / Cuts Page / Popup Page Creations / Pastes State Deletions / Cuts State Creations / Pastes Copying/Cutting/Pasting images and sounds Cutting.11 or higher) .TP4) The result of the keystroke will depend on the property selected. The commands alter their text dynamically to indicate which action is next in the undo/redo list.TPD4 Project Files (*. These actions are independent of any file saves. therefore you may undo past a save if you so desire. Click to select one or more actions to be undone/redone. You may either click the Undo or Redo toolbar icons. Once a panel file is closed. Disabled . Selecting either option will immediately undo/redo the last action. even individual button properties displayed in the Properties Control window) which has the current Edit Focus. then you will have copied only the Channel Port entry in the Properties Control window. which is not always necessarily a button displayed in the Design View windows. Click the down-arrows to view a history list that lists up to 25 of the most recent actions. it's undo/redo stack is flushed and is no longer available. For instance. if you select several states on a Multi-State button (in the State Manager window).see the Copying/Pasting Popup Pages section on page 94 Copying/Pasting Buttons . Copying and Pasting There are several items that can be cut. copied or pasted in TPD4. This means that each panel file that is open in the program maintains a separate undo/redo stack and manages this for the user. and not the associated button (even though it is selected in the Design View window). Copying/Pasting Pages . Undo/Redo TPD4 supports full Undo / Redo functionality at the panel level.see the Copying/Pasting States From a Page. Popup Page or Button section on page 205. This means the last thing selected. The ability to utilize these features effectively can greatly increase your productivity.Disables the Quick Input option. you can type and press the Enter key to enter new button text for the selected states. bitmaps. The Copy and Paste functions in TPD4 always work on the element (including buttons.

you may turn the Apply To All toggle button (located at the bottom of the Properties Control window) On. and you can select any available video source (1-4) as the source for a video fill. You can also select multiple buttons. See the Supported Panel Types section on page 2 for details. 4. using any of the following techniques: 1. When using the Selection Tool. FIG. you can assign a "video fill" to a page. Using the Selection Tool To activate the Selection tool. hold down the ALT key while clicking and dragging in a Design View window to move the current selections without selecting anything new on the mouse press (useful for moving popup pages whose entire area is filled with buttons). 25 Selection Tool Use the Selection tool to pick/select objects in the Design View window(s). 3. TPI-PRO and TPI-PRO-DVI accommodates up to four video source inputs. To de-select a button. then individually select each desired button. hold down the CTRL key while clicking and dragging to force a "lasso" selection to occur (even if the mouse was clicked over a button or Popup Page shown on the Page).TP4) If for example you had copied the value "410" from the Left (position) field in the Properties Control window. Left click on the remaining desired buttons while simultaneously depressing the Shift key on your keyboard. TPDesign4 (v2. you may only act on the selected buttons on one page / popup page at a time. hold down the CTRL key while moving the item with the keyboard arrow keys to move by the grid size instead of a single pixel (regardless of the grid visibility or snap to grid setting). Working With Video Fills If you are designing a project targeted at a video-capable panel. With an item selected in a Design View window. popup page or button. In the Properties Control window. you are not allowed to paste it to the Address Port field. Holding the CTRL key while resizing the selected items with the keyboard will resize by the grid size. 25). or left-click on the background of the page or popup page.11 or higher) 33 .TPD4 Project Files (*. You may perform a marquis selection by holding down the left mouse button outside the boundaries of the desired buttons and drawing a selection box around the desired buttons. select Edit > Selection Tool. Lasso selection forces you to draw a square around the outside of the item to select it. or click the toolbar button in the Selection/Button Draw Toolbar (FIG. To select all available buttons on a page or popup page you may either use the Ctrl+A hotkey. Although you may select and retain the selection of buttons on multiple pages. 2. or select Edit > Select All from the main menu. When using the Selection Tool. The NXP-TPI/4. as opposed to clicking on the item. either select another button. since it is not a valid Address Port number (these errors are indicated by an error dialog).

Sales Order. Created with Build Number. Dragging a Popup Page onto another Popup Page is not supported.com.TPD4 Project Files (*. Wakeup and Sleep). Battery Levels and Cradle Sensors. You can also drag and drop TPDesign3 (*. Sensors tab: Includes Channel/Level and Port settings for Light Sensors. AMX IR Receivers and User (non-AMX) IR Emitters. Refer to the G4 PanelPreview online help file for details. Dealer ID. Panel Setup Information tab: Includes touch panel setup options including Refresh Frequency. Setting Project Properties Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog. Last save date. The G4 PanelPreview application is available from www. Purchase Order. the Use system generated filenames option and Protection options with Password fields. IR Emitters and Receivers tab: Includes Channel Port information for AMX IR Emitters. This is a multi-tab dialog allowing you to view and edit the target touch panel's properties. Motion Sensors. Revision. Designer. Depending upon the panel selected. where you can preview the project and simulate push and release of buttons.amx. Creation Date. select Panel > Send To G4 PanelPreview (or click the toolbar button) to launch the G4 PanelPreview application. and must be installed in order to activate this menu option. to open the file via the TPD Conversion Wizard. Panel Strings (Startup.TPD) project files into the workspace. Revision Date.TP4) from a Windows Explorer window onto the TPD4 workspace to open the project. Popup Pages: Popup Pages can be dragged from the Pages tab and dropped on a Design View as an alternate method of displaying the Popup Page on the full sized Page. (including multi-state and bar graph buttons) via the mouse and keyboard on your PC. Marquee Speed. Job Comments. Using G4 PanelPreview To preview your panel project. 34 TPDesign4 (v2. each panel will support all or part of the following properties at the panel level: Project Information tab: Includes basic project information such as Job Name.TP4) Drag and Drop Support Project Files: Drag and drop TPD4 project files (*.11 or higher) . File Name. Power-up and Inactivity Settings and Feedback Blink Rate.

Designer ID . and the build number of the TPD4 used to create this project.Project Information tab Use the options in the Project Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to view/edit project information associated with the active project/panel file (FIG. 26). Modified . these fields will be blank.TPD4 Project Files (*.This editable field displays the current Dealer ID (identifier) associated with this project. These items represent the various components of the System-Generated File Name.Project Information tab The information in this tab was set up when the project was created.TP4) Project Properties dialog . Sales Order .This editable field displays the current Designer associated with this project. Dealer ID .This editable field displays the current Revision (identifier) associated with this project.This editable field displays the current Job Name associated with this project.This editable field displays the current Sales Order (identifier) associated with this project.This read-only field displays the last date on which this project was saved (and the build number of the TPD4 used to create this project). in the New Project Wizard. 26 Project Properties dialog .11 or higher) 35 .This read-only field displays the creation date for this project. Purchase Order . FIG. If the Use System-Generated File Names option was not selected. The options in this tab include: Job Name .This editable field displays the current Purchase Order (identifier) associated with this project. File Revision . Created . TPDesign4 (v2.

the Enter Access Password dialog appears.the next time this panel file is opened. Use System Generated File Names for This Project .11 or higher) .This editable field displays any comments that were added in the New Project Wizard.259 characters) to use if the file is set as either read-only or locked. Protection .This read-only field displays the full path and disc filename of the project. Confirm . prompting the user to enter the correct password in order to gain write access to the file. then selecting this option will replace the original information with the updated information from this dialog. Job Comments . and are only relevant within the context of the TPD4 application. 36 TPDesign4 (v2. locked .TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4) Revision Date .Use this text field to enter the password (1 . a "Passwords do not match" message box is displayed.the next time the panel file is selected to open. the word "[Locked]" appears immediately to the right of the project name in the Workspace Navigator. read-only . click on the Read-Only command button (in the Enter Access Password dialog). files opened as read-only cannot be saved to another file name. If system-generated file names were not used for the project. Once the password has been typed.Use this text field to confirm the password by re-typing the password exactly as it was entered in the Password field. prompting the user to enter the correct password to open the file. and no edits are allowed. Password . this information will be added on the next save. These protection options are not Windows file attributes.This read-only field displays the date of the current revision of this project. If the project was originally set up to use system-generated file names. File Name . To simply view the file (as read-only). If the file opened in read-only mode.this is the default setting (no password protection). it must be re-typed in the Confirm text field.Click the down-arrow to select one of three levels of password protection for this project file: none . Also. If the passwords don't match. the Enter Access Password dialog appears.Click this option to apply system-generated filenames to this project.

Wakeup and Sleep). from the dropdown list of supported refresh frequencies (based on the selected panel/resolution).Sets the speed of motion for Marquee text. Marquee Speed . the External Button Option selected is indicated as well. then the master will pass the strings from the device. Panel Strings . the panel will send this string to the NetLinx Master on wakeup. 27 Project Properties dialog .Use these three fields to specify text strings to appear on the panel. TPDesign4 (v2.Panel Setup Information tab This dialog identifies the panel for which this project is designed. 27). The options in this tab include: Refresh Frequency . For example.TPD4 Project Files (*. if you entered "Hello!" for the Wakeup string.11 or higher) 37 .TP4) Project Properties dialog .Click the down-arrow to view a drop-down list of all pages currently saved in this project. FIG. In the case of MIO R-4 remotes. and indicates it's screen resolution. the programmer typically creates a buffer or adds a DATA_EVENT/STRING: handler for the device.Select the desired refresh frequency for the selected panel. Click to select the initial startup page for the panel. Power Up/Inactivity Settings Power up page . In order to receive strings from a device.Panel Setup Information tab Use the options in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to view/edit setup information associated with the active project/panel file (FIG. during these three conditions (Startup. This will cause an RXON command to be sent to the device.

a text field is provided for you to manually enter the port number to be allocated.select to supply a specific port number to be allocated to dynamic list tables. Battery Levels and Cradle Sensors associated with the active panel file (FIG. if the ports/channels utilized in the dynamic table(s) will exceed those declared in the project. 28): FIG. 28 Project Properties dialog . Inactivity page . use this field to specify the blink frequency. When this option is selected.This field indicates the Power-Up popup pages that will appear over the Power up page.11 or higher) .Sensors tab 38 TPDesign4 (v2.Sensors tab Use the options in the Sensors tab of the Project Properties dialog to view/edit Channel/Level and Port settings for Light Sensors.If you are using blinking button feedback in your project.Click the down arrow to select which page to flip to after the specified period of inactivity (set on the touch panel). Automatically calculate channel allocation . Feedback blink rate (10th of second) .TP4) Power up popups .select to supply a specific channel number to be allocated to dynamic list tables.The use of dynamic list tables with channel codes may require the designer to specify the ports and/or channels to be allocated on the panel. Specify port allocation .select to have TPDesign4 calculate the maximum channels required (default setting). a text field is provided for you to manually enter the channel number. in 1/10th-second increments (default = 5).TPD4 Project Files (*.select to have TPDesign4 calculate the maximum ports required (default setting). When this option is selected. These options include: Automatically calculate port allocation . Specify channel allocation . Device Port/Channel Allocation . Project Properties dialog . Motion Sensors.

Use these fields to set the Channel port/code assignments for the Cradle Sensor on MVP panels.11 or higher) 39 .TPD4 Project Files (*. Motion Sensor .IR Emitters and Receivers tab The NXD/T-CV7 have AMX IR receivers. TPDesign4 (v2.Use these fields to specify the Level port/code assignments for the on-board battery charger.Use these fields to specify the Level and Channel port/code assignments for the onboard light sensor. 29 Project Properties dialog . Cradle Sensor (MVP panels only) . The channel will be turned on when the panel is docked (either in the tabletop docking station or in the wall cradle). and up to two user-defined ports for IR emitting using custom IR files (FIG. 29). FIG. Project Properties dialog .TP4) Light Sensor .IR Emitters and Receivers tab Use the options in the IR Emitters and Receivers tab of the Project Properties dialog to view/edit port information associated with the active panel file for AMX 38KHz IR emitting and receiving. AMX 455KHz IR emitting and receiving. Battery Levels . and the MVP-7500/8400 and MVP-8400i have AMX and User-defined IR emitters as well as a cradle sensor (see below).Use these fields to specify the Channel port/code assignments for the on-board motion sensor.

Applying Password Protection to Your Project File TPD4 supports two levels of password protection for Project (.) 3.These options allow you to specify the IR Channel port (either 38KHz or 455KHZ) to be used for standard AMX IR emitting for MVP-7500 and MVP-8400 panels.the next time the panel file is selected to open. Non-numeric values will be rejected and the value reset to zero. If the passwords don't match.Project Information tab. Click Apply to save the changes and apply the specified password to the Project file. User IR Emitters (MVPs only) . the file will not be opened at all. and are only relevant within the context of the TPD4 application. Click the down-arrow next to Protection to select a level of password protection from the drop-down list (either read-only. 30 Project Properties dialog . the Enter Access Password dialog appears. If the password is not entered correctly. or both. 30). in which case you'll need to re-enter the password. To apply password protection to the open Project file: 1. 2. The password is not required to open and view the file. or re-confirm the password. Applying changes made to the grid control will set the project's "dirty" flag.TPD4 Project Files (*. Passwords can be from 1 to 259 characters in length. all port values entered will be validated against other existing IR emitter or receiver port values to ensure that all non-zero IR port values are unique. a "Passwords do not match" message box is displayed. Additional User IR Emitters (MVP-5220 & MVP-5200i) . the Enter Access Password dialog appears. Note that if a read-only file is opened without using the password.These options allow you to specify the IR Channel port (either 38KHz or 455KHZ) to be used for AMX IR receiving for NXD/T-CV7 and NXD/TCV10 panels. As with the original two user IR ports. Modifying values in the grid control will activate the Apply button as appropriate.These options allow you to specify the IR Channel port (either 38KHz or 455KHZ) to be used for user-defined IR emitting for MVP-7500 and MVP-8400 panels.These options allow you to use up to 8 IR Emitters with the panel. Enter the password in the Password text field. Values in the Port column cannot be edited.the next time this Project file is opened. The User IR Emitters table displays a grid of user IR ports and their respective values in two columns. locked or none . These protection options are not Windows file attributes. The edit field will only accept integer values ranging from zero to 100 (consistent with other port values).11 or higher) . 5.TP4) files: Read-only . Re-type the password in the Confirm field. Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog .TP4) The options in this tab include: AMX IR Emitters (MVPs only) .see FIG. 40 TPDesign4 (v2. FIG. prompting the user to enter the correct password to open the file. The value associated with each port can be modified in-place.Password settings (Project Information tab. The default value for each port is zero (not used). prompting the user to enter the correct password in order to gain write access to the file. 4. it cannot be saved under a new file name. Locked . AMX IR Receivers (CV7 and CV10s only) .

Power-up page settings (IR Emitters and Receivers tab) Setting Power Up Popup Pages Use the Power-up popups option in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to specify one or more popup pages in your project to be displayed over the Power up page when the panel is turned on: 1.11 or higher) 41 . Select the page that you want to be used as the Power-up page from this list (FIG. presenting a list of all popup pages in the active Project (FIG. The popup at the top of the list is the first to be displayed. 4.TP4) Setting a Power Up Page Use the Power-up page option in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to specify a particular page in your project to be displayed when the panel is turned on: 1. click the down arrow next to the Power up page field to display a list of all of the pages in this project.TPD4 Project Files (*. you can specify the display order via the up/down arrow buttons below the Power up popups field. If you select more than one popup page. TPDesign4 (v2. 2. repeat steps 2 and 3 to select another popup. click the green Plus sign icon below the Power up popups field to invoke the Add Power Up Popup dialog. 31). 32 Project Properties dialog . 2. FIG. 31 Project Properties dialog . Select a popup page that you want to be displayed over the Power-up page from this list and click OK. 32). In the Panel Setup Information tab. The selected popup page is indicated in the Power up popups field. Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog. 3.Power-up popups settings (Panel Setup Information tab) 3. To display multiple popups over the Power up page. In the Panel Setup Information tab. FIG. Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog.

In the Panel Setup Information tab.TPD4 Project Files (*. 5. click the Remove Popup (X) button below the Power up popups field. 33).11 or higher) . Setting an Inactive Page Flip Use the Inactive Page Flip option in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to specify a particular page in your project to be displayed when the panel is inactive for a specified period of time: 1. click the down arrow next to the Inactivity Page field to display a list of all of the pages in this project (FIG. Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog. Click Apply to apply this change.TP4) To remove a popup from the Power up popups list. FIG. 33 Project Properties dialog . 2.Inactivity Page settings (Panel Setup Information tab) 3. You can use the Inactivity Page Flip option to create a "screen-saver" for the panel as part of your project. Select the page that you want the panel to flip to when the panel is inactive for the amount of time specified on the panel. 42 TPDesign4 (v2.

The Workspace Window contains two tabs: Pages and Function Maps (FIG. in the Workspace Navigator. Click the + symbol next to the folders. In the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator you will see that there are two panel level folders. and to view/edit the function codes associated with each page. each one with a different colored panel icon: Note that each Project folder contains two folders: Pages and Popup Pages.TP4) Using the Workspace Window The Workspace Window is used to open the pages / popup pages in the file (establishing edit focus).11 or higher) 43 . and of course they can live outside of any group at the same level as the group folders (see Popup Pages for additional information). Popup Pages can belong to only one group at a time. one for Pages and one for Popup Pages. There are several actions that you can do simply by selecting an item in the tree and choosing the appropriate command or toolbar button: Opening Pages/Popup Pages Via the Workspace Window Renaming Pages via the Workspace Window Drag and Drop Support TPDesign4 (v2. These folders represent Popup Page Groups. 34 Workspace Navigator . Each open Project is represented by a folder. or double-click on the folders to view the pages and popup pages they contain. Right-click anywhere within the Pages tab to access the Workspace Navigator context menu.Pages Tab Click the Pages tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Navigator window) to view the pages/popup pages contained within each open Project.all tabs Workspace Window . 34): FIG. Inside the Popup Page folder you may also see additional folders. and the presence of a Popup Page in one of these folders indicates that the particular Popup Page belongs to that group. Use the Workspace Navigator to view/open and rename panel pages.TPD4 Project Files (*.

Function Maps Tab Click the Function Maps tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Window) to view the Function Code Map. String Outputs and Command Outputs utilized in the panel file. This list is sorted by Port. Opening Pages/Popup Pages Via the Workspace Window You can open a page or popup page in the active Project by double-clicking on the Page or Popup Page in the Workspace Window . 35). The Function Code Map is a representation of the Channel codes. Address codes.11 or higher) .TPD4 Project Files (*. FIG. 35 Opening Pages/Popup Pages Via the Workspace Window 44 TPDesign4 (v2. displayed in a hierarchical tree format in the Function Map tab of the Workspace Window. and within Port by Code. Level codes.TP4) Workspace Window.Pages tab (FIG.

click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. 36 Properties Window To edit any of the listed button properties.TPD4 Project Files (*. Select View > Properties (or click the toolbar button) to display the Properties window. or the Page itself). Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column. The General tab contains a table that lists the button properties for the selected button type . General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms. popup page and button properties. Programming and States (FIG. Depending on the item selected. select from a drop-down menu. TPDesign4 (v2.TP4) Using the Properties Window The Properties Window is typically located on the right side of the screen (although you may move it anywhere you like) and is used to view/edit page. Properties from the Properties window can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page. The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself). 36). Properties Window .General Tab Click the General tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to set/edit general properties for all button types. With an item selected. the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value. The Properties Window contains three tabs: General. or both. the value is copied to the new location. TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog. and drag it to another field.in this case. When you release the mouse button. you can either set the item manually. and the original value is left unchanged. and to view/edit the states information associated with each element in your project. FIG.11 or higher) 45 . and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field. General buttons.

TPD4 will display up to a maximum of 15 page tabs. similar to the General tab. 37). 37 Paste Controls dialog 46 TPDesign4 (v2. Copying/Pasting Across Projects TPD4 allows you to copy and paste pages. popup page or button you want to retain in the target project. This information is displayed in a table format. and Images/Slots/Sounds when the page. Page Flip Options. popup pages and buttons. The State tab contains a table that lists the properties for each state for the selected button. If you open more than 15 pages. toggled or modified via the MDI tabs context menu (rightclick inside any of the tabs). This information is displayed in a table format.11 or higher) . but can be moved.TP4) Properties Control .Programming Tab Click the Programming tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to view/edit programming-related information for the selected button.States Tab Click the States tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to view/edit the state information for each state associated with the selected button. and there are a few key points to keep in mind in doing so: Use the Paste Controls dialog to specify wether to retain Function Codes (Address.TPD4 Project Files (*. Channel and Level codes). All position (X-Y) values in TPD4 are zero-based (measured in pixels). Working With Multiple Projects TPD4 supports working on multiple projects simultaneously. with a few limitations: Opening Multiple Projects Simultaneously Each project page has its own tab along the bottom of the Design View window (known as MDI Page Tabs). When this option is enabled. popup pages and buttons across projects to save time and effort. This can obviously be a major time saver. only the most recently opened 15 pages will remain open (the others will be automatically closed). You can copy/paste pages. popup page or buttons are pasted into a separate project (FIG. Use the View > MDI Page Tabs option to toggle the page tabs. Properties Control . 0. a tab is displayed for each open page. similar to the General tab. Give some thought to which elements of the page. The page tabs normally appear along the bottom edge of the Design View window area. including all of their various attributes across projects. meaning that the upper-left corner of each page is represented by the X-Y value of 0. FIG. This a powerful tool.

popup pages and/or buttons contain bitmaps. In the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). Using the TPD Conversion Wizard TPDesign4 includes a TPD Conversion Wizard tool that makes it easy to convert your existing TPDesign3 files for use with TPDesign4. Click Yes to continue. for use with G4 panels. Channel and Level codes). 3. 2. NXP-TPI4. Retain slot references and Retain sound references are all selected in the Paste Controls dialog). Copying/Pasting Pages.TP4) When you copy/paste across projects. icons and sounds that came over with the pasted buttons are available in the Resource Manager for the target project. the Copy toolbar button (). or select Copy from the Workspace Navigator context window). you can specify the target resolution for the project. Page Flip Options. project files that were created in TPDesign3 must be converted in order to be compatible with TPDesign4. once the conversion process is applied. Edit > Copy. Open the Paste Control Options dialog (Button > Paste Controls) to specify wether to retain Function Codes (Address.Warnings & Font Substitution (Step 2 of 3) dialog in the wizard contains two read-only text fields: The Pre-Conversion Warnings list box alerts you to any possible conflicts that will exist in the selected file. Step 1 of 3 (Select Source and Destination): In the TPD Conversion Wizard . the Project Migration dialog appears. A description and image of the selected panel is displayed. in the Workspace Navigator window (Pages tab). the Paste toolbar button. Pages and Popup pages are automatically pasted into the correct folders. those elements are copied into the target project along with the page. If you selected a panel that supports multiple resolutions (i. select the TPD project file that you want to convert (use the browse button to navigate to the desired file. icons and/or sounds. Once the migration process is complete and the project file has been saved. if the selected pages. you will see a Pre-Conversion warning TPDesign4 (v2. For example. the buttons are copied along with the page. b. 2.e. Project Migration (From Previous Versions of TPDesign4) If a TP4 project file created with a previous version of TPD4 is opened (File > Open).TPD4 Project Files (*. popup page or button (assuming that Retain image references. Select File > Save As Different Panel Type to launch the TPD Conversion Wizard. Click Cancel to abort the file open command. If you copy/paste a page or popup page containing buttons. prompting you to continue with the migration process. c. or select Paste from the Workspace Navigator context window). a. Click the down arrows next to Panel Type and Resolution to specify the target G4 panel for the project file.Select a Source & Destination (Step 1 of 3) dialog. and Copy (use Ctrl+C. The TPD Conversion Wizard steps you through the conversion process in three dialogs: 1. click to select the target project (the one that you want to paste the page or popup page into). However. Click to select the source page or popup page (the one that you want to copy to another project). Converting TPD3 files to TPD4 TPDesign4 is backward-compatible with TPDesign3. Popup Pages and Buttons Across Projects: 1. TPI-PRO-DVI). if the target panel/resolution differs from the original target of the TPDesign3 file. this process will not have to be performed again. the bitmaps. Once the buttons are pasted into the target project. via the Open dialog). Click Next to proceed. You don't have to actually open a page to copy it: simply select the desired page with a single click in the Workspace Navigator window and copy the page. Edit > Paste. TPI-PRO. then save the file. and Paste (use Ctrl+V. Step 2 of 3 (View Warnings and Substitute Fonts): The TPD Conversion Wizard . and Images/Slots/Sounds when the copied buttons are pasted into a page in a separate project.11 or higher) 47 .

with a few caveats: 1. since TPD4 sorts the page and popup pages alphabetically.TP4) message indicating that scaling will occur. you can select a substitute font to use instead. the pages and popup pages may appear in a different order than they occurred in TPDesign3. 3. Click Finish to launch the conversion process and open the Errors and Warnings Report dialog where you can view/fix the resulting warnings. 3. The lower list box indicates any fonts that were specified in the original TPDesign3 file. Select an External Button Option from the drop-down list. Select File > New to launch the New Project Wizard (New Project Wizard .Step 1) dialog. Neither errors nor warnings will prevent the file from being compiled. TPDesign4 generates a report that lists errors and warnings relating to the conversion process. are not currently installed on your PC). Click Filter Warnings to select which warning messages to display or suppress via the Filter Conversion Warnings dialog. The display area on R-4 remotes is 240 X 320 (pixels).Finish (Step 3 of 3) dialog lists the selected file.TPD4 Project Files (*. The pushbuttons on R-4 remotes are treated in TPD4 the same as external pushbuttons on any other panel type. the original panel/resolution association. 4. 5. Select Next to proceed to the New Project Wizard . this selection cannot be modified once the panel project has been created. R-4 Remote Controller Projects AMX R-4 Remote Controllers feature a color LCD touch screen that can be programmed and customized like any other touch panel type. Step 3 of 3 (Finish): The TPD Conversion Wizard . usually because there are button or buttons in the project that are smaller than the minimum size of the selected border. Select R-4 as the Panel Type. The conversion wizard handles most of these issues for you automatically. but will probably require that the issues be resolved in order to have buttons and pages that look and function as expected. The Errors and Warnings reports are displayed in the Errors and Warnings Report dialog. Select Next to proceed to the New Project Wizard . For each unmatched font listed.11 or higher) . Fill in the fields in this dialog as desired. the message "No unmatched fonts" is displayed. If all fonts used in the original file are still available. Warnings are issues that represent potential visual/formatting problems. Fill in the fields in this dialog as desired. The bottom text box lists all Warnings encountered during the conversion process. 4. and can be customized as External Controls. When you convert a TPDesign3 project to a TPDesign4 project via the TPD Conversion Wizard. Errors are issues that result in unexpected button borders. When the TPD file is converted and opened in TPD4.Final Step dialog. and the target panel/resolution. 48 TPDesign4 (v2. 2. like minor shifts in shape and size on some buttons. As with the panel resolution. but that are not available to TPDesign4 (i.e. Creating a TPD4 Project for R-4 Remote Controllers The process of creating a TPD4 project for R-4 remote controllers is essentially the same as for any other panel type.Step Two dialog.

TakeNote. R-4 Remote Devices . At this point. the initial page is opened in the Design View.TPD4 Project Files (*. TPDesign4 (v2. However.10. ready for you to: Set Page Properties and add Pages (note that the display area on R-4 remotes is 240x320 pixels).61.Levels • Mesh: • Mesh: • Mesh Neighbor: • Mesh Neighbor: • Mesh Neighbor: • Mesh Neighbor: • Mesh Neighbor: • Mesh Neighbor: Current TX Link Quality Current RX Link Quality Signal Strength Row 1 Signal Strength Row 2 Signal Strength Row 3 Signal Strength Row 4 Signal Strength Row 5 Signal Strength Row 6 Addresses R-4 Setup Codes . and are not displayed in the Properties Window (when an R-4 project is active).11 or higher) 49 .Unsupported Button Types Computer Control.TP4) 6. and Text Input buttons are not supported by R-4 remote controllers.Addresses • Time Display: • Date Display: Selected Format Selected Format These setup codes apply to R-4 firmware versions beginning with version 2. TPD4 will display an error message if you attempt to add an unsupported button type in an R-4 project. All button types continue to be available in the Drawing Toolbar. Programming and States properties for Buttons Pages Popup Pages (keep in mind that R-4 projects work just like any other panel type) Configure the external pushbuttons. Add Buttons and Popup Pages Set General. R-4 Setup Codes Levels: R-4 Setup Codes . Select Finish to close the New Project Wizard.

e.axi): R-4 External Buttons . the options include: Default Configuration . Keypad with Transport Functions .for use with a standard MIO R-4. this selection cannot be modified once the panel project has been created.TP4) External Button Options The first dialog in the New Project Wizard includes an option for selecting External Button Options.TPD4 Project Files (*. 50 TPDesign4 (v2.for use with a Teletext MIO R-4.for use with a Teletext MIO R-4 with transport keys. Teletext Keypad with Transport Functions . These defaults will not affect any existing R-4 projects. The choices available depend on the type of panel selected in the Panel Type drop-down: If you have selected a panel without external pushbuttons. If you have selected the MIO R-4 remote. i.11 or higher) .for use with a MIO R-4 with transport keys. Teletext keypad . This option allows you to select from multiple external button layouts. "<none>". R-4 External Buttons . the only available option is "Default Configuration" (and cannot be changed). As with the panel resolution. If you have selected any touch panel that is equipped with external pushbuttons.Default Channel Codes The default channel codes for R-4 external buttons match the corresponding G4 API values (defined in G4API. the External Button Options list is empty.Default Channel Codes Button MENU Up Down Left Right Select EXIT INFO GUIDE LAST G4 API CONSTANT BTN_MENU_FUNC BTN_MENU_UP BTN_MENU_DN BTN_MENU_LT BTN_MENU_RT BTN_MENU_SELECT BTN_MENU_EXIT BTN_MENU_INFO BTN_MENU_GUIDE BTN_TUNER_PREV Code 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 101 105 235 The default values are read in when a new project is created.

Toolbar Depending on what you are doing with the listed Image.Working With The Resource Manager Working With The Resource Manager Overview Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog (FIG. FIG. external to the panel. FIG. 38 Resource Manager dialog This dialog contains features and options that allow you to easily organize and manage Images. 39).WAV or . Dynamic Image or Sound files. 39 Resource Manager dialog . above the tabs (FIG. 38). Dynamic images can be refreshed at specified regular intervals or via the Panel > Refresh Dynamic Images option.MP3) to be used in your project. Slots and Sounds for your project. Slots: The Slots tab allows you to manage slot assignments for images and icons.11 or higher) 51 . TPD4 supports most popular image formats. organized into four tabs: Images: The Images tab provides a convenient way to import and preview all image files to be used in your project. The Resource Manager contains its own toolbar. one or more of the following options will be available: TPDesign4 (v2. Dynamic Images: The Dynamic Images tab allows you to manage images that exist on an HTTP server or FTP server. Sounds: The Sounds tab provides a convenient way to import and preview all sound files (.

or by selecting "When deleting resources in use" in the Application tab of the Preference dialog. If you only select one slot. Details . just from this project. Click to open the Create Dynamic Image dialog. Delete: Select one or more files and click Delete to delete them from the collection. Rename: Select an image file and click Rename to open the Rename dialog. PNGs are not converted because they are already sufficiently compressed. when you paste the multiple images. you'll only see the first one that you selected. New: This option is available only on the Dynamic Images tab (and replaces the Import button that is on the other tabs). However. Note that if you copy or cut multiple files to clipboard memory. the files are automatically converted to JPGs. Thumbnails . if you import (or paste) a file that has the same name as a previously imported file (even if it has a different extension). Export: Use this option to export one or more files to a specified directory. with a listing of all files targeted for deletion. displays the current file name). which allows you to add dynamic images to your project.Working With The Resource Manager Cut/Copy/Paste: Use these controls primarily to move images files to and from the Slots tab. List .lists the files in a single column. By default. as well as the Page(s) on which each file is used. you must select at least the same number of slots (in the Slots tab) in order to paste all of the files.11 or higher) . List Style: Click the down-arrow to open a drop-down list of the available display options for this tab: Small Icons . Click OK to rename the file. and New Name (enter the new file name in this field). with small file icons. with small file icons. you can toggle the display of this dialog either by selecting the "Don't show me again" checkbox in the dialog. 52 TPDesign4 (v2. the Resource(s) In Use dialog is displayed. If any of the files selected for deletion are used by the active project. containing two fields: Old Name (read-only. For this reason. the Resource(s) In Use dialog is set to display any time a used resource is deleted. Use the Choose Directory dialog to pick the target directory. TPD4 automatically adds the "copy of" prefix to the file.displays a thumbnail image of each file. The files are not deleted from the hard drive. You can also cut/copy/paste within any of the tabs. When images of any (supported) file type except PNG are imported into a project. Undo/Redo: All actions in the Resource Manager can be undone and/or redone. Use this dialog to locate and select image and sound files to import into this tab. Import: Click to invoke the Open dialog. They work in the typical way. and support selected multiple files.lists the files in columns.lists the files with file size and image dimension descriptions.

popup pages. 40 Resource Manager dialog . Static Image Files Before you can apply images to buttons and pages in your Project. Sort (ascending / descending): Click to sort the image files either in ascending (A-Z) or descending (Z-A) order.Images tab The Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to import and preview all image files to be used in your project (FIG. It is important to import all of your images to this tab first. the image and sound files must first be imported into the Project via the Resource Manager dialog. buttons and icons). button state. 40). FIG. it is available for selection to be applied to Pages. Popup pages or Buttons (at the state level).Images tab Use this tab as a "library" of every image file that will be used in your project (for pages.11 or higher) 53 . so that you can maintain an organized profile of all images in the project. page background. Once the image has been imported. etc). regardless of their context (i. Assign To Slot: Click to assign the selected image file(s) to slot(s).e. TPDesign4 (v2.Working With The Resource Manager Working With Images Resource Manager dialog . The Images tab provides the following command buttons: Select All: Click to select all image files. before they are applied in the project. Edit: Click to edit the file name of the selected item.

only one accommodates transparency as a color: PNGs. it will replace the original image on every button or page that referenced that file name in the Project. JPGs are recommended over PNGs. PNGs are not converted because they are already sufficiently compressed. 4. TPD4 automatically adds the "copy of" prefix to the file. the PNG file must be saved with RGB colors. 3. For the transparent color to be interpreted correctly by TPD4. 5.Working With The Resource Manager Consider assigning Slot positions to those image files that you expect to use multiple times in the Project. 6. Importing Image Files Into Your Project To import image files into your Project 1. anytime an image with a duplicate file name is imported. If this option is selected. Unless you are actually using transparency. Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. Notes on importing image files: When images of any supported file type (except PNG) are imported into a project. 54 TPDesign4 (v2. TPD4 supports most popular image formats. See the Working With Transparent Backgrounds section on page 106 for details.11 or higher) . Click the Overwrite resources with duplicate names checkbox to automatically overwrite any existing images that have the same file name as the image selected for import. Click the Import button to invoke the Open dialog. since they are usually slightly smaller in size. Click Open to import the files to the Images tab. the files are automatically converted to JPGs. Locate and select the file(s) to import. 2. This functionality works in an identical manner for sound files. if you import (or paste) a file that has the same name as a previously imported file (even if it has a different extension). Supported Image File Types TPD4 supports the following image file types: BMP (Windows bitmap) IFF (Interchange File Format) JPG (Joint Photographic Expert Group) PCT (Macintosh Pict) PCX (PC (Zsoft) Paintbrush) PNG (Portable Network Graphic) PSD (Photoshop) TGA (TrueVision Targa) WMF (Windows Meta File) EPS (Encapsulated Post Script) FPX (FlashPix) Notes: Of all the image file formats supported by TPD4. Open the Images tab. For this reason.

. so that the image will not be stretched. If you import an image file that has already been imported to the Images tab.Working With The Resource Manager The largest image size supported on the panels is 1280x1024. TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 55 . Any scaling that occurs is proportional.". This is true even if the second version of the image file you have imported is of a different file type with a different extension. the filename is changed to include the prefix "Copy of.. Any image files that are imported to the project that are larger than 1280x1024 are automatically scaled down to fit this maximum resolution.

The Dynamic Images tab provides the following command buttons: Select All: Click to select all images.Working With The Resource Manager Working With Dynamic Images Resource Manager dialog . buttons and icons). etc).Dynamic Images tab The Dynamic Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to import and preview all dynamic image files to be used in your project (FIG. so that you can maintain an organized profile of all images in the project. 41): FIG.e.11 or higher) . Dynamic images can be refreshed at specified regular intervals or via the Panel > Refresh Dynamic Images option. before they are applied in the project. Get Live File: Click to retrieve a thumbnail of the live feed. button state. page background. 41 Resource Manager dialog . Sort (ascending / descending): Click to sort the image files either in ascending (A-Z) or descending (Z-A) order. regardless of their context (i. to replace the generic icon in this tab. 56 TPDesign4 (v2. Edit: Click to edit the file name of the selected item. It is important to import all of your dynamic images to this tab first.Dynamic Images tab Use this tab as a "library" of every dynamic image file that will be used in your project (for pages. popup pages. Assign To Slot: Click to assign the selected Image file(s) to slot(s).

Refresh only at panel startup: Click to refresh this image only when the panel is powered up. Dynamic images can be refreshed at specified regular intervals or via the Panel > Refresh Dynamic Images option. Path: Enter the Path for the image source. 2. The Dynamic Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to import and preview all dynamic image files to be used in your project.Working With The Resource Manager Dynamic Images Dynamic Images are images that exist on an HTTP server or FTP server. external to the panel. Fill in the fields provided: Name: Enter a name for this dynamic image. rather than a directory path to an image file. 42 Create Dynamic Image dialog 4. Use the Scale Bitmap To Fit state property (Properties Control window . or FTP. Click the New button to invoke the Create Dynamic Image dialog (FIG. try to give the file a descriptive name so that it can be identified easily later. Host: Enter the Host Name (URL) or IP Address of the image source. Dynamic images can be applied to all button types except Computer Control and Text Area buttons. File: Enter the File name for the image source.States tab) to automatically scale (down only) the dynamic image to fit the button that it is being displayed on. Password: Enter Password if desired (optional). 5. 3. To use dynamic images in your project you'll specify a URL. Refresh Rate: Leave the Refresh Rate set to zero (default). This option is only displayed if the current panel type supports Dynamo Resource images (see the AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images section on page 6). Click OK to add the file to the Dynamic Images tab. Open the Dynamic Images tab (FIG. Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. FIG. User: Enter User name if desired (optional). This can be any name you choose. Adding Dynamic Image Files To Your Project To add dynamic image files to the Dynamic Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog: 1.11 or higher) 57 . Protocol: Select the communication protocol: HTTP (default). Dynamo Resource: Click to specify this image as a Dynamo Resource (for Dynamo Resource images only). 41 on page 56). TPDesign4 (v2. 42).

ac-images.com Path = images02/64 File = l_7e3368c694a94bacbbadfeb84f491004. Cut the file information from the Path string and paste it into the File field. At this point in the Create Dynamic Image dialog (FIG. we'll use "Photo 1". Cut the path and file information from the string and paste it into the Path field in the Create Dynamic Image dialog. Click New to invoke the Create Dynamic Image dialog. 58 TPDesign4 (v2. 4. refer to the source image properties: a. 44): Name = Photo 1 Protocol = HTTP Host = c1.com/images02/64/l_7e3368c694a94bacbbadfeb84f491004. it is not required as part of the Host.jpg d. Open the Resource Manager to the Dynamic Images tab. 2. since no credentials are required by the Host to access the webcam in this case. FIG. Enter a descriptive name for this dynamic image in the Name field (in this example. the host address information for this example is listed in the Location entry of the Element Properties dialog.Adding a Dynamic Image The following example steps you through the process of adding a dynamic image to the Resource Manager: 1. To provide the other information required in this dialog. and paste it into the Host field in the Create Dynamic Image dialog. e.ac-images. and delete "HTTP://" from the pasted string. Since HTTP is already selected (by default) as the Protocol in the Create Dynamic Image dialog.jpg The various types of information included in the Location string (as provided in the Element Properties dialog) must be broken up and entered into the appropriate fields in the Create Dynamic Image dialog in order for this dynamic image to work: c. 43 Example Element Properties dialog As indicated in the drop-down example above. the Host string contains Host address information as well as Path and File information: c1.myspacecdn. 3.jpg The User and Password fields are left blank. b. 43).11 or higher) . At this point.myspacecdn.com/images02/64/l_7e3368c694a94bacbbadfeb84f491004.Working With The Resource Manager Dynamic Image Example . In a web browser. Here is the full string provided by the image source for this photo: http://c1. Right-click to view it's element properties (FIG.myspacecdn. Verify that HTTP is selected as the Protocol. go to the image that you want to add as a dynamic image to the Resource Manager. but also protocol and path information as well.ac-images. Copy the address string from the Element Properties dialog. Note that the Location entry consists of not only the Host address information.

Click OK to add this image as a dynamic image to the Resource Manager (FIG. 45). When the Refresh Rate is set to zero. f. 44 Example Create Dynamic Image dialog The Refresh Rate should be left to zero (default setting). This option directs the panel to refresh this image only when the panel is rebooted. the Refresh Only at Panel Startup option is available. FIG.Working With The Resource Manager FIG.11 or higher) 59 . 45 Example Dynamic Image TPDesign4 (v2. to allow the image to update automatically based on the source's refresh rate.

3. with one exception: to specify that the dynamic image will be accelerated. FIG. as opposed to Dynamic (static) or Dynamo (non-accelerated) images. Dynamo Resource images are essentially the same as standard Dynamo images with one key difference: the playback of Dynamo Resource images is accelerated to up to 30 frames-per-second. and a select number of AMX Touch Panels support "enhanced" or "accelerated" Dynamo images.11 or higher) . Fill in the fields provided: Name: Enter a name for this dynamic image.11 or higher). User: Enter User name if required (this field is optional).Dynamo Resource option Creating a DynaMo Image 1. Path: Enter the Path for the image source provided in the camera or video server manufacturer's documentation (see the Network Path Information section on page 63). these are referred to as Dynamo Resource images. 46). 2. Host: Enter the IP Address of the camera/video server. click on New to open the Create Dynamic Image dialog. 46 Create Dynamic Image dialog . or click Get Live File to replace the icon with a thumbnail image. The process of adding a Dynamo Resource image to the Resource Manager is identical to that of adding a standard Dynamo image. Select Panel > Resource Manager to open the Resource Manager dialog.Working With The Resource Manager When Dynamic images are added to the Resource Manager. 60 TPDesign4 (v2. In TPDesign4. or FTP. See the AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images section on page 6. Password: Enter Password if required (this field is also optional). Protocol: Select the communication protocol: HTTP (default). DynaMo™ Dynamic Images TPDesign4 (v2. File: Enter the File name for the image source provided in the camera or video server manufacturer's documentation. they are initially indicated by an icon rather than a thumbnail image such as is shown in the example above Double-click on any Dynamic image icon. In the Dynamic Images tab. simply select the Dynamo Resource option at the bottom of the Create Dynamic Image dialog (FIG.

FIG. it is important to note the following: If there are multiple Dynamic images displayed on a single page. The user must type either "Anonymous" or "Guest" to access the specified FTP site. When working with Dynamo Resource images. In the States tab of the Properties window. To allow other users to access the files via FTP without password protection. Create a General button on which the DynaMo Dynamic Image will be displayed. TPDesign4 (v2. 4. Select one that fits your application requirements and interface design. which resembles the standard Dynamic Image icon but features a lightning bolt (FIG. the frame-rate on all Dynamo Resource images may be reduced as a result. 5.Dynamo Resource option The User (name) and Password fields are typically used with FTP servers. Select the DynaMo Dynamic Image that you want to apply to this button. with one exception: to specify that the dynamic image will be treated as an (accelerated) Dynamo Resource image. select Bitmap to enable the Browse (. only one of them should be set as a Dynamo Resource image. as opposed to upon each visit to the page (as is the default). Dynamic images that have the Dynamo Resource property set are displayed with a modified icon. select the dynamic image that you want to display on this button. 48). 47 Create Dynamic Image dialog . Click Browse to access the Select Resource dialog. The Dynamo Resource option is only displayed if the currently selected panel-type supports Accelerated Dynamo images (see AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images). The default value is 0. which means that the resource is only downloaded once. via the button's Bitmap properties: a. that matches the output resolution of the camera/video server providing the dynamic image.. Refresh only at panel startup: This option is only available if the Refresh Rate is set to zero. While TPDesign4 will allow you to place more than one Dynamo Resource image on a page. simply select the Dynamo Resource option at the bottom of the Create Dynamic Image dialog. FIG. 47). c.. leave the User and Password fields blank. Some cameras/servers support more than one output resolution.Working With The Resource Manager Refresh Rate: Refreshing resources will cause the button displaying that resource to refresh as well.) button b. Adding an Dynamo Resource Image to the Resource Manager The process of adding a Dynamo Resource image to the Resource Manager is identical to that of adding a standard Dynamo image. Dynamo Resource: Click to specify this image as a Dynamo Resource (for accelerated DynaMo Dynamic images only . In the Dynamic Images tab. and causes the dynamic image to refresh only upon restart of the panel.11 or higher) 61 .

Scale To Fit . Any paste operation that causes a Dynamo Resource image to be imported into a target panel project that does not support Dynamo Resource images will cause the Scale Bitmap to Fit setting to be reset on the imported resource. If the resulting image is larger than it's container. Note that this option is only available for Dynamo Resource Images (not for Dynamo Dynamic Images).The Dynamo Resource image is doubled in size. into an FPGA panel-type that supports Dynamo acceleration results in the Scale Bitmap to Fit value being set to No in the pasted button for all states. This is the default setting. If the Dynamo Resource image is larger than it's container.The Dynamo Resource image will not be scaled at all.11 or higher) . Copy/Paste Operations on Dynamo Resource Images Paste operations of a button with a Dynamo Resource image from a panel-type that supports Dynamo Resource images. 48 Dynamic Resource Image & Dynamic Image icons (Dynamic Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog) Scaling and Cropping of Dynamo Resource Images Dynamo Resource Images have specific scaling/cropping options available via the Scale Bitmap to Fit (State) property for any state that has a Dynamo Resource image assigned to the "Bitmap" property. Paste operations of a button with a Dynamo Resource image from an OMAP panel-type that supports Dynamo acceleration with a Scale Bitmap to Fit setting of Scale to Fit. and the image will be arbitrarily centered on the container button.Working With The Resource Manager FIG. Use the Bitmap Justification State property to position the dynamic image bitmap within the button borders. The Scale Bitmap To Fit options presented here depend on the panel type selected: No . 62 TPDesign4 (v2. popup or page. 2x . with a Scale Bitmap to Fit setting of 2x. popup or page. the image will be cropped on all sides by equal amounts. The Scale to Fit option for Dynamo Resource images differs from panels that do not support Dynamo Resource images in that the aspect ratio of the image is maintained. the image will be cropped on all sides by equal amounts.This option automatically resizes the Dynamo Resource image to fit the container button. into a panel-type that doesn't support Dynamo Resource images results in the Scale Bitmap to Fit value being set to No in the pasted button for all states. Click here for a listing of all AMX touch panels that support Dynamo Resource Images.

many networked cameras/servers are accessed using a regular HTML browser. left click on the streaming image and select Copy Image Location. What follows are examples for some of most popular manufacturers. however. or if necessary. An example of such browser is Mozilla FireFox. One way to work around this is connecting to your networked camera or video server using an Internet browser that captures the location or path to the stream. contact manufacturer's technical support.11 or higher) 63 . manufacturer's documentation and customer support are the most reliable ways of obtaining information on the device's communication protocol/syntax. at times it can be difficult to get the needed information with respect to the protocol/syntax of a particular camera/server.Working With The Resource Manager Cameras and Servers With M-JPEG Streaming Output A number of leading manufacturers are offering a variety of equipment that provides Motion JPEG streaming output. what is being sent to the camera/server in the path is a CGI call that may have additional parameters based on the feature set of the camera/server and the syntax the manufacturer requires. Using the browser you can go to your network device's IP address. you may need to consult product documentation. In the case of streaming network cameras/servers. For example.mozilla.org. However. Like with any other type of equipment AMX controls. For Dynamo. manufacturers are using somewhat different syntax for requesting Motion JPEG streams from their networked cameras and servers. TPDesign4 (v2. This can also help you fully utilize optional features available on that specific device. at points we have to work through the different ways manufacturers implement standards. not the entire HTML page served by the camera/server by default. Below is a sample list of popular manufacturers and models: Motion JPEG Cameras and Servers Manufacturer Axis Network camera 205 Network Camera 2100 Network Camera 2120 Network Camera 2420 Network Camera Panasonic KX-HCM280 Color Pan Tilt Zoom KX-HCM10 Indoor Pan Tilt KX-HCM250 Wireless Pan Tilt KX-HCM230 Outdoor Pan Tilt Sony Trendnet Vivotek SCN-RZ30N Pan/Tilt/25x Zoom TV-IP301 IP2111 Network Camera IP2112 Network Camera VS2402 Video Server Network video server 241Q Video Server 4 Inputs 241S Video Server 1 Input Network Path Information While AMX strives to bring to the market innovative features such as support for Motion JPEG. You can download a free version of FireFox at www. Depending on the camera/network video server type you are using. and the camera/ server is serving up an HTML page with a video window being a part of the page. however. the panel needs to access only the M-JPEG stream. In general.

49). 49 Dynamic Image Settings .Working With The Resource Manager Dynamic Image Settings . just as a number of other features that can be indicated in the path (FIG. Each camera can also have a camera ID number but that is optional.Example 2: Panasonic FIG.Example 1: Axis Manufacturer: Axis Model: 2100 (camera) Path: axis-cgi/mjpg/video.11 or higher) .Example 1: Axis Axis equipment supports a number of resolutions.cgi?camera=&resolution=320x240 Dynamic Image Settings .Example 2: Panasonic Manufacturer: Panasonic Model: BL-C10A (camera) Path: nphMotionJpeg?resolution=320x240&Quality=Standard 64 TPDesign4 (v2. FIG. and therefore requires that the target resolution be indicated. 50 Dynamic Image Settings .

In TPD4. we'll use "Beach 1").11 or higher) 65 . 52): TPDesign4 (v2. 2. In a web browser.Example 3: Vivotek Manufacturer: Vivotek Model: 2111 (camera) Path: cgi-bin/video. 51 Dynamic Image Settings . Right-click to view it's element properties (FIG.30) Path: goform File: video2 user & password are blank Refresh Rate: 1 (or more) DynaMo Dynamic Image Example .Working With The Resource Manager Dynamic Image Settings . Click New to invoke the Create Dynamic Image dialog. go to the web cam that you want to add as a dynamic image to the Resource Manager. set the dynamic image properties to: Protocol: HTTP (default) Host: (the default IP of this camera is 192.168.1. 2. b. Enter a descriptive name for this dynamic image in the Name field (in this example. The default settings of "640x480" and "Highest Quality" should be OK. 3.Example 3: Vivotek FIG. 4.Adding a Streaming Webcam Image The following example steps you through the process of adding a dynamic image in the form of an online streaming webcam to the Resource Manager: 1. To provide the other information required in this dialog. refer to the source image properties: a. Configure the camera for JPEG and 15fps. Open the Resource Manager to the Dynamic Images tab.jpg?cam=1&quality=3&size=2 Working With Trendnet IP Cameras To get a streaming image from the TV-IP301 Trendnet IP camera on to a dynamic image window of a touch panel: 1.

cgi? File = camera=1&resolution=480x360&time=1228758918124&dummy=image.axiscam. Note that the Location entry consists of not only the Host address information.jpg d. At this point. Cut the file information from the Path string and paste it into the File field. Copy the address string from the Element Properties dialog. the Host string contains Host address information as well as Path and File information: coralsandsinn. the host address information for this example is listed in the Location entry of the Element Properties dialog. b. e. since no credentials are required by the Host to access the webcam in this case.cgi?camera=1&resolution=480x360&time=1228758918124&dummy=image. c. Here is the full string provided by the image source for this webcam: http://coralsandsinn.net/axis-cgi/jpg/ image. At this point in the Create Dynamic Image dialog: Host = coralsandsinn. and paste it into the Host field in the Create Dynamic Image dialog.jpg The User and Password fields are left blank.axiscam.Working With The Resource Manager FIG.axiscam. The various types of information included in the Location string (as provided in the Element Properties dialog) must be broken up and entered into the appropriate fields in the Create Dynamic Image dialog in order for this dynamic image to work: a. and delete "HTTP://" from the pasted string. Since HTTP is already selected (by default) as the Protocol in the Create Dynamic Image dialog. Verify that HTTP is selected as the Protocol.net Path = axis-cgi/jpg/image.cgi?camera=1&resolution=480x360&time=1228758918124&dummy=image. it is not required as part of the Host.11 or higher) .net/axis-cgi/jpg/ image. but also protocol and path information as well.jpg 5.element properties As indicated above. Cut the path and file information from the string and paste it into the Path field in the Create Dynamic Image dialog. 52 Online webcam . 66 TPDesign4 (v2.

to allow the image to update automatically based on the source's refresh rate. Double-click on any Dynamic image icon. TPDesign4 (v2. they are initially indicated by an icon rather than a thumbnail image.11 or higher) 67 . The Refresh Only at Panel Startup option directs the panel to refresh this image only when the panel is rebooted. When Dynamic images are added to the Resource Manager. the Refresh Only at Panel Startup option is available. When the Refresh Rate is set to zero.Working With The Resource Manager The Refresh Rate should be left to zero. FIG. or click Get Live File to replace the icon with a thumbnail image. Click OK to add this webcam as a dynamic image to the Resource Manager. 53 Example Create Dynamic Image dialog f. Click Dynamo Resource to use this Dynamic Image as an (accelerated) DynaMo Dynamic Image.

it is available for selection as an icon through the Properties Control Window (States tab). 54 Resource Manager dialog . Resource Manager dialog . it is considered to be an Icon.Slots tab The Slots tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to preview and manage all image and sound files that are being used in your project (FIG. All image and sound files must be assigned to a slot before they can applied to pages. Once a Image or Sound has been assigned to a slot in the Resource Manager. the Slot tab lists only those image and sound files that are currently assigned to a slot. Once an image or sound file has been assigned a slot. it can be used as an Icon in your Project. TPD4 supports up to 500 icon slot assignments. 54). FIG. Once an image file is imported into the Project (via the Resource Manager). Each project has 2000 slots available. 68 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) . Popup Pages or Buttons in the Project.Slots tab Where the Images and Sounds tabs contain "libraries" of all Image and Sound files (even if they have not been assigned to a slot).Working With The Resource Manager Working With Slots TPD4 utilizes the concept of Slots for adding Icons to Pages. Once the image file is assigned to a Slot. The Slots tab of the Resource Manager dialog lists all Icon Slot assignments currently defined in the Project. popup pages and/or buttons as Icons. it can be assigned to a Slot position.

Click Assign To Slot. you can use up to 9900 slots per panel if necessary by changing the maximum number of slots per panel.11 or higher) 69 . Note that the Overwrite and Insert options affect how the Move option works. The selected file is duplicated in the targeted slot. The two file / slot assignments are swapped. If you select five slots. TPDesign4 (v2. and click Swap. Open the Images. 4. If you are assigning a single file to a slot with a pre-existing file assignment. First select a file / slot assignment. then select the slot that you want to target for the duplicated file. you'll have to more careful about how you choose to assign the files. if you selected ten files to assign to slots. 3. there is no need to assign it to a slot (see Bitmaps vs. If you selected multiple files. By default. in the order in which they were selected. First select the file that you want to duplicate. Cancel: If have selected one or more images. Assigning Images and Sounds to Slot Positions To assign image files. Select one or more files (Ctrl + click to select multiple files individually. Use the Overwrite and Insert radio buttons to select a preference for assigning files to slot(s) with previous file assignments. select ten slots before assigning the files. Duplicate: Use this option to duplicate a selected file to another slot. If you select just one slot. If there are already some slot assignments present (in the Slots tab). When pasting multiple image files to the Slots tab. dynamic images or sound files to slot positions for use in the Project: 1. they will be assigned in the order in which they were selected. click Assign (in the Slots tab) to assign the file to slot 1. and clicked Assign to Slot (in the Images tab). In this case. Assign: This command assigns the selected Image or Sound file(s) to slot(s). Select Overwrite to automatically overwrite any pre-existing file assignments in the affected slots. depending on the type of file you are adding. then click on the target slot for the selected file and click Move. However. If there are no images or sounds already assigned to slots (the Slots tab is empty). 54 on page 68). The files will be pasted consecutively. click the slot where you want to begin pasting the set of images. and click Duplicate. Dynamic Images or Sounds tab. 2. The toolbar button in this tab contains several command options: Select All: Click to select all slots (1-2000). Select Insert to insert the files without overwriting anything. This open the Slots tab (FIG. If you are assigning multiple files to multiple slots. you can click Cancel to cancel the process before you set the slot assignment. the program limits you to 2000 slots per panel. or Shift + click to select a range of files). Move: Use this option to move a slot assignment. you must select the same number of slots as the number of images copied. Ctrl + click to select two files. the other slot assignments are shifted to accommodate the new assignments.Working With The Resource Manager If you don't intend to use a image or sound file as an Icon. For example. Icons). only the first file selected will be assigned. Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. Swap: Use this option to swap two file / slot assignments. only the first five files will be assigned. The selected file is moved to the selected slot. click to select the slot to which you want to apply the image file and click Assign (in the Slots tab).

Icons TPD4 uses two concepts of image files: Bitmaps and Icons. JPGs. but an image cannot also be referenced as an Icon until it is assigned to a slot in the Resource Manager. however. and assigned slot numbers (via the Resource Manager dialog). Bitmaps that have been imported into the Project are listed in the Images tab of the Resource Manager. when a Bitmap (in the Images tab of the Resource Manager) is deleted. The important thing to understand about Bitmaps in the context of TPD4 buttons is that they are drawn first. that image is removed from the entire project. and place an Icon on top of the Bitmap. Any supported image file can be made to be an icon. For example. Icons occupy slots in the Resource Manager. Icons are different than Bitmaps in several ways: All imported images are considered to be Bitmaps. Bitmaps vs. PSDs and BMPs (among others) are supported Bitmap file types. You can think of Bitmaps as the background image used on Pages. Having an image assigned to a slot allows you to reference the same image as either a Bitmap or an Icon. Icons can also be put into motion via the Slot Position tweener (accessible via the Tweeners sub-menu). on top of the icon. For example. including all slots to which it was assigned. Popup Pages and Buttons. 70 TPDesign4 (v2. and are always appear on top of the Bitmap layer. and they are always placed in a layer beneath any Icons. There are important differences in the way each type is treated: Bitmaps: The term Bitmap is a generic term that describes any pixel-based image file. Text is always drawn last. Bitmaps cannot. Use icons as button graphics that can be placed "on top" of a color fill. icons exist before bitmaps in the Z-Order. a Bitmap can be any supported image type (not limited to . For example. In TPD4. bitmap or video fill background. In TPD4. simply by assigning it to a slot position. Icon Slot Assignments that have been specified in the Project are listed in the Slots tab of the Resource Manager. When an image's slot position assignment is deleted from the Project. you could create a button with a Bitmap image. PNGs.BMP files). you could place a static icon over an animated bitmap or color transition effect. Think of bitmaps as the background button graphic. the image is still available as a Bitmap (and remains in any other slot it is assigned to). Icons: The term Icon refers to any image file that has been imported into the Project and assigned to a Slot position in the Resource Manager. so they are always drawn on top of a bitmap image. Icons are drawn after Bitmaps. which may also use Icons (as well as text) in addition to the background image (see Z-Order for details).11 or higher) .Working With The Resource Manager Working With Icons Icons are bitmap images that have imported into the project. See Z-Order for details. Icons allow for complex graphics and animations. and icons as the foreground graphic image.

Assign To Slot: Click to assign the selected sound file(s) to slot(s).MP3 files.WAV and . It is important to import all of your sound files to this tab first. Sort (ascending / descending): Click to sort the sound files either in ascending (A-Z) or descending (Z-A) order.11 or higher) 71 . buttons and icons). etc).Working With The Resource Manager Working With Sounds Resource Manager dialog . The Slots tab provides the following command buttons: Select All: Click to select all sound files. so that you can maintain an organized profile of all sound files in the project. regardless of their context (i. Use this tab as a "library" of every sound file that will be used in your project (for pages. popup pages. Edit: Click to edit the file name of the selected item. 55 Resource Manager dialog .e. button state. 55): FIG. TPDesign4 (v2.Sounds tab TPD4 supports .Sounds tab The Sounds tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to import and preview all sound files to be used in your project (FIG. page flip. before they are applied in the project.

If MP3 files are encoded correctly. 4. If you import an sound file that has already been imported to the Sounds tab. This invokes the Open dialog. Click the Import button. the filename is changed to include the prefix "Copy of. 72 TPDesign4 (v2. or Shift + click to select a range of files). There are many freeware programs available to encode WAV files into MP3's. 3. Select one or more files to export (Ctrl + click to select multiple files individually. The primary difference between the two is that MP3 represents a compressed version of a WAV file. 2. anytime a sound file with a duplicate file name is imported. 56 Choose Directory dialog 5. Exporting Image and Sound Files From Your Project To a Specified Directory To export image (including dynamic images) and sound files from Resource Manager dialog to a specified directory: 1..Working With The Resource Manager Supported Sound File Types TPD4 supports WAV and MP3 sound formats. 6. Open the Sounds tab. Click the Export button.. 6. Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. 3. Use the Browse button to locate a target directory for the files.". If this option is selected. Locate and select the file(s) to import. 5. Click Open to import the files to the Sounds tab.11 or higher) . Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. Importing Sound Files To Your Project To import sound files to the Sounds tab of the Resource Manager dialog (FIG. you should experience very little (if any) difference in sound quality. Open the appropriate tab for the type of file you want to export (Images. This opens the Choose Directory dialog (FIG. Slots or Sounds). This is true even if the second version of the sound file you have imported is of a different file type with a different extension. 56). 2. The program prompts you when the export is finished. FIG. 55 on page 71): 1. Dynamic Images. Click OK. it will replace the original file on every button or page that referenced that file name in the Project. Click the Overwrite resources with duplicate names checkbox to automatically overwrite any existing sound files that have the same file name as the file selected for import. 4.

. Open the Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog. Click the Edit button to launch the external program specified as the default editor for sound files. you can access it via the Edit button in the Images and Sounds tabs of the Resource Manager dialog. When the edit session begins. delete.Working With The Resource Manager Editing Image and Sound Files Using External Programs TPD4 supports the use of external programs for editing image and/or sound files used in your project.g. rename. Any subsequent changes made in the external editor will not be reflected nor applied. You must first associate one or more external editing programs with Image files. See the Program Preferences section on page 265 for details.11 or higher) 73 . Select the sound file that you want to edit. Click the Edit button to launch the external program specified as the default editor for image files. Editing Sound Files 1. undo/redo. etc. See the Adding an External Editing Program for Image Files section on page 272. and another for Sound files. Any action taken in TPD4 that would change the state of the image or sound file being edited (e. and control is returned to TPD4. and specify the default editors. TPDesign4 (v2. 3. 2. 2.) will cause the link between TPD4 and the external application to be broken. Select the image file that you want to edit. Once you have indicated a program to be used as the default editor. Use the options in the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog to add external image and sound editing programs. the Adding an External Editing Program for Sound Files section on page 272 and the Changing the Default External Image or Sound Editor Program section on page 273 for more information. Any saved changes to the resource made in the external editor will be immediately reflected in TPD4. the image or sound file is opened in the default editing program. Open the Sounds tab of the Resource Manager dialog. 3. Editing Image Files 1.

11 or higher) .Working With The Resource Manager 74 TPDesign4 (v2.

all name collision checks in the program are case insensitive. The active project/page is indicated in the Workspace Window by a green wedge to the left of the panel and page icons. "TPI-PRO-DVI test" is the active project. 57. Creating a New Page 1.Working With Pages Working With Pages Overview Pages are not only containers for buttons. 58). 58 Add Page dialog TPDesign4 (v2. Select Panel > Add Page (or click the toolbar icon) to open the Add Page dialog (FIG. Double-click on any page contained in any open project to set it as the active project. You may place text directly on a page outside the context of a button. If you change any of these properties (except the name) your changes will be saved and future page creations will carry those selections forward.11 or higher) 75 . FIG.see the Creating a Page Flip section on page 108. but can also have up to one address port / address code and up to one channel port / channel code combination. In FIG. and "Page 1" is the active page in the project: FIG. and a font for any text specified (including the font size and settings). Each page must be uniquely named within its respective panel file in order to be accepted by the program. Pages cannot have borders and possess only one state. The maximum number of pages in a panel file = 500. the text color for text applied directly to the page. the page background color. You can select the name for the page. 57 Workspace Window (indicating the active Project & Page) Page Flips (which provide the ability to "flip" from one page to another via a button press) are a button-oriented function .

The State tab contains a table that lists the page state properties for the active page. 6. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. In most cases. you might see some slight variation in some colors if you switch from the RGB Color palette to Palette Index. the Properties Window displays the properties available for the Page. To set Page-level properties.) next to Text to open the Colors dialog. Setting Page Properties Panel Pages have a set of Page Properties that can be configured via the fields in the Properties Window.. Depending on the item selected.Working With Pages 2. since TPD4 tries to match the color exactly. Depending on the item selected. click on the Page area in the Design View (as opposed to a button on the page). 5. Click OK to add the new page to the active project. Programming and States). The Programming tab contains a table that lists the programming properties for the active page. separated into three tabs (General. Set the Font Name and Size. A sample of the selected font type and size is displayed in the window beneath these fields. select from a drop-down menu. The following general properties are supported at the page level: Name Description Setting Programming Properties: Pages Use the Programming tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit page programming properties. To edit any of the listed properties. you can either set the item manually. The following programming properties are supported at the page level: Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Setting States Properties: Pages Use the State tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit page state properties. b. The General tab contains a table that lists the page properties for the active page. Set the Page Background color: a.) next to Page Background to open the Colors dialog. any variation that occurs in the translation is extremely subtle. Note the current and new color selections are shown together for comparison on the left side of the dialog.. you can either set the item manually.. or both. Single-click to select a new color from the list. 4. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. you can either set the item manually. Setting General Properties: Pages Use the General tab of the Properties Window to set/edit page properties. 3. select from a drop-down menu. 76 TPDesign4 (v2. Note the current and new color selections are shown together for comparison on the left side of the dialog. Enter a descriptive name for the new page in the Name field (avoid using inappropriate file name characters). or both. select from a drop-down menu. Because the RGB Color palette supports more colors than the Palette Index. or both. Set the Page Text color (for text applied directly to the page): a. To edit any of the listed properties. With the Page selected. To edit any of the listed properties. under the project to which the page was added (as the active page). Depending on the item selected. Click the browse button (. The new page will be appear in the Workspace Navigator in the Pages folder.. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. b.11 or higher) . Single-click to select a new color from the list. Click the browse button (.

Fill Color field 3. 60).Pages tab). 2. simply click on a Page entry in the Workspace Window and type directly into the text field (FIG. Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog.Working With Pages The following state properties are supported at the page level: Draw Order Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Video Fill Video Touch Pass-Thru Bitmap Bitmap Justification Icon Slot Icon Justification Font Text Text Justification Text Effect Word Wrap Sound Renaming a Page To rename any Page in the active project. and select the color that you want to apply to the page. In the States tab of the Properties Window. FIG. FIG. 59 Renaming a Page (via the Workspace Window) Adding a Fill Color to a Page 1.11 or higher) 77 . 4.. TPDesign4 (v2.. click on the Fill Color field to enable the browse (.) button (FIG. Click OK to close the Colors dialog. 59). 60 States tab of the Properties Control window . Select the page to which you want to add or change the Fill Color (via the Workspace .

check the Width and Height values in the Properties Control window (General tab). Select the page to which you want to add or change a bitmap image (via the Workspace . Match the image size (in pixels) to the size indicated there. open the image in any graphics editor program..Pages tab). to serve as the background image. 61). In the States tab of the Properties Window. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog.. 62). To scale an image to fit a target Page.Working With Pages Adding a Bitmap to a Page You can apply a bitmap directly to a Page in your project. 2. 1. 62 States tab of the Properties Control window . where you can select the desired bitmap. 61 States tab of the Properties Control window . Note that only bitmaps that have already been imported into the project are listed in the Select Resource dialog. click on the Bitmap field to enable the browse (.Bitmap Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the image. Use the Import button (at the lower-left of this dialog) to import new bitmaps into the project. Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog. TPD4 does not automatically scale or stretch images to fit the Page.11 or higher) . and scale the image to the exact size (in pixels) of the Page. 78 TPDesign4 (v2. 5.) button (FIG. FIG.Bitmap field 3. 4. FIG. To check the size of the Pages in your project. Click Bitmap Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the image on the page (FIG.

Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog. click on the Text field to enable the browse (. and type the page text as desired (up to 4096 characters).Text field Click the browse button to open the Enter Text dialog. Click Icon Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the image icon on the page (FIG. 1.Icon Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the image. 65). Since G4 panels utilize address and channel port/address codes (and possess a single state). the text will automatically be displayed on top of the bitmap. you can type directly into the Text field. unless otherwise directed via the Draw Order selection by the user (see the Draw Order (Z-Order) section on page 206). If you are also displaying a bitmap on the Page.) button (FIG.Pages tab).Pages tab). FIG. 2.11 or higher) 79 .Icon Slot field 3. Alternatively. 2. to serve as the foreground image (see State Draw Order (Z-Order)). you can display text directly on a Page in your project. If you don't see the desired image icon file listed in the Select Resource dialog. 65 States tab of the Properties Control window . 64).) button (FIG. 63). You don't have to open the Enter Text dialog unless you intend to enter multiple lines of text.. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog. Adding Text to a Page Refer to the True Type Font Support section on page 6 for details on supported text. 4. 1. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. 64 States tab of the Properties Control window . TPDesign4 (v2. 63 States tab of the Properties Control window ... In the States tab of the Properties Control window. where you can select the desired icon. you need to import the image file into the project and assign it to a slot position. FIG. 5.. Select the page to which you want to add or change a text (via the Workspace . Select the page to which you want to add or change an image icon (via the Workspace . FIG. click on the Icon Slot field to enable the browse (.Working With Pages Adding an Icon to a Page You can apply an image Icon directly to a Page in your project.

67). any text that won't fit on the selected Page may not be visible..Word Wrap field If you select No. 66). 4.) button (FIG. 66 States tab of the Properties Control window .FIG. Click on Font in the States tab of the Properties Control window to enable the browse (. 68 States tab of the Properties Control window . 6. 68). Select Text Color in the States tab of the Properties Control window to enable the browse (.Text Color field Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog where you can select a color for the Page text. 3..Working With Pages Also use the Enter Text dialog to edit existing page text. depending on the text justification setting and the size of the Page. 80 TPDesign4 (v2. FIG. 69). Click Word Wrap. FIG. if any exists. 5. FIG. 69 States tab of the Properties Control window .Font field Select the desired font (in the Font dialog).11 or higher) .. FIG..Text Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the text.) button (FIG. and select whether to wrap text that doesn't fit on a single line on the selected Page (Yes or No . Click Text Justification in the States tab of the Properties Control window to set the justification of the text on the page (FIG. 67 States tab of the Properties Control window .

deleting the last remaining page is not allowed. or by single-clicking on a page in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab) then clicking Edit > Copy from the main menu (or the Copy button in the main toolbar).Video Fill field 3. at the top most level are Panel Names. To apply a video fill to a Page: 1. 70 States tab of the Properties Control window .States Tab. Immediately below the panel names is a Pages folder (containing Pages). Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the Page. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources. Copying/Pasting Pages Copying Pages In the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). All panels must include at least one page. 2. and a Popup Pages folder (containing Popup pages).11 or higher) 81 . Select (or a create) a Page in your project. and select Edit > Delete. Deleting Pages From a Project To delete a page from the active project. The program will prompt you to verify the page deletion first. 70): FIG. TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Pages Displaying a Video Source on a Page TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page. Popup Page or Button. Pasting Pages You may paste (by either clicking Edit > Paste from the main menu or the Paste button in the main toolbar) a previously copied page onto: (1) an active Design View window (2) the panel name in the Workspace Navigator (3) the folder named Pages Pasting a page onto the Popup Pages folder (which is for popup pages only) is not allowed. select the page to delete in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). In the Properties Control window . The Video Fill options available will depend on the video capabilities of the panel type selected (FIG. therefore. You can copy a page either by selecting a Page only (ensuring that no buttons are selected) in an active Design View window.

If this option is not selected. Select a image file type (JPG. use $P to insert the Panel name and $p to insert the Page name into the exported file's name. The default setting is 100% (no scaling). By default. 6.. As described on the dialog. Use the browse button (. Specify a target directory for the exported image files in the Export Directory field. The file extension is automatically. 71 Export Page Images dialog 2.11 or higher) . the template is set to include the Panel file name and the Page name into the generated image's file name. this option is enabled. Use the Scale% up and down arrows indicate a percentage to down-scale the exported images. 9. FIG. it will export the buttons in the (default) Off state. 3. Select Export current display state for buttons to capture the Pages as they are currently displayed in the Design View. Select Export popup pages shown on pages to include any Popup Pages that are being displayed on the Design View at the time of selection in the exported Page image file. with the button's current display state. If JPG is selected. If this option is not selected. Select Export information overlay to include any function code information this is currently being displayed on the Design View at the time of selection in the exported Page image file. 71). 4. 82 TPDesign4 (v2. only the Page underneath any currently viewed Popup Pages will be exported. only the Page underneath any currently displayed function codes will be exported. 5. Specify a template for the resulting filenames in the Filename Template field. this option is disabled. By default.. Select Panel > Export Page Images to open the Export Page Images dialog (FIG. If this option is not selected. PNG or BMP) for the resulting image files from the File Format dropdown.Working With Pages Exporting Pages as Image Files Use the options in the Export Page Images dialog to export one or Pages in the current Project as image files: 1. this option is enabled.) to navigate to a target directory via the Browse For Folder dialog. based on the File Format selection. 8. By default. Use the checkboxes in the Pages and Popups lists to select which Pages and Popup Pages to export. By default. you can select the desired level of image compression 7.

Working With Pages Printing Pages Select File > Print Preview to display a preview of the pages and popup pages in the active project. 72 Print Preview window Each page and popup page in the project is printed one per page. FIG. in the Print Preview window (FIG. This option is enabled only if the active file is longer than one page. Zoom In: Zooms in on the page view Zoom Out: Zooms out from the page view Close: Closes the Print Preview window If you don't have a printer installed on your PC. the File > Print and File > Print Preview options invoke a message alerting you to install a printer. as they will appear when printed. TPDesign4 (v2. The options in the Print Preview window toolbar include: Print: Prints the current page view Next Page: Displays the next page of the selected file Prev Page: Displays the previous page of the selected file One Page/Two Page: Toggles the page view to one or two pages.11 or higher) 83 . 72).

Working With Pages 84 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .

FIG. Once the Popup is displayed on the page. TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 85 . and contain only one state. unlike pages. Enter a descriptive name for the new popup page in the Name field (avoid using inappropriate file name characters . Click the down-arrow to open the Border Style drop-down menu. width or height values. Beyond these properties popup pages have many typically button specific properties. you must first enable the Show Popup Pages option in the Page menu. 73 Add Popup Page dialog 2. and click to select the desired border style for the popup page.see the Inappropriate File Name Characters section on page 29). as well as left. 4. top. You must first select a Popup Page (in the Workspace window) in order to enable the Show Popup Page option in the Page menu. relative to the upper-left corner of the page which is 0. which allows you to quickly create new popup pages. you can click and drag to position it manually. Use the Position fields when you need to achieve exact positioning. In the Position fields. they may have up to one address port / address code and up to one channel port / channel code combination.0) for the desired placement of the popup page when it displayed on the panel. Creating a Popup Page TPD4 features the Popup Draw tool. enter Left and Top coordinates (in pixels. Select Panel > Add Popup Page (or click the toolbar icon) to open the Add Popup Page dialog (FIG. 3. Refer to the Using the Popup Draw Tool section on page 87 for details. as well as some special properties that apply only to popup pages.Working With Popup Pages Working With Popup Pages Overview Popup pages are similar to pages in some respects as they are a container for buttons. Popup pages. in a way that is similar to drawing new buttons. 1. The minimum size for popup pages is 15 pixels in height or width. To position the Popup manually. You can also set it's position manually by dragging it wherever you want it to appear. can be assigned a border style and border color. 73).

the Popup will retain the dimensions specified.11 or higher) . where you can select the Popup Page that you want to display on the page. 8.. Click the browse button (. 7. b. regardless of the page that you display on. FIG. Single-click to select a new color from the list. Popup Pages may be created in any size beyond the minimum and up to the maximum size of the panel. 74 Colors dialog b.) next to Text Color to open the Colors dialog. 5. Note that once you resize the Popup on the page. 74). any time you display the Popup (via the Page > Show Popup Pages option). In the Size fields.) next to Fill Color (in the States tab) to open the Colors dialog (FIG. Note the current and new color selections are shown together for comparison on the left side of the dialog... Set the Text color (for text applied directly to the popup page): a. The minimum size for popup pages is 15 pixels in height or width. enter the desired Width and Height dimensions (in pixels) for the popup window. 6. Set the Page Background color: a. Single-click to select a new color from the list. To resize the Popup manually.. Once the Popup is displayed on the page. Note the current and new color selections are shown together for comparison on the right side of the dialog. the Popup will always appear in the position specified. you must first enable the Show Popup Pages option in the Page menu. You can also set the dimensions manually by dragging the sizing handles on the Popup. you can click and drag the red handles on the Popup to resize it manually. 86 TPDesign4 (v2. Single-click to select a new color from the list. Click the browse button (. any time you display the Popup (via the Page > Show Popup Pages option).. Set the Border color: a. Click the browse button (.. Note the current and new color selections are shown together for comparison on the left side of the dialog.) next to Border Color (in the States tab) to open the Colors dialog.Working With Popup Pages Note that once you specify the position of the Popup on the page. This option opens the Select Popup Pages to Show dialog. regardless of the page that you display on. b.

Because the RGB Color palette supports more colors than the Palette Index. TPDesign4 (v2. 75 Choose Font dialog b. 75). hold down the ALT key while clicking and dragging in a Design View window to move the current selections without selecting anything new on the mouse press (useful for moving popup pages whose entire area is filled with buttons). 10. 76 Popup Draw Tool The technique is similar to drawing a button. A sample of the selected font type and size is displayed in the Sample window. drag to draw the popup page to the desired size and shape. Click OK to add the new Popup Page to the active project. FIG. FIG. click and hold the Button Draw tool (in the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar) for one second to open the drop-down menu containing the Popup Draw tool. Using the Popup Draw Tool The Popup Draw Tool (FIG..Working With Popup Pages 9. Left-click inside the desired page (in the active Design View window). In most cases. When using the Selection tool.11 or higher) 87 . Click the browse button (. under the project to which the page was added. a.. Set the Font Name and Size. if desired. When using the Button Draw or Popup Draw tools. since TPD4 tries to match the color exactly. The new Popup Page will be displayed in the Workspace Navigator Pages folder. To access the Popup Draw toolbar button. 76) allows you to draw Popup Pages directly onto a page. hold down the SHIFT key while drawing to constrain the item to a square. and the result is the same as through standard means: 1.) next to Font to open the Choose Font dialog (FIG. The minimum popup page size is 15 pixels in height or width. 11. Select Edit > Popup Draw Tool (or click the toolbar button) to activate the Popup Draw tool. you might see some slight variation in some colors if you switch from the RGB Color palette to Palette Index. Use the Group drop-down list to assign the newly created popup page to an existing group. any variation that occurs in the translation is extremely subtle. and while holding the left mouse button down. 2.

With the Popup Page selected. as opposed to clicking on the item. Use this table to set the popup page's programming properties.11 or higher) . The General tab contains a table that lists the properties for the active popup page. This is a visual indication that the newly created popup has the Edit Focus. Use this table to set the popup page's general properties. Upon the creation of a popup page. since TPD4 tries to match the color exactly.Working With Popup Pages When using the Selection tool. the Properties Control window displays the properties available for the Popup Page. With an item selected in a Design View window. Select File > Save to save your changes. you can either set the item manually. The General tab of the Properties Control window displays general (non-states related) properties for the popup page in a editable table. hold down the CTRL key while moving the item with the keyboard arrow keys to move by the grid size instead of a single pixel (regardless of the grid visibility or snap to grid setting). 7. Because the RGB Color palette supports more colors than the Palette Index. To set Popup Page-level properties. hold down the CTRL key while clicking and dragging to force a "lasso" selection to occur (even if the mouse was clicked over a button or Popup Page shown on the Page). 3. In most cases. 5. 4. Setting Popup Page Properties Popup Pages have a set of Page Properties that can be configured via the fields in the Properties Control Window. click on the Popup Page area in the Design View (as opposed to a button on the page). separated into three tabs (General. any variation that occurs in the translation is extremely subtle. or both. 6. Setting General Properties: Popup Pages Use the General tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit popup page properties. The Programming tab of the Properties Control window displays programming-related properties for the popup page in a editable table. To edit any of the listed button properties. Depending on the item selected. Programming and States). you will see selection handles appear on the outsides of the popup that are small yellow squares with red interiors. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. you might see some slight variation in some colors if you switch from the RGB Color palette to Palette Index. On Show Group Timeout Modal Show Effect Show Effect X/Y Pos Show Effect Time Hide Effect Hide Effect X/Y Pos 88 TPDesign4 (v2. The States tab of the Properties Control window displays state-related information for the new popup in a editable table. Lasso selection forces you to draw a square around the outside of the item to select it. Holding the CTRL key while resizing the selected items with the keyboard will resize by the grid size. The following general properties are supported at the popup page level: Name Left Top Width Height Reset Pos. select from a drop-down menu. Edit the (Off) state properties as desired.

Depending on the item selected. select from a drop-down menu. To edit any of the listed button properties.11 or higher) 89 . The State tab contains a table that lists the state properties for the active popup page. Depending on the item selected. The following programming properties are supported at the popup page level: Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Setting States Properties: Popup Pages Use the State tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit popup page state properties. or both. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. or both. The following state properties are supported at the popup page level: Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Video Fill Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound TPDesign4 (v2. To edit any of the listed button properties.Working With Popup Pages Setting Programming Properties: Popup Pages Use the Programming tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit popup page properties. you can either set the item manually. The Programming tab contains a table that lists program-related properties (Address and Channel Port/Channel Code assignments) for the active popup page. you can either set the item manually. select from a drop-down menu.

78 Renaming a Popup Page Adding a Fill Color To a Popup Page 1. 4.. all of the existing Drawing Assist tools are available to allow you to size and align their popup page(s) with existing buttons on the page.Fill Color field 3. 77 Position Assist Tools and Size Assist Tools toolbars With only the popup page selected..) button (FIG. 78). the Size to Image tool (if an image has been placed on the popup page). all five border tools (if a border has been applied to the popup page). Click OK to close the Colors dialog.Pages tab). click on the Fill Color field to enable the browse (. you can use the Center Horizontal and Center Vertical. With the selection of one or more buttons on the page in conjunction with a popup page selection. FIG. Renaming a Popup Page To rename any Popup Page in the active project. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog. simply click on a Popup Page entry in the Workspace and type directly into the text field (FIG. 79 States tab of the Properties Control window . 77). 2.11 or higher) . 79). Position Assist Tools toolbar Size Assist Tools toolbar FIG. FIG.Working With Popup Pages Drawing Assist Support for Popup Pages Once a popup page is displayed on a main Page in the Design View. as well as apply any of the options from the Aspect Ratio tool. you can utilize several of the Drawing Assist tools available via the Position Assist Tools and Size Assist Tools toolbars and the Layout menu to edit the size and position of the popup page (FIG. Select the Popup Page to which you want to add or change the Fill Color (via the Workspace . and select the color that you want to apply to the Popup Page. 90 TPDesign4 (v2.

) button.. TPDesign4 (v2.) button.Bitmap Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the image. open the image in any graphics editor program. you need to import the image file into the project and assign it to a slot position. To check the size of the Popup Pages in your project. Note that only bitmaps that have already been imported into the project are listed in the Select Resource dialog. 80 States tab of the Properties Control window . and scale the image to the exact size (in pixels) of the Page/panel. Select the Popup Page to which you want to add or change an image icon (via the Workspace .. 4.. To scale an image to fit a target Page/panel. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog. where you can select the desired bitmap.Pages tab). to serve as the background image. click on the Bitmap field to enable the browse (. 6. Use the Import button (at the lower-left of this dialog) to import new bitmaps into the project.11 or higher) 91 . 82 States tab of the Properties Control window .Icon Slot field 3. to serve as the foreground image (see State Draw Order (Z-Order)). Select the Popup Page to which you want to add or change a bitmap image (via the Workspace . Adding an Icon to a Popup Page You can apply an image Icon directly to a Popup Page in your project. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog.. 2. where you can select the desired icon.Pages tab). Click Bitmap Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the image on the Popup Page. 5. 1. FIG. 1.Bitmap field 3. TPD4 does not automatically scale or stretch images to fit the Popup Page.Working With Popup Pages Adding a Bitmap to a Popup Page You can apply a bitmap directly to a Popup Page in your project. FIG. If you don't see the desired image icon file listed in the Select Resource dialog. 81 States tab of the Properties Control window . In the States tab of the Properties Control window. click on the Icon Slot field to enable the browse (. FIG. check the Width and Height values in the Properties Control window (General tab). Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog. Match the image size (in pixels) to the size indicated there. 2.

) button (FIG. 83 States tab of the Properties Control window . 4. you can display text directly on a Popup Page in your project. Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog.Working With Popup Pages 4. FIG. the text will automatically be displayed on top of the bitmap..Font field 92 TPDesign4 (v2. 1. 3. You don't have to open the Enter Text dialog unless you intend to enter multiple lines of text..Text field Click the browse button to open the Enter Text dialog. 85 States tab of the Properties Control window . 2. Click on Font in the States tab of the Properties Control window to enable the browse (. If you are also displaying a bitmap on the Popup Page. 86). 85). Adding Text to a Popup Page Refer to the True Type Font Support section on page 6 for details on supported text. FIG.. 84 States tab of the Properties Control window . Alternatively. click on the Text field to enable the browse (. Select Text Color in the States tab of the Properties Control window to enable the browse (. if any exists. Click Icon Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the image icon on the Popup Page. Also use the Enter Text dialog to edit existing page text. FIG.Icon Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the image. FIG.. 84). Since G4 panels utilize address and channel port/address codes (and possess a single state). In the States tab of the Properties Control window... 86 States tab of the Properties Control window . you can type directly into the Text field. and type the page text as desired (up to 4096 characters).) button (FIG. Select the Popup Page to which you want to add or change a text (via the Workspace .Text Color field Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog where you can select a color for the Popup Page text.11 or higher) .) button (FIG.Pages tab). 5. unless otherwise directed via the Draw Order selection by the user (see the Draw Order (Z-Order) section on page 206).

To create a Popup Page group: 1. 2.11 or higher) 93 . To apply a video fill to a Popup Page: 1. 88). depending on the text justification setting and the size of the Popup Page. 6. FIG. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources. 87). Click Text Justification in the States tab of the Properties Control window to set the justification of the text on the Popup Page (FIG. 89): FIG. In the Properties Control window (General tab).Text Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the text. and select whether to wrap text that doesn't fit on a single line on the selected Popup Page (Yes or No .Group field TPDesign4 (v2. Select a popup page in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). 90). FIG.Working With Popup Pages Select the desired font (in the Font dialog). 90 States tab of the Properties Control window .States Tab.Video Fill field 3. 88 States tab of the Properties Control window . Creating Popup Page Groups Popup Page Groups provide a mechanism to group popup pages into mutually exclusive groups for display purposes. click Group to activate the text field (FIG. Popup Page or Button. Displaying a Video Source on a Popup Page TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page. any text that won't fit on the selected Popup Page may not be visible. The Video Fill options available will depend on the video capabilities of the panel type selected (FIG. 5. 87 States tab of the Properties Control window . Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the Page.FIG. Click Word Wrap. Select (or a create) a Popup Page in your project. 89 States tab of the Properties Control window . In the Properties Control window . FIG.Word Wrap field If you select No. 2.

92). FIG. or by single-clicking on a page in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab) then clicking Edit > Copy from the main menu (or the Copy button in the main toolbar). and drag it out of the group. FIG. drag the desired popup page(s) into the desired group folder or set the group association via the Group field in the Properties Control window (FIG. select the popup page in the Workspace Navigator. Copying/Pasting Popup Pages Copying Popup Pages You can copy a popup page either by selecting a Popup Page only (ensuring that no buttons are selected) in an active Design View window. 91 Popup Pages folder in the Workspace Navigator 5. 4. 94 TPDesign4 (v2. . The program will prompt you to verify the popup page deletion first. and select Edit > Delete.Group field To remove a popup page from a group. 92 States tab of the Properties Control window . Pasting Popup Pages You can paste (by either clicking Edit > Paste from the main menu or the Paste button in the main toolbar) a previously copied popup page onto: (1) an active Design View (2) the panel name in the Panel Navigator (3) the folder named Popup Pages Pasting a popup page onto another page or popup page in the Panel Navigator (which is only a paste target for buttons) or onto the folder named Pages (which is for pages only) is not allowed.Working With Popup Pages 3. Deleting Popup Pages From a Project To delete a popup page from the active project. To place a popup page in a particular popup group: In the Workspace Window. Enter a name for the popup group folder. or set the Group field to None in the Properties Control window. select the popup page to delete in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). The named Popup Group folder is created under the Popup Pages folder in the Workspace Navigator Pages tab (FIG. 91).11 or higher) .

93). To hide a selected Popup Page: Select a Popup Page in the Workspace Window (Popup Pages tab). you can drag and drop a Popup Page from the Workspace Window onto a Design View window to show the selected Popup Page. To hide all Popup Pages: Select Hide All Popup Pages in the Page menu. To show a Popup Page: Select a Popup Page in the Workspace Window (Popup Pages tab). or click the Hide All Popup Pages toolbar button.Show Popup Page. Additionally. Hide Popup Page & Hide All Popup Pages buttons This option deals only with showing a popup page (selected in the workspace) on a page that is currently open in the design view. Design View context menu. 93 Main Toolbar .11 or higher) 95 . the Workspace Navigator context menu or the toolbar buttons contained in the Main toolbar (FIG. TPDesign4 (v2. and select Hide Popup Page (or click the toolbar button).Working With Popup Pages Show/Hide Popup Pages The Show Popup Page and Hide Popup Page options can be selected via the Page menu. The Hide All Popup Pages toolbar button is available on the Main toolbar only. and select Show Popup Page (or click the toolbar button). FIG.

Working With Popup Pages 96 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .

94 Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar Click and hold the Button Draw Tool to select from the other types of Draw Tools: Button Draw Tool .Working With Buttons Working With Buttons Overview TPDesign4 supports the following button types: General: Basic dual-state buttons that can be used for most touch panel functions. Popup Draw Tool . Bargraph: Level monitors and adjustable level controls that can be configured to monitor or adjust audio outputs and lighting levels. Joystick: Vertical and horizontal direction controllers that can be used for pan and tilt control (typically for camera operation). Text Input: Intended only to display (non-interactive) text on the panel. Computer Control: Allow you to connect to a PC running a VNC server for remote control applications. and support up to 256 states.Select to draw buttons (all types. Multi-State Bargraph: Level monitors and adjustable level controls that can be configured to monitor or adjust audio outputs and lighting levels. 94): Button Draw Tool Popup Draw Tool List Box Draw Tool FIG. TakeNote: Allow you to use a G4 panel to annotate to either a windows desktop or on other G4 panels. List Box Draw Tool . Multi-state buttons are used to create animation effects. List Box: Utilizes a collection of subordinate buttons to display either dynamic or static data as a scrollable list.11 or higher) 97 . not associated with any specific functionality. and select from the list (see List Box Buttons).Select to draw Popup Pages. Multi-State General: Basic multi-state buttons that can also be used for most touch panel functions. except List Box buttons). TPDesign4 (v2. Joystick buttons only use the Off state. List box buttons can be used to allow end-users to view data in list form. Multi-state bargraph buttons also allow you to create custom bargraph sliders.Select to draw List Box Buttons. there is no On state associated with them. Because Joystick buttons don't work in the same way as the other button types (in that they don't generate pushes/releases). Button Draw Tools Within the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar is the Button Draw Tools drop-down (FIG. and support up to 256 states.

programming. 5. try using "Circle 50" rather than "Circle 100"). This is a result of scaling the button smaller than what the selected border requires to accommodate the slider bar. 4. Select the Button Draw Tool (used for all button types other than List Box Buttons). 2. 95): Button Draw Tool FIG. 95 Button Draw Tool (Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar) Alternatively. indicating the size of the button you are drawing (FIG. 97 New Button The maximum number of buttons per page / popup page = 500. 97). Programming and States tabs of the Properties Window to specify general. 1. If you see this. Buttons are always drawn in the Off State. When using the circle.Working With Buttons Drawing a Button Within the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar is the Button Draw Tool. To complete the button draw action. 3. The Button Selection/Draw toolbar allows you to control certain new button creation properties for both the Off and the On state of a button. Click and hold the Button Draw Tool to access a drop-down of the other types of Draw Tools (FIG. and place your cursor within the boundaries of an open Design View. With an item selected in a Design View window. 98 TPDesign4 (v2. and state-specific properties for the selected button. To toggle between Off and On states. 96).11 or higher) . release the left mouse button (FIG. FIG. oval or diamond border types. try using a "smaller" border (i. Refer to Properties Window for details. Upon the creation of a button on a page (or popup page) you will see selection handles appear on the outsides of the button that are small yellow squares with red interiors. hold down the CTRL key while moving the item with the keyboard arrow keys to move by the grid size instead of a single pixel (regardless of the grid visibility or snap to grid setting). indicating edit focus. you may notice the slider bar appearing partially outside of the button border. single-click the State button. 96 Drawing a New Button Hold down the SHIFT key while drawing to constrain the button to a square. You will see a sizing rectangle as you drag the mouse. Open the Page (or Popup page) that the button will be added to. FIG. 6. Experiment with different border types to get the results you're after.e. Use the fields and options in the General. Minimum button size is 4 x 4 pixels. select Edit > Button Draw Tool from the main menu. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse diagonally. Holding the CTRL key while resizing the selected items with the keyboard will resize by the grid size.

Note that this name change occurs on the fly. if there is text associated with a button and you add an icon. then add the text "Welcome". TPD4 goes further in automatically generating a descriptive name for the button. Furthermore. the Lock Button Name option is set to Off. "Background"). Text on a button always overrides the presence of a bitmap. based on the text and/or bitmap applied to the button: If you apply text to the button. the button name will not change. By default. However.Working With Buttons 7. 98 New Button . However. For example if you create a new button (which is automatically named "Button 9"). 98): FIG.11 or higher) 99 . 8. via the Name field. However. when you apply a bitmap to the button. note that the button is automatically renamed to "Welcome". Note that if you change the text. and you add a bitmap. This is where the Lock Button Name option (General tab of the Properties Control Window) comes into play. the button name is automatically updated with either the latest text or bitmap assignment. the button is automatically renamed to reflect the icon's name. by default the buttons are automatically given a sequential name composed of the button number (relative to the number of buttons already created in the Project).e. TPDesign4 (v2. the button is again renamed to reflect the updated text. the button name will not change. if the button has no text. However. the button is automatically renamed to reflect the bitmap file name (i.Button Preview window Generated Button Names When new buttons are created. when you apply an icon to the button. click Lock Button Name and select Yes to prevent the button from being automatically renamed by the program when you edit the text or bitmap assignment(s). and does not require a Save operation. Select File > Save to save your changes. At any point in the design process. Select View > Button Preview to preview the button (click Push to simulate a button press) in the Button Preview window (FIG. the button text is substituted for the button number. any time you change the bitmap or the text on the button. if the button has no text. If there is text associated with a button. Additionally. Lock Button Name does not prevent you from manually renaming the button.

select Type to access the drop-down menu of Supported Button Types (FIG. 2.11 or higher) . This enables the browse (.) button (FIG. Select the button to which you want to add or change text (with the Selection tool).Working With Buttons Specifying the Button Type To specify the button type for any button: 1. 102). For List Box buttons. 99 Button Type drop-down menu (General Property) 3. Adding Text to a Button Since button text is a state-specific property. 101). and select a border style from the Border Name (State) Property (FIG. and type the button text as desired. you can type directly into the Text field. then all border names are available in the provided list. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column. 100): FIG. you can add or change the button text via the States tab of the Properties Control window: 1. then the borders listed here are limited to those contained in the selected Border Style. Alternatively. Click the browse button to open the Enter Text dialog (FIG. FIG. 2. Select the desired button type. click on the Text field in the state that you want add the text to. 101 State Properties . Select or a create a button. FIG. Specifying a Button Border To specify a border style for a button. 100 TPDesign4 (v2.. Refer to the TPD4 online help for previews of each Border Style. select the button in the Design View window. 100 Border Name drop-down menu (State Property) If a Border Style was specified (in the General tab). In the General tab of the Properties Window.. 99). If no Border Style was specified (none).Text 3.

so use the Text field in the state that you want to change. the graphic can be assigned to one or more page or button states. Hebrew. 102 Enter Text dialog You don't have to open the Enter Text dialog unless you intend to enter multiple lines of text. or only on specific states.11 or higher) 101 . If the size of the font exceeds the memory available on the device. TPDesign4 (v2. 4. TPD4 (and the G4 firmware itself) do not provide explicit support for languages that utilize complex scripts. See the True Type Font Support section on page 6. so keep in mind wether you want the text to occur on all states. or use the Text field under All States to add the text to every state in the button. the panel designer may be forced to use a pre-rendered graphic to display the desired text. Once imported into the panel project. You can also use the Enter Text dialog to edit existing button text. and Devangari. In order to display such languages on a page or button state. if any exists. TPD4 supports non-complex scripts (those that can be printed correctly without the use of a rendered script) to the extent that the True Type font currently selected for that state supports the language in question. These languages include (but are not limited to) Arabic.Working With Buttons FIG. the panel designer must create a pre-rendered graphic of the desired text (using a suitable graphics application) that can then be imported into the TPD4 panel project as a graphic (icon or bitmap). Click anywhere outside of the Text field to set the button text (or click OK to close the Enter Text dialog). The size of the font required to support the language (particularly in the case of East Asian languages that utilize ideograms) might be prohibitive due to limits of available memory on the target device. Button text is state-specific. Foreign Language Support for Text For page and button state text properties. Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window.

Working With Buttons Adding a Fill Color To a Button Since Fill Color is a state-specific property. 3. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window. or use the Fill Color field under All States to add the Fill Color to every state in the button. click on the Fill Color field in the state that you want to change the fill color on. you can add or change the button fill color via the State tab of the Properties Control window: 1. 2. so use the Fill Color field in the state that you want to change. 102 TPDesign4 (v2. 104). This enables the browse button (. Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window. click on the Fill Color field in the state that you want add the Fill Color to. or only on specific states. and select the color that you want to apply to the Button/State (FIG. Select the button that you want to add or change the fill color on (with the Selection tool). so keep in mind wether you want the Fill Color to occur on all states. Select the button to which you want to add or change the Fill Color (with the Selection tool). FIG. FIG.).Text Button Fill Colors are state-specific. so use the Fill Color field in the state that you want to change. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. Click OK to close the Colors dialog.. 104 Colors dialog 4. 103)...11 or higher) . you can add or change the button Fill Color assignment via the States tab of the Properties Control window: 1. Changing the Button Fill Color Since button fill color is a state-specific property.. Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog. This enables the browse (. 2. or use the Fill Color field under All States to change the fill color on every state in the button.) button (FIG. 103 State Properties .

In the States tab of the Properties Control window. where you can change the fill color. where you can select the desired bitmap (FIG. you can add or change the button bitmap assignment via the States tab of the Properties Control window: 1. 106 Select Resource dialog Note that only bitmaps that have already been imported into the project are listed in the Select Resource dialog. or only on specific states. so use the Bitmap field in the state that you want to change.. This enables the browse (. Select the button to which you want to add or change a bitmap image (with the Selection tool). 105). Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog. Adding a Bitmap to a Button Since bitmap assignment is a state-specific property. 105 State Properties . FIG. so keep in mind wether you want the bitmap to occur on all states. 2.Working With Buttons 3. 4. or use the Bitmap field under All States to add the bitmap to every state in the button. Click the browse button (.11 or higher) 103 . 3. Click OK to close the Colors dialog.) to open the Colors dialog. TPDesign4 (v2. click on the Bitmap field in the state that you want add the bitmap to.... Use the Import button (at the lower-left of this dialog) to import new bitmaps into the project (see the Importing Image Files Into Your Project section on page 54). FIG. Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window. 106).Bitmap Button bitmaps are state-specific.) button (FIG.

Click Bitmap Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the image on the button (FIG. 3. or only on specific states. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog. 107 State Properties . open the image in any graphics editor program.Working With Buttons 4. Adding an Icon to a Button With TPD4. In the States tab of the Properties Control window.Icon Slot Button icons are state-specific. 107). click on the Icon Slot field in the state that you want add the icon to. 109). 108 State Properties . you can apply Icons to buttons in your project. Match the image size (in pixels) to the size indicated there.11 or higher) . where you can select the desired icon (FIG. so keep in mind wether you want the icon to occur on all states. FIG. check the Width and Height values in the Properties Control window (General tab). you can add or change the button Icon assignment via the States tab of the Properties Control window: 1. and scale the image to the exact size (in pixels) of the Button. To check the size of the Buttons in your project.) button (FIG. Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog.. 2. Select the button that you want to add an Icon to (with the Selection tool). TPD4 does not automatically scale or stretch images to fit the Button.. 108). to serve as the foreground image (see Z-Order for details). 104 TPDesign4 (v2. FIG. or use the Icon Slot field under All States to add the icon to every state in the button. Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window. 5. Since Icon assignment is a state-specific property. so use the Icon Slot field in the state that you want to change. To scale an image to fit a target Button.Bitmap Justification drop-down menu Select Absolute to manually position the image. This enables the browse (.

110).Icon Justification drop-down menu Select Absolute to manually position the image.11 or higher) 105 . 4.Working With Buttons FIG. 110 State Properties . TPDesign4 (v2. Click Icon Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the icon on the button (FIG. FIG. 109 Select Resource dialog If you don't see the desired image file listed in the Select Resource dialog. 5. you need to import the image file into the project and assign it to a slot position. Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog.

Working With Buttons Working With Transparent Backgrounds When you are applying an icon. 106 TPDesign4 (v2. you'll wind up with something like this (FIG.11 or higher) . However. Raster images are always created in the shape of a rectangle. Unless you are actually using transparency. With a transparent background color. For example. When using images with transparencies in TPD4. to accommodate layering of images without trying to match colors across layers. the PNG file must be saved with RGB colors. For the transparent color to be interpreted correctly by TPD4. Typically transparency is used in images for the background color. Generally speaking. just like you would for any other color in the palette. by making the background color transparent. 112): FIG. since they are usually slightly smaller in size. you will apply a fill to the areas that you want to appear transparent (in most cases the background). only PNGs accommodate transparency as a color. 113): FIG. you can effectively change the shape of the image. and select transparent as the fill color. if you have a button with an image (FIG. the icon actually retains its original rectangular shape. 113 Button With Image and Icon using transparent background Check the documentation for your image-editing program to learn about applying transparency to your images. JPGs are recommended over PNGs. you can take advantage of transparency support in TPD4. but will display without the background (FIG. there are a few key concepts to understand: Of all the image file formats supported by TPD4. 112 Button With Image and Icon Obviously you don't want that unsightly box framing the icon! You need to edit the icon's fill color and make the background color transparent. 111 Button With Image and you apply an icon that doesn't use transparent as the background color. 111): FIG.

115 Text Effect drop-down menu (State Property) For List Box buttons. 115): FIG. and page flips allow you to separate. Organization of device controls is essential to good touch panel design. containing only buttons that control the DVD player. Alternatively. Select (or a create) a Button in your project. this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column. 114).Working With Buttons Displaying a Video Source on a Button TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page. In the Properties Control window . 114 Video Fill drop-down menu (State Property) The Video Fill options presented will depend on the panel type selected for this project. select the button in the Design View window. To apply a video fill to a Button: 1. Typically you would set up a different control page for each piece of equipment. TPDesign4 (v2. organize and cross-link your control pages. Since this is a state-oriented setting. A basic example would be a button labeled "DVD Player" on a main page that when touched. 2. Refer to the TPD4 online help for previews of each Text Effect. and select a text effect from the Text Effect (State) Property (FIG. opens a DVD Player page. Page Flips A basic touch panel page design concept is the Page Flip. To apply the video fill across all states.States Tab. A page flip is a button attribute that allows the user to press a button to "flip" through different panel pages. FIG. Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the button. 3. Popup Page or Button. you can use Ctrl+A to select all states in the State Manager window. Adding Text Effects To add a text effect to a button. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources (FIG.11 or higher) 107 . be sure to consider all of the button states when applying the video fill. use the All States option in the Properties Control window (States tab).

117). 2. Click the browse button (.Working With Buttons Creating a Page Flip 1. 108 TPDesign4 (v2. Click the Add command button to create a new page flip for this button. 3. popup page or popup group to open.. Depending on the type of page flip action selected. 117 Button Page Flip Actions dialog (Page Flip Actions drop-down menu) 5. FIG. In the Properties Control window (General tab). FIG. See the Page Flip Actions section on page 109.) to open the Button Page Flip Actions dialog (FIG. 116). Click the down arrow in the Target column to select the target of the selected Page Flip Action (FIG.. 118). and access a drop-down list of Page Flip Actions (FIG. 116 Button Page Flip Actions dialog 4.11 or higher) . click on Page Flip to enable the editable field. Select a (or create a new) button. you may need to also specify the target page.

This selection populates the Target list box with a list of standard pages in your project. If dragged with the right mouse button. Alternatively.This selection populates the Target list box with a list of popup pages in your project. TPD4 supports a shortcut for adding page flips: Simply select the target page or popup page for the flip in the Workspace window (Pages tab). Show Popup . Select a target popup page for the page flip (to hide when the button is touched). Select a target popup page for the page flip (to show when the button is touched). If dragged with the right mouse button. Drag & Drop To Set Page Flips TPD4 supports a shortcut for adding page flips: Simply select the target page or popup page for the flip in the Workspace window (Pages tab).This selection populates the Target list box with a list of popup pages in your project.This selection sets the page flip to go to the previous page (relative to the order of existing page flips) when the button is touched.11 or higher) 109 . Select a target page for the page flip. and specify the target page. Hide Popup . and dropping a popup will add a 'show popup' flip action to that button. By default. Page Flip Actions With a button selected in a Design View window. drag it into a Design View window and drop it onto a button to create a flip to that page or popup page. where you can set the type of page flip to apply to the selected button.Working With Buttons FIG. Click the Add command button to access the Page Flip Actions drop-down list which allows you to select from a list of available page flip actions: Standard Page . Use the up and down arrows to re-arrange the order of the page flips if necessary. You can apply multiple page flips to any button. 118 Button Page Flip Actions dialog (Target page selection) 6. Multiple Standard page flips are allowed. TPDesign4 (v2. click Page Flip in the Properties Control window (General tab) to open the Button Page Flip Actions dialog. the drop will offer a list of all applicable page flip actions. you can also drag and drop a page or popup page from the Workspace window onto the Page Flip property in the Properties Window (General tab). Previous Page . the drop will offer a list of all applicable page flip actions. By default. dropping a page will add a 'standard page' flip action. dropping a page will add a 'standard page' flip action. Repeat this process as desired to create multiple page flips on the button. drag it into a Design View window and drop it onto a button to create a flip to that page or popup page. Alternatively. you can also drag and drop a page or popup page from the Workspace window onto the Page Flip property in the Properties Control window (General tab). and dropping a popup will add a 'show popup' flip action to that button.

Select the page that you want to hide the popups on when the button is touched.11 or higher) . Show Popup and Hide Popup for the same Popup Page are allowed on the same button. Select a target popup page group for the page flip (to hide when the button is touched). if you have selected an item in the Properties Control window (let's say you've selected "Channel Port". the pasted items will attempt to maintain their size. 110 TPDesign4 (v2. This allows the user start on page one. Depending on the differences between the palette in the button's source project and the palette in the target project. and not the associated button (even though it is selected in the Design View window).This selection flips to the page specified. Pasting Buttons You can paste (by either clicking Edit > Paste from the main menu or the Paste button in the main toolbar) a previously copied button or buttons onto: (1) a page or popup page name in the Workspace Navigator window . you are not allowed to paste it to the Address Port field. Copying/Pasting Buttons The Copy and Paste functions in TPD4 always work on the element (including buttons. Use this option when you do not wish to return to the page that initiated the page flip when a subsequent previous page flip action is performed. when copying buttons from a page to a popup page.This selection populates the Target list box with a list of popup pages in your project. this can cause color shifting on the button. bitmaps. even individual button properties displayed in the Properties Control window) which has the current Edit Focus.This selection populates the Target list box with a list of popup page groups in your project. the pasted button will use the palette that is currently active in the project that the button is copied into (as opposed to the palette that was used to create the button).This selection sets the page flip to clear all popup pages when the button is touched. Hide Popup Group . which is not always necessarily a button displayed in the Design View windows. If for example you had copied the value "410" from the Left (position) field in the Properties Control window. flip to page two. Hide All Popups . For example. then with a previous page flip go directly back to page one. If. This means the last thing selected. Select a target popup page for the page flip (to toggle hide/show when the button is touched). Page Flip Forget .Working With Buttons Toggle Popup . When you copy a button from one project into another project that is using a different palette.This selection populates the Target list box with a list of standard pages in your project. flip to page three.Pages tab (no open Design View window required) or (2) the active Design View window. but does not retain the source page in the page flip stack (which is used to execute previous page flips). only adjusting the properties required for them to properly fit on the target popup page. You can then paste the Channel Port number anywhere else in the Properties Control window (where the copied data is considered to be a valid entry). Hide Popups on Page . the location or dimensions of the copied buttons exceeds the boundaries of the target popup page. Multiple Popup actions like Toggle popup. then you will have copied only the Channel Port entry in the Properties Control window. Copying Buttons Copying a button or buttons from a page or popup page is possible by selecting the desired buttons in an active Design View window then either selecting Edit > Copy from the main menu or by clicking the Copy button in the main toolbar. since it is not a valid Address Port number. and you perform a "Copy".

TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Buttons Editing Button Properties Edit Button Properties via the Properties Window: select the button property that you wish to modify. Although you may select and retain the selection of buttons on multiple pages. or left click the mouse in any box other than the current box to apply the change.11 or higher) 111 . and enter (type or select) a new value in the corresponding field. If the value is inappropriate for the selected object. To select all available buttons on a page or popup page you may either use the Ctrl+A hotkey. either press the Enter key. or by left-clicking on the background of the page or popup page. Editing Multiple Selections Buttons may be acted upon individually by clicking the Selection Tool from the toolbar or selecting Edit > Selection Tool from the main menu. the Prev or Next button. using any of the following techniques: Hold the Shift key and left-click. Once a property has been modified. you will be notified via a message. You can also select multiple buttons. Click and drag outside the boundaries of the desired buttons to perform a marquis selection. and the previous value will be replaced in the box. You can de-select a button by either selecting another button. or select Edit > Select All from the main menu. you may only act on the selected buttons on one page / popup page at a time. then clicking on the desired button.

as opposed to other button types. Depending on the item selected. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field.Working With Buttons General Buttons General buttons are basic dual-state buttons that can be used for most touch panel functions. FIG. To edit any of the properties in the table. string and text length = 4096 characters.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Touch Style Border Style Disabled Hidden Password Protection Page Flip Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Control Type String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. The following button properties are supported for General buttons: General Buttons . you can either set the item manually. or both. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound 112 TPDesign4 (v2. Programming and State button properties. select from a drop-down menu. which have specific functionalities.11 or higher) . 119 General Properties: Type (General button) Setting Properties: General Buttons Once you have created a General button. and are not associated with a specific functionality.

120 General Properties: Type (Multi-State General button) Setting Properties: Multi-State General Buttons Once you have created a Multi-State General button. FIG. Use multi-state buttons when you want to utilize animation effects. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound TPDesign4 (v2. you can either set the item manually. The following button properties are supported for Multi-State General buttons: Multi-State General Buttons . and that support up to 256 states. or both. select from a drop-down menu. Depending on the item selected. Programming and State button properties.Working With Buttons Multi-State General Buttons Multi-State General buttons are basic multi-state buttons that can be used for most touch panel functions.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Touch Style Border Style State Count Animate Time Up Animate Time Down Auto-Repeat Disabled Hidden Password Protection Page Flip Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Control Type String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command.11 or higher) 113 . you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. To edit any of the properties in the table. string and text length = 4096 characters.

• Range Low: • Range High: • Level Control Repeat (Relative Level Control only): Set the bottom of the level range (0-255). this value can be entered as a positive integer (to raise the relative level setting) or a negative integer (to lower the relative level setting).11 or higher) . This value determines the repeat time (in 1/1000th-second increments) for relative level control. the user can hold the button down for one second to cause the level to raise or lower repeatedly (according to the specified Level Control Value) without having to press the button each time. For Absolute level control. These options require the following additional parameters to be defined: Level Control Parameters • Level Port: • Level Code: • Level Control Value: Select or enter the port to which the Level code will be applied. Select AutoAssign to automatically assign the level code to this button. Relative or None): Absolute: The button acts like a preset and sets the level to the desired value. Select a level control type for the selected button (Absolute. For relative level control. Relative: The button increments or decrements the current level value by a fixed amount. if this value is set to 1000. • Range Time Up: • Range Time Down: 114 TPDesign4 (v2. this value determines the amount of adjustment relative to the current level resulting from this button. Set the time (in 1/10th-second increments) that it takes to ramp from the top to the bottom of the specified range (default = 2). Set the time (in 1/10th-second increments) that it takes to ramp from the bottom to the top of the specified range (default = 2). this value determines the level value that will be recalled by this button.Working With Buttons Level Control Parameters The Level Control Type options (set in the Programming tab of the Properties Control Window) allow General and Multi-State General buttons to directly control a level without the need for NetLinx code. For example. Select 0 (Setup port) or 1 as the level port for this button. For Relative level control. Set the top of the level range (0-255). Select or enter the level code sent to the master on the selected port.

States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound TPDesign4 (v2. you can use the General tab of the Properties Control window to set/ edit general (non-state oriented) button properties. or both. To edit any of the properties in the table. 121 General Properties: Type (Bargraph button) Setting Properties: Bargraph Buttons Once you have created a Bargraph button. select from a drop-down menu. string and text length = 4096 characters. Depending on the item selected. The following button properties are supported for Bargraph buttons: Bargraph General Buttons .11 or higher) 115 .Working With Buttons Bargraph Buttons Bargraph buttons are level monitors and adjustable level controls that can be configured to monitor or adjust audio outputs and lighting levels. you can either set the item manually. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Touch Style Border Style Disabled Hidden Value Direction Slider Name Slider Color Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Port Level Code Level Function Range Low Range High Range Drag Increment Range Inverted Range Time Up Range Time Down String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. FIG.

Use multi-state buttons when you want to utilize animation effects. string and text length = 4096 characters. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Border Style State Count Disabled Hidden Value Direction Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Port Level Code Level Function Range Low Range High Range Drag Increment Range Inverted Range Time Up Range Time Down String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. Programming and State button properties. To edit any of the properties in the table. or both. Multi-State Bargraph buttons also allow you to create a custom bargraph slider (using an image icon). click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected.Working With Buttons Multi-State Bargraph Buttons Multi-State Bargraph buttons are level monitors and adjustable level controls that can be configured to monitor or adjust audio outputs and lighting levels. 122 General Properties: Type (Multi-State Bargraph button) Setting Properties: Multi-State Bargraph Buttons Once you have created a Multi-State Bargraph button. The following button properties are supported for Multi-State Bargraph buttons: Multi-State Bargraph Buttons . you can either set the item manually. select from a drop-down menu. and that (like Multi-State General buttons) support up to 256 states. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound 116 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) . FIG.

11 or higher) 117 .$ character TPDesign4 (v2.range low) $R .range (range high . selectable via the General tab of the Properties Control window): FIG.adjusted level value (raw level value .range high $A .raw level value $L .level percentage $V . The following formatting codes will be replaced with the identified values: $P . 123 Slider Types Slider types are not available for Multi-State Bargraph buttons.range low) $$ .range low $H .Working With Buttons Slider Types There are several slider types available for use with Bargraph buttons. Formatting Codes Formatting codes can be used in the Text for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons.

you touch the bargraph button and move the slider up and down (or side to side on a horizontal Bargraph button). you'll be animating a change in levels as opposed to a push/release. Rather than assign a prepared slider.Working With Buttons Creating a Custom Slider Multi-State Bargraph buttons work differently than regular Bargraph buttons.) to open the Image and Text Positioning dialog (FIG. that there is no slider indicated on the button (in the Design View window). 124). like multi-state General buttons.. 2. 4. This is because multi-state bargraph buttons. Set the Icon Justification to Absolute. 118 TPDesign4 (v2. Create a Multi-State Bargraph button. Custom sliders on Multi-state Bargraph Buttons work on the panel basically the same as regular sliders. 124 Image and Text Positioning dialog 6.11 or higher) . In the Icon X Offset state property. FIG. In the case of Bargraph buttons. The start position for Multi-State Bargraph buttons is always the bottom of the bargraph (representing the minimum level setting). move the icon into the position that you want to be the "start position" for the bargraph slider. 5. you can animate an icon across the states to serve as a custom slider. In the Image and Text Positioning dialog. or in the State Manager window. there are no slider-oriented settings to make in the Properties Control window. 3. Note that when you draw a Multi-State Bargraph button. To create a custom slider: 1. as on Multi-State General buttons. Select State 1 in the Properties Control Window (States tab). Also note that unlike regular bargraph buttons.. You adjust a level. Apply a Icon Slot assignment to State 1. use up to 255 states to animate the button action. like you would for a normal Bargraph button. click the Browse button (.

the size of the button that the icon will travel across) needed for the slider should be taken in to consideration as well. The range of motion (i. Keep this in mind when setting up a custom slider. move the icon into the position that you want to be the "end position" for the bargraph slider. The button action is the same (press the bargraph slider and drag to adjust the level). 126 State Manager Window (new Icon position for final State) 10. FIG. duplicating State 1 (containing the icon). the icon’s new position in the last State is indicated in the State Manager window (FIG. which does not contain the icon (the original State 2 setting). Select the last State in the Properties Control Window (States tab). 125 State Manager Window (showing Multi-State Bargraph button with 10 states) Keep in mind that the more states used to animate the movement of the icon. and ending at the top. When you close the Image and Text Positioning dialog.Working With Buttons One key difference between regular and Multi-State Bargraph buttons is the way they work on the panel. Always begin the icon animation starting (at State 1) at the bottom position. In the Image and Text Positioning dialog. The end position for Multi-State Bargraph buttons is always the top of the bargraph (representing the maximum level setting). 125 shows the State Manager Window with 10 states: FIG. Generally.11 or higher) 119 . you'll want to delete the "extra" state at the end of the sequence. The user will always press and drag the slider up and down to adjust the level. TPDesign4 (v2. 9. the smoother and more accurate the slider will be. 8.e. but while regular bargraph buttons can be set as either horizontal or vertical. In the State Manager window. or in the State Manager window. Multi-State Bargraph buttons are always oriented vertically. A "short" bargraph button would require less states to create a smooth motion than a "long" one (that for example spans the entire touch panel page). 7. Add States to the button (up to 255 total). 126): FIG. Ctrl+click to select just the first and last states.

11 or higher) . 127). 127 State Manager Window (showing tweened Icon Position) To preview the custom slider in action. 128). Working With Touch Maps TPD4 supports Touch Maps for Multi-State Bargraph buttons. and the red-channel values represent the overall value to change the control to.Working With Buttons 11. Touch Map images allow you to use irregular shapes for active bargraph buttons.. The alpha values in the selected image represent the areas where touch will be registered. Right-click on either of the selected states and select Slot Position from the Tweeners sub-menu. 128 General Properties . an additional state property is enabled (displayed directly below Value Direction in the Properties Control window) called Touch Map (FIG.) next to Touch Map to select an image to use as a Touch Map (via the Resource Manager).Touch Map Click the browse button (. The results of the tweening are displayed in the State Manager window (FIG. If you select Touch Map as the Value Direction (General property). See the Working With Animation Effects section on page 223. FIG. and click and drag the cursor up and down within the button to move the slider up and down.. Remember. you can also utilize the other tweeners in conjunction with the custom slider to create complex color transition effects. 120 TPDesign4 (v2. FIG. open the Button Preview window.

Working With Buttons Joystick Buttons Joystick buttons are vertical and horizontal direction controllers that can be used for pan and tilt control (typically for camera operation). Programming and State button properties. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 121 . select from a drop-down menu. Depending on the item selected. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. To edit any of the properties in the table. 129 General Properties: Type (Joystick button) Because Joystick buttons don't work in the same way as the other button types (in that they don't generate pushes/releases). The following button properties are supported for Joystick buttons: Joystick Buttons . Joystick buttons only use the Off state.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Border Style Disabled Hidden Cursor Name Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Port Level Code Level Aux Level Function Range Low Range High Range Drag Increment Range Inverted Range Time Up Range Time Down String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. Setting Properties: Joystick Buttons Once you have created a Joystick button. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. string and text length = 4096 characters. or both. you can either set the item manually. there is no On state associated with them. as is reflected in the State tab of the Properties Control window. FIG.

130 General Properties: Type (Text Input button) Text Input buttons are not supported on R-4 remote controllers. Depending on the item selected. FIG. The following button properties are supported for Text Input buttons: Text Input Buttons . or both. Programming and State button properties.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Touch Style Border Style Disabled Hidden Password Character Display Type Max Text Length Input Mask Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Note: Maximum command. you can either set the item manually. Setting Properties: Text Input Buttons Once you have created a Text Input button.Working With Buttons Text Input Buttons Text Input buttons are intended for user-input (using the on-screen keyboards) on the panel. select from a drop-down menu.11 or higher) . you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. string and text length = 4096 characters. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. To edit any of the properties in the table. States Properties Border Name Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Font Text Text Effect 122 TPDesign4 (v2.

The following table lists the available Input Mask Next Field characters (for use with the Input Mask state property for Text Input buttons): Input Mask Next Field Characters { } Start Next Field List End Next Field List Input Mask Operators Input Mask Operators change the behavior of the field in various ways. Causes all characters to be converted to uppercase. The following table lists the available Input Marks Operators (for use with the Input Mask state property for Text Input buttons): Input Mask Operators < > ^ Causes all characters to be converted to lowercase. Letter (A to Z. plus and minus signs not allowed). The following table lists the available input mask ranges (for use with the Input Mask state property for Text Input buttons): Input Mask Ranges [ ] | Start Range End Range Range Separator Input Mask Next Field Characters Input Mask Next Field Characters allow the user to specify a list of characters that caused the keyboard to advance the focus to the next field when pressed instead of inserting the test into the text input area. Digit or space (entry not required. Digit or space (entry not required. Any character or a space (entry required). Letter or digit (entry required). entry required.Working With Buttons Input Mask Characters The following table lists the available input mask characters. and which characters each input mask allows in any given position (for use with the Input Mask property for Text Input buttons): Input Mask Characters 0 9 # L ? A a & C Digit (0 to 9. entry required). Sets the overflow flag for this field. Input Mask Ranges Input Mask Ranges allow a user to specify the minimum and maximum numeric values for a given field. TPDesign4 (v2. Any character or a space (entry optional). plus [+] and minus [-] signs not allowed). Only one range is allowed per field and the use of a range implies numeric entry only. Letter (A to Z. entry optional). plus and minus signs allowed).11 or higher) 123 . Letter or digit (entry optional).

Computer Control buttons support password protection separate from any additional username/ password credentials that the user may require to access the remote system once the connection has been made. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. Programming and State button properties. Computer Control buttons only use one state: Off.11 or higher) . 800x600 or 1024x768). Setting Properties: Computer Control Buttons Once you have created a Computer Control button. you can either set the item manually.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Disabled Hidden Remote Host Remote Port Password Color Depth Compression Scale To Fit TakeNote Enabled Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. To edit any of the properties in the table. string and text length = 4096 characters. Computer Control buttons are not supported on R-4 remote controllers. FIG. Depending on the item selected. select from a drop-down menu. 131 General Properties: Type (Computer Control button) Computer Control buttons are constrained to one of three predefined sizes (640x480. allowing you to control the PC via the Touch Panel interface (for remote control purposes). click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. or both. States Properties Fill Color Text Color Overall Opacity 124 TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Buttons Computer Control Buttons Computer Control buttons provide a remote desktop to an attached PC running a VNC server. The following button properties are supported for Computer Control buttons: Computer Control Buttons .

you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. The following button properties are supported for TakeNote buttons: TakeNote Buttons . FIG. To edit any of the properties in the table. Programming and State button properties. 132 General Properties: Type (TakeNote button) TakeNote buttons are not supported on R-4 remote controllers. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap TPDesign4 (v2.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Border Style Disabled Hidden TakeNote Host TakeNote Port Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. Depending on the item selected. you can either set the item manually.Working With Buttons TakeNote Buttons TakeNote buttons work in conjunction with G4 Computer Control to provide a remote desktop to an attached PC running a VNC server. Setting Properties: TakeNote Buttons Once you have created a TakeNote button. allowing you to use a G4 panel to annotate to either a windows desktop or on other G4 panels.11 or higher) 125 . string and text length = 4096 characters. or both. select from a drop-down menu. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field.

5. 133). 6. These selections become the default text settings for all subsequent buttons. 133 Drawing toolbar The settings that are specified in this toolbar become the default settings for all new buttons. 133) to set the Fill Color for the button. Click the down-arrow on the first palette button (see FIG. To set new button parameters: 1. this selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons.Working With Buttons Setting Default New Button Parameters Use the Drawing toolbar to set the default new button parameters (FIG. 8. Again. border family. 7. Of course. as the drop down lists contained on the toolbar do not support this type of docking. until the Fill Color setting is changed. button fill color. this selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons. Click the down-arrow on the third palette button (see FIG. Click the down-arrow on the first drop-down menu to the right of the State button to select the Type of button you want to create (default = general). When the Button Draw tool is selected. 4. 126 TPDesign4 (v2. until the settings are changed. you will see a button that will allow you to toggle the default choices for both the Off and the On state of a button. This selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons. Select the Button Draw tool from the Selection/Draw toolbar (FIG. you can quickly create sets of buttons that are visually consistent. This toolbar can either be free floating or docked. font. 134 Draw Tools (Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar) 2. border color and text color. the Drawing toolbar becomes activated. Button Type Border Type Font Toggle On/Off State properties Font Size Border Color Fill Color Text Color FIG. This way. until the Font and Font Size specifications are changed. This selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons. Button Draw Tool FIG. Buttons are always drawn in the Off State. until the Border Color setting is changed. Click the down-arrow on the second palette button (see FIG. but cannot be docked in a vertical fashion. This selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons. Use the next two drop-down menus to specify a Font and Font Size as the default text attributes for new buttons. until the Text Color setting is changed. The Drawing toolbar allows you to control certain new button creation properties for both the Off and the On state of a button. 3. font size. Click the down-arrow on the second drop-down menu (to the right of the Button Type drop-down) to select a Border Style for the button. 133) to set the Border Color for the button. On the extreme left side of the toolbar. 134). until the Border Style selection is changed.11 or higher) . You can control the button type. This toolbar is normally at the top of your screen and provides you with a mechanism for controlling various elements of future button creation. 133) to set the Text Color for the button. until the Button Type selection is changed.

Choose which Align tool to use based on the shape and size of the selected buttons. Top.When you have one or more buttons that overlap on the page. relative to each other (not relative to the area of the page). 136 Position Assist toolbar Vertical Spacing tools Align: Left. and note that the first button you select becomes the controlling button (all other buttons are moved to align with the controlling button). Bottom . Vertical Center. Increase.Working With Buttons Using the Drawing Assist Features The Order Assist. Order Assist toolbar FIG. Position Assist toolbar FIG. To distribute buttons evenly on the page.Use these commands to control the vertical spacing between selected buttons. TPDesign4 (v2. You must have at least three buttons selected to enable these options. Remove . You must have at least three buttons selected to enable these options.11 or higher) 127 . and the desired design effect.Use these commands to quickly center one or more selected buttons either Horizontally or Vertically on the page. Position Assist and Size Assist toolbars contain shortcuts to many layout and design control options for controlling various elements of existing button(s) size and position. Center Horizontal/Vertical . Increase. use these commands to place the selected button(s) to either the top or bottom layer on the page.Use these commands to control the horizontal spacing between selected buttons. Vertical Spacing (Equal. then increase or decrease spacing as necessary.When you have one or more buttons that overlap on the page. select equal spacing. 136 describes the tools in the Position Assist toolbar: Align tools Horizontal Spacing tools Center tools FIG. Shift Up/Shift Down . Right. and note that the first button you select becomes the controlling button (all other buttons are moved to align with the controlling button). then increase or decrease spacing as necessary.Use the Align commands to quickly align selected buttons on the page. and note that the first button you select becomes the controlling button (all other buttons are moved to align with the controlling button). 135 describes the tools in the Order Assist toolbar: Send To Back Send To Front Shift Up Shift Down FIG. Decrease. Horizontal Center. To distribute buttons evenly on the page. use these commands to shift the selected button(s) up and down just one layer on the page (as opposed to placing them on just the top or bottom layer). 135 Order Assist toolbar Send to Front/Send To Back . Remove) . select equal spacing. Horizontal Spacing (Equal. You must select at least two buttons to enable the Align options. Decrease.

This command automatically resizes the selected button(s) to the smallest size possible that still accommodates the selected border.These commands are like nudge controls for button width and height. and the selected border type. Size To Image .Select a button that has either a bitmap or icon image assigned to it. Size To Image may appear to resize the button to be too small to display the entire image (because part of the image is hidden. Note that since all measurements in TPD4 are zero-based. try to choose button border styles that accommodate and compliment the button image (if there is one).35:1 Letterbox Video 2. and click one of these commands. and the Increase/Decrease Height command will always adjust the height on the bottom side of the selected button(s). Click these buttons to adjust the button width/height in increments specific to the selected border. Aspect Ratio . As a design concept. and draw a circle that is smaller than 150 pixels in diameter (or not perfectly round).Working With Buttons Size Assist toolbar FIG. and click Size To Image to automatically resize the button to the same size as it's associated bitmap or icon. if you create a button with the border "Circle 150". For example. 137 Size Assist toolbar Make Same Width/Height/Size . Oval and Diamond border types. Click this button to select from the drop-down menu: 4:3 Video 16:9 Letterbox Video 16:9 Anamorphic Video 1. 128 TPDesign4 (v2. the Increase/ Decrease Width commands will always adjust the width on the right side of the selected button(s).This tool allows you to set the aspect ratio (for use with video fills). All selected buttons are resized to match the width or height of the controlling button (the first button selected). then select the button(s) that you want to resize. Click this command to resize the button to become a perfect circle.35:1 Anamorphic Video Make Ideal For Border . the Circle and Oval border types are more problematic in terms of potential image cropping than are rectangular borders (assuming the associated image is rectangular). Note that the border uses some of the interior area of the button. Depending on the size of the button. Increase/Decrease Width/Height For Border . For example.85:1 Anamorphic Video 2. or cropped by the border style).85:1 Letterbox Video 1. This option is typically for use with the Circle.Select a button that has the width or height that you want to match. the resulting button will not appear as a perfect circle.11 or higher) . 137 describes the tools in the Size Assist toolbar: Make Same tools Make Ideal For Border Increase Height/Width for Border tools Size To Image Aspect Ratio FIG.

bottom edges: Aligns the bottom edges of all selected buttons. Vertical.select the type of vertical alignment to apply to the selected buttons: none: No alignment (default setting). you must have more than one button selected (in a Design View window). Horizontal .Working With Buttons Using the Alignment & Sizing dialog To access this dialog. vertically (or both) along either the centers of the buttons. Note that the order in which the buttons are selected in the Design View window controls how several of these options work. Offset . top edges: Aligns the top edges of all selected buttons. Positive values offset the selections to the right.These options allow you to align the selected buttons horizontally. All selected buttons are aligned this way in the order in which they were selected. Select Layout > Alignment & Sizing to access this dialog (FIG. 138 Alignment & Sizing dialog The options in this dialog include: Alignment . bottom. 138).the horizontal measurement of the selected panel in pixels). left or right). centers: Aligns the centers of all selected buttons. bottom edges to top: Aligns the bottom edges of selected buttons to the top edge of the button that was selected first.11 or higher) 129 . Use the options in this dialog to align and/or resize the selected buttons. centers: Aligns the centers of all selected buttons.select the type of horizontal alignment to apply to the selected buttons: none: No alignment (default setting). left to right spacing: Aligns the left edge of the first selected button to the right edge of the next selected button.The horizontal alignment values may be offset either absolutely or incrementally. FIG. left edges: Aligns the left edges of all selected buttons. negative values offset them to the left. right edges to left: Aligns the right edges of selected buttons to the left edge of the button that was selected first. Indicate the number of pixels to offset the alignment options (range = 0 . TPDesign4 (v2. Default = 0. right to left spacing: Aligns the right edge of the first selected button to the left edge of the next selected button. All selected buttons are aligned this way in the order in which they were selected. top edges to bottom: Aligns the top edges of selected buttons to the bottom edge of the button that was selected first. left edges to right: Aligns the left edges of selected buttons to the right edge of the button that was selected first. right edges: Aligns the right edges of all selected buttons. or along any edge (top.

Note that the order in which the buttons are selected in the Design View window controls how several of these options work. Specify whether to adjust the sizing values absolutely or incrementally. Change . 3. negative values subtract).specify a number of pixels to add or subtract from the selections height (positive values add pixels. Click on the Push button. Make Same Width . In this case. the Button Preview window is fully dockable. Select the button that you want to preview.Resizes all selected buttons to match the width of the button that was selected first. but initially it opens undocked. Change . The Button Preview window displays a preview of the selected button. Initially the button is shown in its Off state. Select View > Button Preview to open the Button Preview window (FIG. Offset . Indicate the number of pixels to offset the alignment options (range = 0 . Double-click inside the title bar to dock the window. 139).The vertical alignment values may be offset either absolutely or incrementally. To preview a button: 1. All selected buttons are aligned this way in the order in which they were selected. Sizing . 139 Button Preview window Like the other windows in TPD4. Specify whether to adjust the sizing values absolutely or incrementally. text and color settings on a Push and Release of the button.Resizes all selected buttons to match the height of the button that was selected first. Button Preview is not available for Joystick buttons. All selected buttons are aligned this way in the order in which they were selected. Previewing a Button The Button Preview Window allows you to preview a button so you can check size. Make Same Height . Default = 0. 130 TPDesign4 (v2. 2. border.11 or higher) . bottom to top spacing: Aligns the bottom edge of the first selected button to the top edge of the next selected button. Button Preview for List Box Buttons is only supported for a selected child button in unmanaged mode.Working With Buttons top to bottom spacing: Aligns the top edge of the first selected button to the bottom edge of the next selected button.These options allow you to resize the selected buttons to make them match in width. but will not have any data linkage. Button Preview functions the same as for a General button with no text or graphics.specify a number of pixels to add or subtract from the selections width (positive values add pixels. negative values subtract). height or both.the vertical measurement of the selected panel in pixels). FIG.

2. 141 Address Code drop-down menu 5. FIG. Click the Address Code field to enable the drop-down menu (FIG. It is a read-only (non-interactive) button. 140 Address Port = 0-Setup Port 4. Click the plus (+) symbol next to Date Display to expose a drop-down menu of time display formats to choose from (FIG. but normally you would use the General button type. 142). Create a new button.Working With Buttons Creating a Date Button A Date Button is a button that displays the current date on the panel. In the Programming tab of the Properties window. 3.11 or higher) 131 . The button can be of any type. To create a date button: 1. TPDesign4 (v2. click the Address Port field to enable the drop-down menu. Select 0-setup port from the drop-down menu (FIG. FIG. 141). 140).

click the Address Port field to enable the drop-down menu. Create a new button. Select 0-setup port from the drop-down menu (FIG. 132 TPDesign4 (v2. 143 Address Port = 0-Setup Port 4. FIG. Click the Address Code field to enable the drop-down menu (FIG. The button can be of any type. Select the desired display format (Weekday. To create a time button: 1. 142 Address Code .Date Display drop-down menu 6. Creating a Time Button A Time Button is a button that displays the current time on the panel.11 or higher) . In the Programming tab of the Properties window. etc).Working With Buttons FIG. The time or date is only visible once the project is loaded on a touch panel. Time and Date buttons do not display any text when viewed in TPD4. 141). 3. yyyy-mm-dd. 2. It is a read-only (non-interactive) button. 143). but normally you would use the General button type. dd/mm/yyyy.

FIG. 144 Address Code drop-down menu 5. 145 Address Code . Select the desired display format (24-hour. 145). TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Buttons FIG. Time and Date buttons do not display any text when viewed in TPD4.11 or higher) 133 . Standard or Standard AM/PM). Click the plus (+) symbol next to Time Display to expose a drop-down menu of time display formats to choose from (FIG. The time or date is only visible once the project is loaded on a touch panel.Time Display drop-down menu 6.

11 or higher) .Working With Buttons 134 TPDesign4 (v2.

and MVP-8400 panels. LED. cursor down. NXD-CV7. "<none>".for use with a Teletext MIO R-4. panel-wide settings for external controls can be accessed and edited through the External Controls entry in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window. MVP-7500. or cursor select). i. this selection cannot be modified once the panel project has been created. the only available option is "Default Configuration" (and cannot be changed). cursor up. Teletext Keypad with Transport Functions . The global. TPD4 supports copying and converting external controls between panels: When copying a page between panels.11 or higher) 135 . Double-click this entry to access a Design View Window representing the size and placement of the external buttons and LEDs. External Button Options The first dialog in the New Project Wizard includes an option for selecting External Button Options. The global. Keypad with Transport Functions . the options include: Default Configuration . This option allows you to select from multiple external button layouts. the configuration of the source external controls are copied to the destination controls according to the type of control (general.for use with a Teletext MIO R-4 with transport keys. which may be selected like any other button for editing. If you have selected any touch panel that is equipped with external pushbuttons.for use with a MIO R-4 with transport keys. panel-wide settings for external controls can be accessed and edited through the External Controls entry in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window. As with the panel resolution. Double-click this entry to access a Design View Window representing the size and placement of the external buttons and LEDs. Page specific external controls settings are accessed via each page's Design View (with the Page > Show External Controls option enabled). the External Button Options list is empty. Copying/Converting External Controls Between Panels TPD4 supports copying and converting the properties for programmable external controls (external pushbuttons and LEDs) for NXD-CV5. cursor left. Page specific external controls settings are accessed via each page's Design View (with the Page > Show External Controls option enabled). TPDesign4 (v2. You can edit external control properties on both a panel-wide basis and on a page specific buttonby-button basis. The choices available depend on the type of panel selected in the Panel Type drop-down: If you have selected a panel without external pushbuttons. or when converting between panel types that both support external buttons. cursor right. Teletext keypad .for use with a standard MIO R-4.Working With External Controls Working With External Controls Overview TPD4 supports editing the properties for programmable external controls for panels that feature external pushbuttons and LEDs (including R-4 remote controllers).e. If you have selected the MIO R-4 remote. which may be selected like any other button for editing.

3. To edit any of the properties in the table.Working With External Controls When copying a page between panels. Global (panel-wide) settings for external controls are accessed through the new External Controls entry in the panel's tree (displayed in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window). Use the Selection Tool to pick the external control that you want to configure (in the Design View Window). the configuration of the source panel's external controls are copied to the destination panel's controls according to the type of control (general. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. States Properties Note: There are no State properties to configure for external controls. you can use the General tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit general external control properties. or both. cursor left. The following global button properties are supported for external Pushbuttons: External Pushbuttons . Setting Global Properties for External LEDs TPD4 allows you to set Global or Page-Specific properties for external controls (for projects targeted at panel types that have external pushbuttons and LEDs).Supported Properties General Properties Name Disabled Password Protection Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Control Type String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. Global settings are panel-wide settings that apply to the external controls regardless of the page currently showing on the panel. or when converting between panel types that both support external buttons. LED. Page-specific properties are external control properties that change according to the specific page showing on the panel. Global Properties for External Pushbuttons/LEDs TPD4 allows you to set Global or Page-Specific properties for external controls (for projects targeted at panel types that have external pushbuttons). you can either set the item manually. select from a drop-down menu. Page-specific properties are external control properties that change according to the specific page showing on the panel. 1. Depending on the item selected. Global settings are panel-wide settings that apply to the external controls regardless of the page currently showing on the panel. 136 TPDesign4 (v2. Double-click on the External Controls entry to display a Design View Window representing the layout of the external controls on the target panel. Once you have selected an external button. cursor down. 2. which may be selected like any other button to edit their properties.11 or higher) . cursor up. cursor right. Setting Global Properties for External Pushbuttons Global (panel-wide) settings for external controls (pushbuttons and LEDs) are accessed through the new External Controls entry in the panel's tree (displayed in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window). Note that are no State properties to configure for external controls. or cursor select. which may be selected like any other button to edit their properties. string and text length = 4096 characters. Double-click on the External Controls entry to display a Design View Window representing the layout of the external controls on the target panel.

To edit any of the properties in the table.11 or higher) 137 .Supported Properties General Properties Name Disabled Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code States Properties Note: There are no State properties to configure for external controls. select from a drop-down menu. Depending on the item selected. Double-click on a Page entry (in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window) to display the selected page in a Design View Window. click on an item in the righthand column to activate the field. or if its behavior is specific to this page. 1. 3. 2. Page-Specific Properties for External Pushbuttons/LEDs Setting Page-Specific General Properties: External Pushbuttons Page-specific settings for external controls (pushbuttons and associated LEDs) which may override any Global settings are set via the Design View of the page that you want to associate the external controls with. Override Global Settings . which may be selected like any other button to edit their properties. you can use the General tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit general button properties. you can either set the item manually. Note that are no State properties to configure for external controls. Select Pages > Show External Controls to change the Design View to represent the layout of the external buttons on the target panel. States Properties Note: There are no State properties to configure for external controls. Once you have selected an external control. If set to Yes. The following page-specific properties are supported for external Pushbuttons: External Pushbuttons .Supported Properties General Properties Override Global Settings Name Disabled Password Protection Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Control Type String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. Double-click on the External Controls entry to display a Design View Window representing the layout of the external controls (buttons and LEDs) on the target panel. string and text length = 4096 characters. Use the Selection Tool to pick the external control that you want to configure (in the Design View Window).Working With External Controls Global (panel-wide) settings for external controls are accessed through the new External Controls entry in the panel's tree (displayed in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window). the remainder of the external buttons properties will indicate their global values as read-only (default = No). 4. The following global button properties are supported for external LEDs: External LEDs . or both.This option (Yes/No) determines if the button performs the global action defined for the button. TPDesign4 (v2.

The following page-specific properties are supported for external LEDs: External LEDs .11 or higher) .Working With External Controls Setting Page-Specific General Properties: External LEDs Page-specific settings for external controls (pushbuttons and associated LEDs) which may override any Global settings are set via the Design View of the page that you want to associate the external controls with.Supported Properties General Properties Name Disabled Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code States Properties Note: There are no State properties to configure for external controls. 138 TPDesign4 (v2.

Note that you cannot select individual "cells" (or buttons). You can select subordinate buttons by the column to set button properties that affect only the affected column. Strict alignment and spacing rules are forced both by the view and in the properties the user may edit. In many ways. Once in unmanaged mode the only way to put the list box back in the managed mode is by using the Undo feature. List Data Tables are created in TPD4.Managed and Unmanaged: Managed Mode: In managed mode TPD4 treats the List Box button as a Container for the Subordinate buttons. Instead. Subordinate buttons appear in a grid fashion. move and edit the properties of the individual subordinate buttons. Unmanaged Mode: You can choose to place a List Box button in unmanaged mode by selecting Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox). you can select. In unmanaged mode. The List Data Table provides the data to be displayed in the List Box button.Working With List Box Buttons Working With List Box Buttons Overview TPD4 supports adding "List Box" buttons to projects created from panel types that support List Box buttons. In this case. The List Box Container wraps around the Subordinate buttons which represent the display fields for data populated by the List Data Table. the text that is displayed in a List Box button comes from a List Data Table. One example usage for List Box buttons might be to display a scrollable list of music playlists for the end-user to select and playback. For example. TPDesign4 (v2. but do not have any visible properties on the panel. but you cannot add or delete them. Think of a table where each cell is a button. Subordinate buttons are created by adding columns and/or rows to the list box container button. The data displayed in List Box buttons comes from an associated List Data Table. Select the List Box Container to set button properties for the entire list box button (affecting all subordinate buttons within the container). The List Data Table provides the data to be displayed in the List Box button. since subordinate buttons only operate as a display of list data. such as a MAX Home Theater server. Every List Box button must be associated to a List Data Table. The role of the subordinate buttons is to display the data in the list box view. individual button properties are not accessible. via options in the Edit List Tables dialog. managed mode presents properties by column. and can be defined statically or dynamically. Further. When a list box button is in Unmanaged mode the subordinate buttons are no longer managed by the List Box Container button. and every button is populated with data coming from the List Data Table associated with the List Box button. and make selections from the list. The List Box button is a special-purpose button type for G4 devices/panels which utilizes a collection of subordinate buttons to display either dynamic or static data as a scrollable list (referred to as a "list box view"). in that they use Rows and Columns to organize the data to be displayed. Each List Box button is associated to a List Data table. There are three main aspects to List Box buttons: the Container button. the song titles displayed in the list box buttons are provided by a server. List Box buttons are set up like tables in TPD4. and you can specify how the List Box button displays the data (via General and State Button Properties). Every List Box button must be associated to a List Data Table. The List Data Table is the data source for list box buttons. not as individually customizable buttons.11 or higher) 139 . It also presents properties for the list box button and properties for each column. TPD4 supports two modes for List Box buttons . The primary role of the (hidden) list box button is to retain the properties of the list box view. List box buttons can be used to allow the end-user to view data in list form. List Box buttons are visible in TPD4. Unlike other button types where you specify the text to be displayed on the button (via the Text button state property). Subordinate buttons and the List Data table: The main List Box button is referred to as the Container.

Add Column: Click to add a column to the selected List Box Button. 146 List Box Toolbar All toolbars in TPD4 are dockable. you can select. The use of Unmanaged mode is typically limited to special circumstances where moving or modifying individual subordinate buttons is absolutely necessary. click and drag using the handle (the single vertical bar) at the far-left side of the toolbar. When a list box button is in Unmanaged mode the subordinate buttons are no longer managed by the List Box Container button. remove columns and/or rows. In managed mode. double-click anywhere inside the toolbar (but not on a toolbar button). In managed mode. To delete subordinate buttons.Working With List Box Buttons The use of Unmanaged mode is typically limited to special circumstances where moving or modifying individual subordinate buttons is absolutely necessary. or delete individual subordinate buttons. List Box button support is limited to the following G4 devices: MIO R-4 Remotes List Box Toolbar The List Box toolbar contains shortcuts to the Selection and Button Draw tools (FIG. In unmanaged mode. Delete Column: Click to delete the selected column from a selected List Box Button. so they can be arranged within the application window. You can choose to place a List Box button in unmanaged mode by selecting Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox). borders. Changing any properties such as colors. move and edit the properties of the individual subordinate buttons. You also cannot access the channel port and code properties of the subordinate buttons. create. To create subordinate buttons. Double-click again to dock the toolbar. or fonts for subordinate buttons are done on a column-by-column basis.11 or higher) . G4 Devices That Support List Box Buttons At the time of this release. you cannot individually select. 146). Add Row Add Column Delete Column Delete Row FIG. Select View>Toolbars>List Box Toolbar to show/hide this toolbar: Add Row: Click to add a row to the selected List Box Button. and should be considered an advanced mode for seasoned programmers only. List Box Buttons: Managed / Unmanaged Mode When a List Box button is in managed mode. To undock any toolbar. its subordinate buttons are managed strictly via edits performed on the list box button or its columns. or modify their Z-Order. add columns and/or rows to the list box button. 140 TPDesign4 (v2. you cannot move the subordinate buttons around individually. Delete Row: Click to delete the last row from a selected List Box Button. To move the toolbar.

To create a list box button: 1. 146 on page 140). 147 Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar Use the List Box Button draw tool to draw list box buttons on the design view as you would any other button type. 149 list box button . Create a list box button by holding down the right mouse button on the view and dragging the mouse. 2. This way you can see the container (FIG.Working With List Box Buttons List Box Buttons: Managed Mode Creating List Box Buttons (Managed Mode) By default. you will not see the container. If the background color of the page is white. Select the List Box Draw Tool from the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar (FIG. List Box buttons are in managed mode when first created. 148 list box button with one subordinate button By default the list box container is created with a transparent background and a white border. Select the List Box Container button and click the Add Column or Add Row buttons from the List Box Toolbar (see FIG. The example below shows a List Box button with two columns and three rows (FIG. This will create a list box button with one subordinate button (FIG.showing container 3. You can select the container and change the border color to black. 149): FIG. 150): TPDesign4 (v2. This property is only visible in TPD4 and will not appear on the panel.11 or higher) 141 . 148): FIG. In managed mode you add subordinate buttons by adding columns or rows to the list box. 147): List Box Draw Tool FIG.

) as the button above it. 151). FIG. The number of buttons added will be equal to the List Column (general) property. Fill Color. 152 List Box button . 150 List Box button with 2 columns and 3 rows When the List Box Draw Tool is selected. 152). border color. Click the Add Row toolbar button (in the List Box toolbar). This function adds a row to the bottom of the list box container (FIG. the Drawing Tools toolbar can be used to set the border type. 151 List Box button 2. each button will have the same state properties (i. when the List Box Button is created. FIG. fill color and text color for the on and off states of the subordinate buttons.e. 142 TPDesign4 (v2.1 Row Added The height of the row will be equal to the List Row Height (general) property of the list box container. Adding Rows 1.11 or higher) . When a new row is added. Select a List Box button in the Diagram Area (FIG.Working With List Box Buttons FIG. The width of each button is equal to the Column Width (general) property of each column in the list box. font. Border Color etc.

Select the List Box button in the Diagram Area. the new column will have the same width as the selected column.11 or higher) 143 . this function is disabled. If a column is selected.2 Rows 2. 153 List Box button . Select the List Box button in the Diagram Area. A column of buttons will appear on the right-hand side of the list and will contain the number of buttons equal to the List Row (general) property. the preferred row property should be set back to 1. This function adds a column to the righthand side of the list box container (FIG. Deleting Rows 1. 153).1 Column Added The width of the last column is used for the new column. Click the Delete Row toolbar button (in the List Box toolbar) to delete the bottom-most row in the list box container. Click the Add Column toolbar button (in the List Box toolbar). Select a List Box button in the Diagram Area (FIG. If only one column exists. Deleting Columns 1. If the preferred row is deleted. Click the Delete Column toolbar button (in the List Box toolbar) to delete the right-most column in the list box container. 154). If a column is deleted.Working With List Box Buttons Adding Columns 1. this function is disabled. 2. 2. and is part of the Column Display Order field of the parent. After deletion the container will be resized. FIG. The maximum number of column allowed in a List Box Button is 20. 154 List Box button . If only one row exists. TPDesign4 (v2. the Column Display Order field will be reset to "empty". FIG.

11 or higher) . pasting and deleting all the subordinate buttons for you. these features are no longer available.Working With List Box Buttons Cutting. 155). List Box Buttons .Container Button In Managed mode. 156 List Box Button . When one or more of the subordinate buttons are also selected. All you have to do is select the container. Click on the outside edge of the List Box button to select the Container.Container Button Select the Container to set button properties for the entire button (affecting all subordinate buttons within the container). as shown below (FIG.Container Button Selected 144 TPDesign4 (v2. TPD4 does not support copying and/or pasting individual columns of a managed list box. copying and pasting a managed list box works only when the list box container is selected by itself or when the list box container is selected along with other non-subordinate buttons. TPD4 takes care of copying. TPD4 treats a List Box button as a Container for the subordinate buttons that constitute the columns and/or rows of the List Box button (FIG. Copying and Pasting a List Box Cutting. The (red) handles indicate that the entire button is selected. you can select individual columns within the Container button to set button properties at the column level. 155 List Box Buttons . FIG. Alternatively. 156): FIG.

158). you can either set the item manually. These properties are viewed by selecting the list box Container (FIG. or both. However. Column Properties In Managed mode. The other perspective is based on columns of the list box. The List Box button that contains all the subordinate buttons (called the List Box Container button) presents properties that deal with the list box as a whole. Programming and State button properties. If you select a List Box Button Column.Column Selected Setting Properties: List Box Container Buttons Once you have created a List Box button. additional state properties are supported. fill color etc (FIG. 157 List Box Button . you select columns of the list box to change properties for all the buttons in that column such as button width. border type. 157): FIG. select from a drop-down menu. Managed mode will not allow you to select or move buttons outside of the container. only the Off state is indicated.Container Button Selected 2. since List Box Container buttons do not support multiple states. properties are split into two perspectives: 1. To edit any of the properties in the table. the following Properties will appear in the Properties window. Instead. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. When a List Box Container is selected. TPDesign4 (v2. List Box button columns do support multiple states. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field.11 or higher) 145 . The following button properties are supported for List Box Container buttons: If you select the List Box Container.Working With List Box Buttons List Box Container Properties vs. 158 List Box Button . Depending on the item selected. FIG.

and States tabs of the Properties Window to set/edit button properties for the container button. 159: FIG. as shown in FIG. Click on the outside edge of the List Box button to select the Container. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. 1. Programming. 159 List Box Button .Container Button Selected 2.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Hidden List Table Port List Table Address Column Display Order Column Sort Order List Table Wrap List Row List Column List Row Height List Preferred Row List Preferred Row Height List Column Padding List Row Padding List Offset Enabled List Managed Programming Properties Address Port Address Code States Properties Border Color Fill Color Overall Opacity Setting List Box Container Button Properties Once you have created a List Box button. Select the Container to set button properties for the entire button (affecting all subordinate buttons within the container).11 or higher) . you can use the General. or both. The (red) handles indicate that the entire button is selected. you can either set the item manually.Working With List Box Buttons List Box Container Buttons . To edit any of the properties in the table. Depending on the item selected. 146 TPDesign4 (v2. select from a drop-down menu.

top to bottom.1 (FIG. See the Setting List Box Button Column Properties section on page 149 for details. top to bottom. 160 List Box Buttons . 160): FIG. The list box button's Row and Column properties are set to the total number of rows/columns. The List Box Button's Address Port and Code must be set to an Address Port/Code of a List Data Table. The list Box Button's Data Display property is a string surrounded by parenthesis. List Box Buttons . The Z-Order of all subordinate buttons must follow list box button container and continue in sequential order from left to right. TPDesign4 (v2. then this property would be set to 3.Subordinate Buttons List box buttons and subordinate buttons have a special kind of relationship to keep track of which buttons belong to the list box button. The Channel Code of each subordinate button is set in sequential order starting with 1000 from left to right. The subordinate button's Row and Column property is set to their row/column position. For example. When a row or column is added.Working With List Box Buttons There are additional properties that can be applied to a selected column within the Container button. Each subordinate button's Channel Port must be set to the High Port of the list box button. if the list box's 1st 2nd and 3rd columns are assigned to columns 3. 4 and 1.11 or higher) 147 . Rows are added to the bottom of a list box and columns are added to the right-hand side of a list box. The string is a comma-delimited list of List Table Column Values. the list box container is resized automatically to fit the new region of subordinate buttons added. the placement of subordinate buttons in a list box is automatic and controlled by the location of the list box container and laid out in a grid fashion.Subordinate Buttons Subordinate Button Placement In managed mode.4.

Middle Column Selected Setting Properties: List Box Columns Once you have created a List Box button. Alternatively. 161): FIG.Drag and Drop Capability Full drag and drop capability is supported for Subordinate List Box buttons: You can drag a column property of a list box and drop it on another column of a list box. List Box button columns support multiple states. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. select from a drop-down menu. The (blue) handles indicate that a single column is selected. List Box Buttons . TPD4 treats a List Box button as a Container for the subordinate buttons that constitute the columns and/or rows of the List Box button. select the Container to set button properties for the Container List Box button (affecting all subordinate buttons within the container). or both. Programming.11 or higher) . You can also drag and drop one to two states in the State Manager window on a column of a List Box. Depending on the item selected. you can either set the item manually. To edit any of the properties in the table. 148 TPDesign4 (v2. you can use the General. and States tabs of the Properties Window to set/edit button properties for the columns. You can select individual columns within the Container button to set button properties at the column level. The list box column will highlight when dragged on top of the column in the Design View and when dropped the property will change to the value dragged from the properties window. Click inside the Container to select a column.Working With List Box Buttons Subordinate Buttons . as shown below (FIG. 161 List Box Button .Columns In Managed mode.

Properties applied to a column will affect all buttons in that column.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Description Width Above Popups Border Style Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output States Properties Draw Order Border Name Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Note: All of the above are available only for Bitmap Justification unmanaged list boxes. or both. Managed list boxes Scale Bitmap To Fit do not have any programming Icon Justification properties available. Programming. you can either set the item manually. To edit any of the properties in the table. Font Text Text Justification Text Effect Word Wrap Marquee Direction Marquee Repeat Setting List Box Button Column Properties Once you have created a List Box button.11 or higher) 149 . TPDesign4 (v2. States tabs of the Properties Control window to set/edit button properties for a selected column (within the List Box button container).Working With List Box Buttons List Box Columns . you can use the General. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. See the Setting Properties: List Box Container Buttons section on page 145 for details. If you select a column within the container (as opposed to the List Box button container itself). Depending on the item selected. you can set button properties that apply specifically to the selected column. List Box buttons consist of a container and subordinate buttons that are created with Columns and Rows. There are additional properties that can be applied to the List Box button container. select from a drop-down menu.

When a list box button is in Unmanaged mode the subordinate buttons are no longer managed by the List Box Container button.Editable Properties Editable Button Properties of an unmanaged List Box Container button General Properties • Name • Lock Button Name • Description • Left • Top • Width • Height • List Table Port • List Table Address • List Display • Column Sort Order • List Filter Column • List Selectable • List Table Wrap • List Preferred Row Editable Button Properties of an unmanaged List Box Subordinate button General Properties • Name • Lock Button Name • Description • Left • Top • Width • Height • Border Style 150 TPDesign4 (v2. By removing the check for whether the list box is managed or not. it always defaults to Managed mode. the Z-Order can only be placed in front of or behind the entire list box collection. the Z-Order of the unmanaged list box must remain in order without gaps in the sequence. Rows and Columns cannot be removed nor added. move and edit the properties of the individual subordinate buttons. When changing the Z-Order of a non-list box button. In unmanaged mode. but you cannot add or delete them. This logic is present for managed list boxes. If the Container is deleted. You can choose to place a selected List Box button in unmanaged mode by selecting Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox). this functionality will carry over to unmanaged list boxes. The Z-Order of an unmanaged list box Container/Subordinate buttons cannot be changed.Unmanaged Mode . However. Only certain button properties are available to edit in unmanaged mode: List Box Buttons . The use of Unmanaged mode is typically limited to special circumstances where moving or modifying individual subordinate buttons is absolutely necessary. all of the subordinate buttons will be deleted as well. you can select.11 or higher) . In other words. Note that once a List Box button has been moved to unmanaged mode. and individual subordinate buttons can be selected. When a List Box button is put into Unmanaged mode: The Container. the only way to get the unmanaged list box back to a managed state is via Edit > Undo. moved and resized.Working With List Box Buttons List Box Buttons: Unmanaged Mode When a List Box button is created. individual (or multiple selection) subordinate buttons can not be deleted.

Columns cannot be removed nor added. Individual (or multiple selection) child buttons can not be deleted. This logic is present for managed list boxes.11 or higher) 151 . the Z-Order of the unmanaged list box must remain in order without gaps in the sequence. In other words. When changing the Z-Order of a non-list box button.Unmanaged Mode . Unmanaged transition is one-way. Rows cannot be removed nor added.) Editable Button Properties of an unmanaged List Box Container button Programming Properties • Address Port • Address Code • Channel Port • Channel Code Editable Button Properties of an unmanaged List Box Subordinate button Programming Properties • Feedback • Address Port • Address Code • String Output Port • String Output • Command Port • Command Output State Properties: Off only • Border Color • Fill Color • Overall Opacity State Properties: Off only • Draw Order • Border Name • Border Color • Fill Color • Text Color • Text Effect Color • Overall Opacity • Bitmap Justification • Scale Bitmap To Fit • Icon Justification • Font • Text Justification • Text Effect • Word Wrap • Marquee Direction • Marquee Repeat Rules for Unmanaged List Box Buttons The following rules apply to List Box Buttons in Unmanaged Mode: Must be constructed from a Managed List Box (create a Managed List Box Button and change it to Unmanaged mode via the Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox) option). a message box is given stating the reason it can not be deleted. The only way to get the unmanaged list box back to a managed state is to use the Undo feature. By TPDesign4 (v2. If the user tries to delete one or more list box child buttons. Parent and individual child buttons can be selected. The parent can be deleted -> all children will be deleted as well. the Z-Order can only be placed in front of or behind the entire list box collection. Changing Z-Order of an unmanaged list box Parent/Child is not available.Editable Properties (Cont. Parent and individual child buttons can be moved and resized.Working With List Box Buttons List Box Buttons .

163 list box button with one subordinate button 3. This will create a list box button with one subordinate button (FIG. Creating List Box Buttons (Unmanaged Mode) By default. List Box buttons are in managed mode when first created. Create a list box button by right clicking on the view and dragging the mouse. Select the List Box Draw Tool from the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar (FIG. The High Port of a parent can not be changed via properties. 164): FIG.11 or higher) . Select the List Box Container button and click the Add Column or Add Row buttons from the List Box Toolbar. Select Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox). 163): FIG. this functionality should carry over to unmanaged list boxes. 162): List Box Draw Tool FIG. The example below shows a list box button with two columns and three rows (FIG. 152 TPDesign4 (v2. 2. To create a list box button: 1. 162 Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar Use the List Box Button draw tool to draw list box buttons on the design view as you would any other button type. State properties of individual unmanaged list box button can be changed.Working With List Box Buttons removing the check for whether the list box is managed or not. The Channel Port/Code of a child can not be changed via properties. 164 List Box Button With 2 Columns and 3 Rows 4.

up to the number of rows present in the list box. the List Box cannot be set back to managed mode except through the Undo feature. In unmanaged mode you can resize and move individual subordinate buttons of the list box but you cannot add nor delete rows and columns. When two or more columns are selected. resizing maintains the size ratio of the preferred row vs. 1).11 or higher) 153 . 6.Resizing If the change in size specified by the drag is not equally divisible by the number of rows. This allows you to change the overall width of the list box. the remainder is dropped. 165 List Box Buttons . After resizing the column. the remainder is applied to the Preferred Row Height. If Preferred Row is 0. If the List Preferred Row is set to a non-zero value (i. plus the offset of the parent if the List Offset Enabled (General) property is set to "yes". If the last column is selected. FIG.Resizing When a List Box Container is resized by dragging the center handles. 166). the next column to the right will resize to reflect the change. the change in size is split evenly between each row by adding/subtracting the change in size to the Row Height and Preferred Row Height properties of the Container (FIG. The program displays a warning message concerning the rules concerning unmanaged mode: Once set. the maximum width allowed per column is the amount of width from the right-hand side of the list box to the right edge of the page or popup divided by the TPDesign4 (v2. Use the corner resize handles to do a combination what the center handles do by resizing one of the corners. the other rows. FIG. 166 Right center handle enabled for resizing When a single column is selected (not including the last column) resizing is limited to the width of the selected column and the next column to the right. When a List Box Column is selected. only the right center handle is enabled for resizing (FIG. The minimum height for each row is 4 pixels. Click Yes to convert the List Box Button to unmanaged mode. List Box Buttons . resizing is limited to the size of the last column plus the width left on the right hand side of the list box to the right edge of the page or popup.Working With List Box Buttons 5.e. 165).

11 or higher) . For unmanaged list boxes. etc. the Z-Order (or State Draw order) of the subordinate buttons must follow the list box container's Z-Order in row-column sequential order. For managed list boxes the Z-Order is managed for you when rows and/or columns are added. Press again for an ascending re-sort. the colors are defined via the Drawing Tools Toolbar. List Box Buttons . 154 TPDesign4 (v2. When resized in this way.it is either behind or on top of the entire list box). Only experienced programmers who fully understand list box construction and the logic of Z-Order placement should use the list box in unmanaged mode. deleted. send-to-back. Page Up . font. border color.Sort the specified column. or when the list box layout is changed (bring-to-front. If you select a column. 167) can be used to set the border. When resizing the width of a column.Move list down one entry.Navigation Buttons General buttons can be used to provide a means for the user to control a List Box button. On first press. These buttons are referred to as List Box Navigation buttons. Sort Column (1-20) . when the List Box Button is created. Here are the actions that a list box navigation button can perform (selectable via the Channel Code property). you can manipulate each subordinate button of an unmanaged list box. Home .). Up . 167 Drawing toolbar When you draw a List Box button with the List Box Draw Tool. pasted.Working With List Box Buttons number columns selected. the new width is applied from right-to-left until the maximum width is met. End . you can use the Drawing Tools Toolbar to specify the border type. the minimum allowed is 4 pixels. Button Type Border Type Font Toggle On/Off State properties Font Size Border Color Fill Color Text Color FIG.e. the width of the new column is defined based on the last column in the list box. then click the Add Column button (in the List Box Toolbar).Move list to top of page. the properties (including width) of the new column are taken from the selected column.Z-Order In order for a list box to function correctly on a panel. Using the Drawing Toolbar With List Box Buttons When the List Box Draw Tool is selected. A managed list box's Z-Order cannot be interrupted by another buttons Z-Order (i. the specified column is sorted alpha-numerically in descending order. Down . Even though you can individually select buttons in unmanaged mode. When you add columns and rows (with the List Box Button Container selected).Move list to end of page. at the time that the button is created. Page Down . a button separate from the list box cannot be behind some of the subordinate buttons of the list box and on top of the rest of the subordinate buttons . fill color and text color for the On and Off states of the subordinate buttons. List Box Buttons . the Drawing toolbar (FIG.Move list down one page.Move list up one page. Z-Order placement remains managed by the list box. fill and text color for the List Box button's subordinate buttons.Move list up one entry.

five navigation buttons (in cyan) and a scroll bar (in yellow):. 5. The first button's Channel Code would be set to "Sort Column 1". The third button's Channel Code would be set to "Sort Column 3". Add a general button to the page and set the Channel Port to the List Box and set the Channel Code to the desired function.Programming Tab . The smaller cyan buttons. 4. Alternatively you could leave these buttons out and program the external buttons (R4) to move the list up and down. See the SystemGenerated Project File Names section on page 30 for details. FIG. one above and one below the yellow button could be set to scroll the list box up and down: 6. 168 List Box with Navigation Buttons Creating List Box Navigation Buttons 1. The second button's Channel Code would be set to "Sort Column 2". etc. All three button's Channel Port should be set to the List Box (via the Properties Control . "List Box 2".assuming that at least one List Box button is defined in the project). TPDesign4 (v2. Set both button's Channel Port to the List Box. 7. Set the top button's Channel Code to "Up" and the bottom button's Channel Code to "Down". 3. For example.Working With List Box Buttons FIG. 168 illustrates a List Box (in white). they will be listed as "List Box 1". If you haven't renamed any of the List Box buttons that have been added to this project.11 or higher) 155 . 2. the three large cyan button in the figure above could be used to sort columns of the list box.

169 List Box Navigation Scroll Bar . Again. the user can drag the bargraph at runtime to scroll the list. The size of the list is not represented.11 or higher) . 170 List Box Navigation Scroll Bar . These bargraphs depict position only. The second option (shown below) uses the slider property to indicate position (FIG. 170): FIG.Level Code set to Scroll (option1) The Off state fill color is set to white and the On state fill color is set to green. Set the Level Port of the bargraph to the list box and set the Level Code to "Scroll". Now you have two visual options: The first is depicted below (FIG. The user can drag the bargraph at runtime to scroll the list up and down. 169): FIG.Level Code set to Scroll (option 2) Both state fill colors for On and Off are set to white. 156 TPDesign4 (v2.Working With List Box Buttons Creating a List Box Navigation Scroll Bar One option for List Box Navigation Buttons is to link a single bargraph button to a Listbox for navigating the list data up and down.

11 or higher) 157 . bg2 and bg3: FIG. They mask portions of button bg3 to visually indicate slider position and size. To set these buttons up as a list box scroll bar set the button properties as follows: Button bg1 properties: Level Port: set to List Box Level Code: bottom mask Off Button State: Fill color set to Transparent On Button State: Fill color set to yellow TPDesign4 (v2.Working With List Box Buttons Creating a List Box Feedback Scroll Bar The yellow button in FIG. 172 shows that the yellow bargraph is actually made up of 3 bargraph buttons labeled bg1. 172 List Box Feedback Scroll Bar . 171 serves as visual feedback to indicate the list size and position.Scroll Bar Components Buttons bg1 and bg2 are called Mask buttons. 171 List Box Feedback Scroll Bar Scroll Bar Components FIG. It does not have any navigation capability: FIG.

Enter the number of the column to use for alpha-numeric sorting (1-20). edit and delete List Data Tables in support of List Box buttons. The Sort Column entries contain the column titles (up to 20 columns. such as the MAX AVP).Move up one page Page Down .no navigation command will be associated with this button. a panel without a touch overlay. List Data Table TPD4 supports the ability to create." automatically. List Data Tables provide the information that is displayed on List Box Buttons.. It is located behind buttons bg1 and bg2 and it's color will show through the transparent parts of bg1 and bg2 to represent the slider of the scroll bar. TPD4 will save the "List" or "Selection" version of "Up..Move to Top of page End . based on whether the PPF says the panel type supports "Selection" (i. It is up to you to make sure a column exists in the table when defining a "Sort Column #". and it's associated dialogs: 158 TPDesign4 (v2. This separates the data from the view so that List Data Table can be created statically or dynamically: TPD4 presents a list table view to create and define a static List Data Table.Move up one entry Down . Down. Up . Since the purpose of List Box Buttons is to present data. You can also designate dynamic List Data Table data for a List Box Button that is created at runtime by the panel firmware. Once applied to a Navigation Button.e.Move to bottom of page Sort Column (1-20) .Channel Code Values Channel Code values that can be applied to Navigation buttons (via the Channel Code Programming property) include: none . Navigation Buttons . However. Once created.Move down one page Home . List Data Tables are created via options in the Edit List Table dialog (FIG. the table can be designated for a list box through a property of the List Box Button. Button bg3 is not really needed. It could have been left out leaving the background color to show through as the slider. the button will sort the list box based on this column selection. 173).11 or higher) . TPD4 displays these list values regardless of the panel type.. supplied by the List Data Table).Move down one entry Page Up . a list data table is used to manage the data of a List Box Button and can be designated through a property of the List Box Button.Working With List Box Buttons Button bg2 properties: Level Port: set to List Box Level Code: top mask Off Button State: Fill color set to yellow On Button State: Fill color set to Transparent Button bg3 is not connected to the list box.

11 or higher) 159 . A dynamic table type is updated dynamically from the master with data.Select either a static or a dynamic table type.The Name is a character value used to identify the list table data. the device cannot display current state information provided by the master. Opposed to static data. Table Address Code . the device will resume the last known static table event should power be cycled. the information displayed on the device is on the master and not the device. TPDesign4 (v2.The Address Port property is an integer value representing the port of the list data table. Table Type .The Address Code property is an integer value representing the address code of the list data table. Therefore. Table Address Port . Note that unlike Dynamic List Box data. Dynamic List Box Data Dynamic List Box data populates button information based upon communications between the panel and a NetLinx Master. 173 Edit List Table dialog List Data Table Properties The following list data table properties are editable: Table Name .Working With List Box Buttons FIG. no raw data will be entered by the user. Dynamic List data must be included in the NetLinx code running on the NetLinx Master in order to be available for use on List Box Buttons. Static List Box Data A static list box populates button information based on data stored on the panel. Conversely.

See the Attaching a Static List Data Table to a List Box Button section on page 163.. Use the options in this dialog to assign a name and type to each column in the table. See the Working With Function Codes section on page 207 for more information on Ports and Addresses. as well as a List Data Table.e. This dialog displays the number of columns indicated in the Create New Table dialog: 160 TPDesign4 (v2. with enough rows and columns to accommodate the data that you will enter into the List Data Table. Address: Assign a Port and Address for the table. FIG. you are ready to associate the List Data Table to the List Box Button.11 or higher) . so that the data in the List Data Table is displayed in the List Box button: 1. Click OK to save your changes and proceed to the Column Types dialog (FIG. There are two variations on this concept: Static List Box Data. create a new List Box button. time or temperature. where you will specify basic properties for the new table. which populates the associated List Box Button with the data entered into a List Data Table via the Edit List Tables dialog. Attaching a List Data Table to a List Box Button Once you have created a list Box Button.Working With List Box Buttons Dynamic tables are great for creating parameters for displaying changing options. 174 Create New Table dialog Name of Table: Type a unique name for the table. 174). Number of Columns: Enter the number of columns to include in the table. It is this association that allows the data in the List Data Table to be displayed on the List Box Button. Click New to open the Create New Table dialog (FIG. 173 on page 159). Port: Assign a Port and Address for the table. Number of Rows: Enter the number of rows to include in the table. if the device loses power it will not be able to display the last known states. Select Panel > Edit List Tables (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit List Tables dialog (FIG. 2. however. which populates the List Box Button dynamically. See Attaching a Dynamic List Data Table to a List Box Button section on page 171. 175). If you haven't already done so. i. date. 4. Creating a Static List Data Table To create a Static List Data Table and associate it to a List Box Button. Dynamic List Box Data. with data defined in NetLinx Code. 3.

Type: Click inside these fields to access the Type drop-down menu.Click to add a row to the table. Icon . 175 Column Types dialog Column: Displays the number associated with each column in the table. Click OK to save your changes and return to the Edit List Tables dialog.The column will display bitmap images from a table of bitmap references.11 or higher) 161 . Delete Row .Click to add a column to the table. Page Flip . use the command buttons along the top of this dialog to add/delete rows and columns from the active table. Click the Column button to sort the columns in descending/ascending order.This column will contain a port/channel code combination that is sent to the master upon activation of a particular row. 176). Add Column . You can select any table from the list to edit its properties.The column will display valid page names that will be activated as page flips. Use the options in this dialog to assign a name and type to each column in the table. each one is added to the Tables list.The column will display icons from a table of icon references. and specify a Port and Address to the table: Add Row .The column will contain a variable length text value. Also note that the table you just created is listed in the Tables list box (left side of the dialog). TPDesign4 (v2. As you create more new tables. The following are the available column types to select from: Text . resize the table. Name: Use these text fields to enter a unique name for each column. Note that the Table Data display reflects the columns/rows and column names that you specified. 6. At this point. to assign a specific type to each column. Port/Channel Code .Working With List Box Buttons FIG. Bitmap . This option invokes the Add List Table Column dialog (FIG. 5.Click to delete one or more selected rows from the table. This column is hidden from the user on the display and is used as navigation.

Fit Table . Page Flip . to assign a specific type to each column.Assign to columns that will be used to display text. This option invokes the Change Port/Addr dialog.This option allows you to rename the column label at the top of a column.Assign to columns that will be used to display channel code information. Note that this option is disabled once the table reaches the minimum allowed width.11 or higher) . you will be able to select a bitmap that has already been defined in the project.Click to expand each column by equal amounts. channel/variable text.Working With List Box Buttons FIG. Port/Addr .Click to open the List Table Power Assign dialog. Use the options in this dialog to set button-level actions. Power Assign . If the type is of the type "Channel Code". and code parameters to one or more selected buttons. Delete Column . Name: Use these text fields to enter a unique name for each column.Click to resize the table to fit inside the Table Data window. If the column is of the type "Page Flip".Click to shrink each column by equal amounts.Assign to columns that will invoke a page flip when selected. Type: Click inside these fields to access the Type drop-down menu. the user will be able to enter data. 162 TPDesign4 (v2. Shrink Columns . 7. Note that this option is disabled once the table reaches the maximum allowed width.Assign to columns that will be used to display bitmaps. 176 Add List Table Column This dialog displays the number of columns indicated in the Create New Table dialog: Column: Displays the number associated with each column in the table. Bitmap . Expand Columns .Assign to columns that will be used to display icons. then you will need to enter a channel port/code combination value. Click OK to return to the Edit List Tables dialog. Edit the cell data as desired: When you click inside a particular cell: If column is of the type "Text". then a drop-down list of available pages is displayed.Click to assign a unique Port and Address combination for the table. Rename Column . Use the Table Port and Table Address fields to specify the port/address combination. Icon .Click to delete the column that currently has focus. Channel Code . The column type options include: Text (default) . Click the Column button to sort the columns in descending/ascending order. If the column is of the type "Bitmap". 8.

Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. To move rows. you are ready to associate the List Data Table to the List Box Button. click inside either the List Table Port or the List Table Address fields. FIG. 4..see Attaching a List Data Table to a List Box Button section on page 160.) button. you will be able to select an icon that has already been defined in the project.11 or higher) 163 . select the List Box Button that you want to associate with a List Data Table. Click this button to access the Attach Table To List Box dialog (FIG. 177). select one or more rows and click and drag them to another spot in the table. Select the table that you want to attach to the selected List Box Button. TPDesign4 (v2. as well as a Static List Data Table. In the General tab of the Properties Control Window. This dialog lists all Static List Data Tables in your project. In the Design View window. Once a table is selected. 177 Attach Table To List Box dialog 3. 1..Working With List Box Buttons If the column is of the type "Icon". Attaching a Static List Data Table to a List Box Button Once you have created a list Box Button. Clicking inside these fields enables the browse (. 9. 2. Now you will attach the List Data Table to a List Box Button . the Table Port and Table Address fields are automatically updated with that table's port/address assignments. It is this association that allows the data in the List Data Table to be displayed on the List Box Button.

column data information.<data2>. Unique list addresses and names are handled programmatically. 3.'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides • uniflag = indicates unicode. Click OK to proceed. Creating a Dynamic List Data Table Dynamic List Data is provided to the associated List Box Button by the NetLinx Code running on the NetLinx Master that the panel is connected to. Syntax: "'^LDN-<list port>. 1.1. The number of data fields is limited only to the number of columns in the data list.<list address>. The program will prompt you to verify this action before the table deleted. Syntax: "'^LDA-<list address>.Anything for Lunch'" Adds a text row to the data list located at address 1.0. Use double-quotes to surround fields in which commas are needed. 0 . List box commands contain comma-delimited fields. "'^LDN-5.4.<uniflag>.No unicode. Primary data is required. address 1.. Meatloaf. The primary data is set as Entry5. Click the Delete command button.Best of.<list name>'" Variables: • list port = port where data resides • list address = address where data resides • column count = the number of data columns (includes hidden columns) • list name = User specified name for the data list Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. 2.<primary data>. Select the table that you want to delete. and Anything for Love are all cells within the new row.my songs'" Creates a data list of 4 columns named "my songs" and places it at port 5. Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Best of.Uses unicode • primary data = the "key" data column. Use Data List Commands to define List Data in your NetLinx Code. 2. in the Tables list. The information in this column provides each row with its uniqueness.. 173 on page 159). "'^LDA-1. 1 .Entry5. • data2 = variable.<column count>. 164 TPDesign4 (v2.Working With List Box Buttons Deleting a List Data Table To delete a List Data Table from your project: 1. Attach the Dynamic List Data Table to a List Box Button There are two types of List Box Commands that can be used to define List Box Data in your NetLinx Code: Data List Commands Command Structure List View Data List Commands Data List Commands ^LDN Creates a new data list.11 or higher) . Select Panel > Edit List Tables to open the Edit List Tables dialog (FIG. ^LDA Adds a new row to an existing data list.Meatloaf.. 4. but you can use commas within the fields.

.0.<type>.<type>. 3 .) ^LDR Removes a row from an existing data list Syntax: "'^LDR-<list address>.Uses unicode • primary data = the "key" data column. Syntax: "'^LDD-<list address>'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.1.No unicode. 1 . "'^LDD-1'" Deletes the data list located at address 1. 0 .Channel. Column is the index of the first type to set.0'" Sets the column type for the data list located at address 1. The information in this column provides each row with its uniqueness. Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'^LDR-1. ^LDD Deletes the data list.0..11 or higher) 165 . "'^LDT-1. 0 .'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides • column = the starting column number • type = subsequent columns. TPDesign4 (v2. the second and third columns are also Text. 4 . ^LDT Sets the column type for a data list.. Syntax: "'^LDT-<list address>.Text. Note: Data List Command Rules apply (see the Data List Command Rules section on page 166).Entry5'" Removes the text row Entry5 from an existing data list at address 1. "'^LDC-1'" Clears all rows in data list located at address 1. The column type starts at column 1.Page Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. the first column is Text. additional types sent are set in order.<primary data>'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides • uniflag = indicates unicode. ^LDC Clears all rows in a given list.<column>.Working With List Box Buttons Data List Commands (Cont.0.<uniflag>. Syntax: "'^LDC-<list address>'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.

Data List Command Rules The following rules apply to several of the Data List Commands. The information in this column provides each row with its uniqueness. Syntax: "'^LDL-<list address>.<new cell data>'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides • column = the starting column number.Entry5.No unicode. 1 . When a backslash is parsed. "'^LDL-1.Uses unicode • primary data = the "key" data column. This can be used to load a data list that has long text fields. Within double quotes.) ^LDL Modifies the data in a single column field. 0 . 166 TPDesign4 (v2.<uniflag>.1.0.11 or higher) . Any data field that has a double quote literal as its first character MUST use double quotes to delimit the field. the next character is read as a literal value and the backslash is discarded. This is to allow double quote literals within the string bounded by double quotes. in the row with the primary data "Entry5" and in the data list located at the address of 1 is a text value of Music.Music'" The field located in column 1. the backslash (\) is used as an escape character.) and the last nonspace character before the following delimiter (or end of command). Double quotes must be the first non-space character after the previous delimiter (.<column>. to escape another backslash (commas do not need to be escaped). Note: Data List Command Rules apply (see the Data List Command Rules section on page 166).<primary data>. numbering starts at 1 • uniflag = indicates unicode. as indicated in the Data List Commands table: Leading and trailing spaces are ignored before and after opening and closing double quotes.Working With List Box Buttons Data List Commands (Cont. then use the backslash to escape the double quote literal. There are 2 cases in which you would use the backslash to escape a double quote literal within the field. • new cell data = data information for a single field or "cell" Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.

Possible values for the sort field: 0 = None 1 = Forward Sort 2 = Reverse the current list ordering (may or may not be sorted) 3 = Reverse Sort 4 = Filter 5 = Forward Sort + Filter 6 = Reverse current + filter 7 = Reverse sort + filter Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Syntax: "'^LVO-<view address>. address 1 and displays it according to the view definitions located at address 5.Working With List Box Buttons Command Structure List View Command Structure List View ^LVO Filter sort. Note that the <sort> field is a bitmask. Syntax: "'^LVL-<view address>. When used on a sorted list. so that the 3 bit positions may be combined. "'^LVL-5.Sort Bit 0x0002 .2. but should be used in combination with the sort bit (0x0003) such that it always results in a reverse sorted list.<list address>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • list port = port where list resides • list address = address where data resides Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.<list port>. "'^LVO-1. In most cases.<sort>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • sort: Bit 0x0001 .Filter Reverse bit (0x0002) reverses the list from whatever order it is currently in. tells the view which of the possible orderings to use. the reverse bit should not be used alone.Reverse Bit 0x0040 . set the data list displayed.1'" Sets the data list viewed to the information located at port 2.11 or higher) 167 . it results in a forward sorted list. TPDesign4 (v2. When used on a reverse sorted list. ^LVL Data list. it results in a reverse sort.7'" Displays the data list according to the view definitions located at address 1 and filters and reverse sorts the list.

^LVM Move. display a new position.. "'^LVS-3.1'" Sets the column sort order to column 5 first.<index>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • index = the row number in sequential order.<column>. then column 2 and then column 1.<column>.5. Syntax: "'^LVC-<view address>.1'" Sets the column display order to column 5 first. "'^LVP-5.11 or higher) .) ^LVP Set position. "'^LVM-2.<column>... sets the table column each view column displays.. ^LVC Column display order.5.<column>.3'" Sets the display position starting at the third row and displays it according to the view definitions located at address 5. numbering starts at 1 Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Syntax: "'^LVS-<view address>.Working With List Box Buttons Command Structure List View (Cont. The data list is displayed according to the view definitions located at address 3..numeric display shift Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Update must be called for changes to take effect. ^LVS Sort. display a new position. then column 2 and then column 1.<offset>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • offset = + / .'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • column = the starting column number Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'^LVC-3. sets column order for sorting. Syntax: "'^LVM-<view address>.. The data list is displayed according to the view definitions located at address 3.2. 168 TPDesign4 (v2. Syntax: "'^LVP-<view address>.2.'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • column = the column number to display Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.-4'" Shifts the display -4 and displays the list according to the view definitions located at address 2.

0.<uniflag>. Note: This must be called after changes to list data. address 1 named "my music" SEND_COMMAND Keypad. filter.Working With List Box Buttons Command Structure List View (Cont. Kissing the Lipless. Chutes Too Narrow.5] { PUSH: { //Deletes any existing data list at address 1 SEND_COMMAND Keypad.0.The Shins.No unicode. Syntax: "'^LVU-<view address>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.1.<column>. this will update the view to any sort. "'^LDN-1.2. "'LVU-3'" Updates the data list and displays it according to the view definitions located at address 3. See Listbox Commands for more information on Listbox commands.) ^LVF Filter. "'^LDA-1.01.my music'" //Specifies column types for the data list at address 1 starting at column 1 SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'^LDD-1'" //Creates new 5-column data list at port 1. or list data changes. ^LVU Update.3'" //Adds rows to the data list at address 1 SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Dynamic List box Table Example The following is an example of a dynamic List Box table as it appears in NetLinx code. Dynamic List Box buttons require the same List Box navigation buttons as static tables do. Setting column to 1 or data to none makes the filtered ordering the same as sorted ordering.0.Smith'" • Filters list based on column 2 such that only those rows whose column 2 contains Smith are displayed. DEFINE_DEVICE Keypad = 11001:1:4 Keypad2 = 11001:2:4 KeypadMusic = 11001:10:4 DEFINE_EVENT BUTTON_EVENT[Keypad. "10.1. Syntax: "'^LVF-<view address>. numbering starts at 1 • search data = the data on which to filter Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.1"'" TPDesign4 (v2. Update must be called for changes to take effect. 0 . • Filter is case sensitive.5.0.11 or higher) 169 .0. sets what column to use and what string to compare.Uses unicode • column = the starting column number. • The data is displayed according to the view definitions located at address 1. "'^LDT-1.<search data>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • uniflag = indicates unicode. 1 . "'LVF-1.0.

0.09. "'^LDA-1.7"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad.03.3"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad.1'" //Set the column of the list on which to base the sort of the data displayed //at view address 2 (in this case column 4 which contains titles) SEND_COMMAND Keypad.0. The 1 indicates forward sort. "'^LVU-2'" } } //Sort the list by title instead of Track number BUTTON_EVENT[Keypad. Chutes Too Narrow. Fighting in a Sack.3] 170 TPDesign4 (v2.The Shins.6] { PUSH: { //Set the sort order for view address 2. Pink Bullets. Chutes Too Narrow. "'^LVS-2.The Shins. "'^LVC-2. Chutes Too Narrow.4'" //Updates the view at address 2 SEND_COMMAND Keypad.8"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad.4'" //Updates the view at address 2 SEND_COMMAND Keypad.0.06.0.The Shins. "'^LDA-1. "'^LDA-1. Chutes Too Narrow. Chutes Too Narrow. Chutes Too Narrow.The Shins. SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Young Pilgrim.6"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'^LDA-1. "'^LVU-2'" } } //Sort the list by Track number instead of title BUTTON_EVENT[Keypad.The Shins. "'^LVO-2. "10.Working With List Box Buttons SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "10. "'^LDA-1.07. Chutes Too Narrow. Those to Come.08.5"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "10.The Shins.02. "10.The Shins.1'" //Set the column of the list on which to base the sort of the data displayed //at view address 2 (in this case column 1 which contains track numbers) SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "10. "'^LDA-1. "'^LVO-2.1'" //Updates the view at address 2 SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'^LDA-1. Turn a Square.7] { PUSH: { //Set the sort order for view address 2.0.10"'" //Sets the column number (4) to display in the view with address 2 SEND_COMMAND Keypad.0. So Says I. "'^LDA-1. The 1 indicates forward sort. "10. "'^LDA-1. "10.2"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Saint Simon. "'^LVU-2'" } } BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic.0.The Shins. "Mine's Not a High Horse". Chutes Too Narrow.9"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad.0. SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Chutes Too Narrow. "'^LVS-2.0.The Shins.1] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. Gone for Good.05.2] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. "10. "10.4"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad.10.11 or higher) .04.

FIG. Enter the Table Port and Table Address of the dynamic List Table.CHANNEL). In the Design View window.0. 178 Attach Table To List Box dialog 3.[Track '. you are ready to associate the List Data Table to the List Box Button. "'^TXT-1.11 or higher) 171 . 1. click inside either the List Table Port or the List Table Address fields.4] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic.Working With List Box Buttons BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. It is this association that allows the data in the List Data to be displayed on the List Box Button.5] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. select the List Box Button that you want to associate with a List Data Table. 178). Click this button to access the Attach Table To List Box dialog (FIG. 4.10] { PUSH: { SEND_COMMAND Keypad2.6] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. 2. In the General tab of the Properties Window..9] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. Clicking inside these fields enables the browse (. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. TPDesign4 (v2.INPUT. and defined List Data in your NetLinx Code (with Data List Commands).8] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic..']'" Attaching a Dynamic List Data Table to a List Box Button Once you have created a List Box Button.itoa(BUTTON.7] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic.) button.

showing the current Port/Address assignments for the selected table.11 or higher) . You can use the Power Assign feature in the Edit List Tables dialog to quickly assign Port and Channel information for multiple columns in the List Data Table. or click the toolbar button). 172 TPDesign4 (v2. FIG.Working With List Box Buttons Changing Port and Address Assignments for a List Data Table 1. 164). Select a List Data Table (in the Tables list). 3. 173 on page 159). via the List Table Power Assign dialog. Click OK to save the changes and close this dialog. 5. Enter the new Port and Address assignments for this List Data Table in the Table Port and Table Address fields at the bottom of this dialog. This opens the Change/Port Addr dialog (FIG. Open the Edit List Tables dialog (FIG. via Panel > Edit List Tables. Click the Port/Addr command button. 2. 179 Change/Port Addr dialog 4.

Working With List Box Buttons TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 173 .

Working With List Box Buttons 174 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .

and the button type is general. and the Properties window reflects the properties of the newly selected button. The Properties Window contains three tabs: General. Note that the title bar of the Properties Control window indicates which element of the workspace is currently selected. TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog. Also note that the button name and type are displayed in the text box above the tabs (in the example below. Select View > Properties (or click the toolbar button) to display the Properties Window. the value is copied to the new location. and drag it to another field. TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Properties Working With Properties Overview The Properties Window is typically located on the right side of the screen (although you may move it anywhere you like) and is used to view/edit page. the selected button is named "pause". General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms. When you release the mouse button. Selecting a button from this list is the same as selecting it in a Design View window: the edit focus shifts to the selected button. The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself). Programming and States (FIG. the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value. FIG. and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field.11 or higher) 175 . If one or more buttons are selected in the Workspace. 180 Properties Window Drag and Drop Support Properties from the General tab and states from the States tab can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page. or the Page itself). popup page and button properties. Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column. and to view/edit the states information associated with each element in your project. the title bar of the Properties Control window indicates the number of buttons selected. Click the down arrow next to this field to view a list of all buttons on the active page. and the original value is left unchanged. With an item selected. 180).

181). When you have multiple buttons selected. you will see a message that states that the value was only applied to those buttons for which it was valid. Also note that while you have multiple buttons selected. and the Apply To All button is not depressed (FIG. the Prev or Next buttons will activate on the Properties Control window. The button represented in the Properties Control window is the one with edit focus. Use the Prev and Next buttons to cycle through the selected buttons to view each button's properties in the Properties Control window. 182). If the Apply To All button is not depressed. The only values that will display in the grid while the Apply To All button is depressed are those values that are common among all selected items. You may also notice that one or more (if not all) of the property values in the grid are blank. 182 Prev and Next buttons These buttons allow you to quickly edit the selected buttons individually. In the event that a value is appropriate for one (or more) buttons but inappropriate for others. Use the Prev and Next buttons to cycle through the selected buttons to view each button's properties in the Properties Control window. All modifications are always done on the button with the edit focus.Working With Properties Using the Apply To All option The Apply To All button is located at the bottom of the Properties Window (FIG. provided that the change can be applied to them all. use the All States option in the States tab (located directly above the other listed states for the selected button). 181 Apply To All button Use the Apply to All option to set button properties to edit multiple buttons simultaneously. and you select more than one button to act on. located at the bottom of the Properties Control window (next to the Apply to All button) are activated only when more than one button is selected on a page. To make changes that affect all states on a button at once. but not on multiple states for a single button. only one of them has the edit focus at any given time. Using the Prev and Next buttons The Prev and Next buttons. the Prev or Next buttons are unavailable and every selected button has the edit focus. select the states that you want to edit and they will appear listed in the States tab of the Properties Control window. To make state-oriented changes across multiple states. Hold down the Shift key and click to select multiple buttons. If the Apply To All button is depressed and you select more than one button to act on. The button represented in the Properties Control window is the one with edit focus. Typing in or changing a value in any property box will immediately affect all selected buttons. FIG. FIG. All modifications are always on the button with the edit focus. 176 TPDesign4 (v2. This Apply To All button works on multiple button selections. only one of them has the edit focus at any given time.11 or higher) .

select another Button. Click on a Button or Page in a Design View window to take a snapshot of the properties and values of the Button. click the checkboxes to select the Properties of the selected Button.11 or higher) 177 . 185). See Saving a Properties Set. This action invokes the Property Painter dialog (also accessible via the View menu). FIG. 5. 184 Property Painter dialog 3. Page or Popup Page that you want to grab. Select Grab Properties Tool from the Edit menu. The set of selected properties (but not their values) may be named and saved for later use by entering a name in the Property Set text box. Page or Popup Page in the Design View. 184). The following example shows the Property Painter dialog invoked as a result of selecting a General-type button (FIG. 183). Page or Popup Page: 1. With the Selection tool (FIG.Working With Properties Working With The Property Painter The Grab Properties and Paint Properties tools work together with the Property Painter dialog to allow you to grab (copy) the properties of a selected Button. Page or Popup Page that is clicked on. or click the toolbar button to activate the Grab Properties tool (FIG. the Design View context menu. 4. 185 Selection Tool TPDesign4 (v2. In the Property Painter dialog. Page or Popup Page. FIG. Click Grab Selected to grab (copy) the selected Properties. and paint (copy) them onto another Button. 183 Grab Properties Tool 2. FIG.

Click Paint Selected to apply the properties that were "grabbed" from the first item to the selected item(s) (FIG. FIG.11 or higher) . 186 Property Painter dialog Saving a Properties Set Use the Property Set feature in the Property Painter dialog to save a set of Properties (but not their values) that can be recalled later.Working With Properties Hold the Shift key and left-click to apply the properties to multiple selected Buttons. 6. 178 TPDesign4 (v2. 186).

default = No). click Border Style. Default = high-color (16-bit) This setting should match that of the host PC. Column 2 on the List Box Button will display column 4 from the List Data Table. This option is not available for buttons on a popup page. This property is available for Multi-State buttons only. you could enter (without quotes) "3 4 5 2 1" to populate the List Box Button as follows: Column 1 on the List Box Button will display column 3 from the List Data Table. This property is available for Multi-State buttons only. This value is in 1/100th second increments (default = 2). Animate Time Up The time intervals between states as the button animates from the Off to the On state. default = No).11 or higher) 179 . from left to right. Animate Time Down The timer intervals between states as the button animates from the On to the Off state. This value is in 1/100th second increments (default = 2).Working With Properties General Properties All General properties (including Page. using a List Data Table that contains 5 columns. and they all can all be assigned to both popup pages and buttons. and select the desired style from the drop-down list There are several types of border styles to choose from. Auto-repeat causes the button to constantly cycle through its states (Yes/No. FIG. This property is available for Multi-State buttons only. Border Style To change the Border Style for the selected button. Column Display Order Enter a string of space-delimited integers to specify the order in which the columns in the List Data Table are displayed in the List Box button. 187 Column Display Order For example. Popup Page and Button properties) are listed below. Column 3 on the List Box Button will display column 5 from the List Data Table. Color Depth Select the color depth to be applied to the button. These properties are editable via the General tab of the Properties Window: Above Popups This option allows you the selected button(s) on a Main page to always remain on top of any popup pages (Yes/No. TPDesign4 (v2. Auto-Repeat Select wether to apply auto-repeat to the button. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. The options are high-color (16-bit) or true color (24-bit).

. To add a group. For example. default = No).. 180 TPDesign4 (v2. Column 5 on the List Box Button will display column 1 from the List Data Table. with a space between each number) "3 1 5".. Disabled Indicates how the selected button will be rendered.. This property is available for Popup Pages only.) button to open the Enter Text dialog. the button will be rendered by the panel in a subdued state (default = No). where you can type the description. Compression Select wether to compress the image on the button (Yes/No.) button to open the Enter Text dialog. This property is enabled only for List Box Buttons. where you can type the description. Cursor Name Select the desired visual style for the joystick cursor.Working With Properties Column 4 on the List Box Button will display column 2 from the List Data Table. type any value in the Group field. One or more columns can be specified. and a List Table Address and Port is assigned. simply drag the desired popup pages into the desired group folder. If however the user wishes the table data to be sorted by column 3. Click the browse (. then column 1. Column Sort Order Specifies the column sort order for the list table data before populating the list box control. To place a popup page in a particular popup group. This property is enabled only for List Box Buttons. Group Use this field to add the selected Popup Page to a specific Popup Page Group. and a List Table Address and Port is assigned. when a List Data Table is assigned. This button property is available for Joystick buttons only. The value is a space delimited string of integers representing columns in the List Data Table. This button property is available for Text Input buttons only. Click the down arrow to select from the list of available cursor types. and finally column 5. Cursor Color Specify a color for the Joystick cursor. This button property is available for Joystick buttons only. Description Use this text field to enter a general or functional description for this button.) button to select a color from the Colors dialog. This will create a corresponding folder under the Popup Pages folder in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). the value would be "1". Click the browse (. If the button is set as Disabled (select Yes from the drop-down).. Multiple column sorting is useful when a column contains duplicates or more than one cell is empty.. if the user wishes to sort the table based on column 1. when a List Data Table is assigned. Display Type Click to select the display type to be invoked by this Text Input button (single line or multiple lines). Click the browse (.11 or higher) . This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. The default is single line. the value would be (without quotes.

to set the input as required or optional. to be invoked when the popup is closed (hidden). \A is displayed as just A. This property is available for Popup Pages only. The default is 0 (the left edge of the page). or Hide Effect Y Pos. Note that if you select the button and manually resize it on the page. You can edit these fields to apply specific dimension info for the button. A back-slash ('\') causes the character that follows to be displayed as the literal character. This button property is available for Text Input buttons only. The Height rows indicate the vertical dimensions of the selected button. For example. option may become available: This property is available for Popup Pages only. including spaces and symbols. in pixels. the Hide Effect X/Y Pos (position) fields allow you to specify the starting point on the page for the selected Slide Hide Effect. to specify a range of characters / numbers for each field. you can set the Y position for the start of the hide effect (range = 0 . If the button is set as Hidden (select Yes from the drop-down). TPDesign4 (v2.9999). Hide Effect Time This property allows you to specify the total amount of time it will take to execute the selected Hide effect. to create multiple logical fields that act as a single field. you can set the X position for the start of the hide effect (range = 0 .Working With Properties Height Size values. suggest a proper format with fixed characters. the button will disappear when transferred to the panel (default = No). characters). Input Mask This field allows you apply a mask to user input on the panel. Hide Effect This property allows you to apply a transition effect to the popup page. Hidden Indicates wether or not the selected button is displayed on the panel. Hide Effect X/Y Pos Measured in pixels. the Hide Effect X Pos. enter any character other than those shown in the topics above. depending on the page design and graphics. measured in 1/10th-second increments. An input mask allows you to force the user to enter the correct type of characters (numbers vs. To define a literal. This property is available for Popup Pages only. Use this option to synchronize your popup page transition effects. Depending on the Slide Hide Effect selected. you may decide to start the slide at some other point than the absolute left edge of the page. The default setting is 0 (top edge of the page). If you have selected a top or bottom slide effect (including slide/fade effects). If you have selected a left or right slide effect (including slide/fade effects).11 or higher) 181 . and/or fill the field from the right or the left. In some cases. these values constantly update to indicate the current dimensions. to change or force character case.9999).

List Column An integer value representing the total number of columns in the List Box button. one subordinate button is created automatically. There are two ways to define this property: One is to edit the property directly by typing the Table Port number of a data table (static or dynamic). At creation. and the minimum is 1. List Column Padding An integer value indicating the number of pixels between columns of buttons. Note that if you select the button and manually move it around on the page. The other way is to press the Browse button (click inside this field to enable). The options in this dialog allow you to select a static table that has already been created for in the project. 182 TPDesign4 (v2. A list box column contains one or more subordinate buttons of the same width. The maximum number of columns that can be set/created is 10. The Left and Top rows indicate the position of the selected button. The number of subordinate buttons in a column depends on the number of rows defined for the list box. In unmanaged mode this property is visible (but still read-only) for the unmanaged subordinate buttons. This property is present only when the List Box is in Managed Mode. You may alternatively enter the port/address manually (in the Table Port and Table Address text fields in the dialog). This dialog will populate both the "List Table Port" and "List Table Address" properties when finished. This way you can keep track of which row the button is identified with. List Display A string formatted as a space-delimited list of table column numbers in a List Box Button that the columns of the List Data Table are assigned to. to open the Attach Table To List Box dialog. The width of the first column is determined at creation by the width of the list box control. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. List Table Port An integer value representing the port of the List Data Table that the List Box button is attached to. in pixels. relative to the upper-left corner of the Design View window. these values constantly update to indicate the button's current position. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. This property is available for List Box buttons only. You can edit these fields to apply specific positioning info for the button.11 or higher) . This property is read-only and cannot be edited. justified vertically.Working With Properties Left Position values. and only when a List Table Port is assigned.

The same goes for scrolling up. therefore scrolling would go no further than the beginning or end of the table data.11 or higher) 183 . It is used so that the List Box Container can be selected via the Design View. The options in this dialog allow you to select a static table that has already been created for in the project. When set to no. to open the Attach Table To List Box Dialog. You may alternatively enter the port/address manually (in the Table Port and Table Address text fields in the dialog). List Table Wrap specifies that the list box will "wrap around" and start at the beginning again if the user presses the next page button when the list is at the end of the table data. This property is enabled only when a List Table Address and Port are assigned. List Offset Enabled A flag (yes/no) indicating whether an offset of five pixels is applied to the List Box Container all the way around the subordinate buttons of the list box (default = on). the next page of data will show up in the list box. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. There are two ways to define this property: One is to edit the property directly by typing the Table Address number of a data table (static or dynamic). When set to "yes". In this way.Working With Properties List Table Address An integer value representing the address of the List Data Table that the List Box button is attached to. If set to "no" (default setting). List Filter Column This property sets the column order for filtering data. This property is present only when the List Box button is in Managed Mode. the list becomes cyclical. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. beginning and end limits are present for the list box. List Managed This display-only field indicates wether the selected List Box Button is in Managed or Unmanaged mode. If the user presses the scroll bar down button. TPDesign4 (v2. the subordinate buttons will completely cover the list box container (unless List Row Padding and/or List Column Padding is set to a value greater than 0). Scrolling past the beginning would wrap back around to the end of the list. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. This dialog will populate both the "List Table Port" and "List Table Address" properties when finished. A page of table data is simply how much of the table data that can fit on the list box. The other way is to press the Browse button (click inside this field to enable). This button property is available for List Box buttons only. List Table Wrap This property specifies a behavior for a list box when attached to two or more pages of table data.

Marquee state properties are column-based properties. one subordinate button is created automatically. So even though a column's state has marquee enabled. List Selectable This property is a value representing the current selection type: single or multi. 184 TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Properties List Preferred Row An integer value designating a particular row in the list box as the preferred row. by enabling preferred row all marquee state properties (Marquee Direction and Marquee Repeat) defined for each column are now exclusive to the preferred row. Zero "0" disables the preferred row functionality. it can have a different height specification than all the other rows through the Preferred Row Height property. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. and the minimum is 1. This property is present only when the List Box button is in Managed Mode.e. This is useful for Panels like the R4 where the screen is very small. The List Preferred Row value has the range from 0 to Row Count (default = 0). List Row An integer value representing the total number of rows in the List Box button. the height of all the buttons) excluding the preferred row. If a row is specified (greater than 0) then the row has some special properties. First. In unmanaged mode this property is visible (but still read-only) for the unmanaged subordinate buttons. This property is read-only and cannot be edited. Second. The height of the first row is determined at creation by the width of the list box control. justified horizontally. This button property is available for List Box buttons in Managed Mode only. List Row Padding An integer value indicating the number of pixels between rows of buttons. only the cell in the preferred row implements the marquee feature on the panel. The maximum number of rows that can be set/created is 50. The number of subordinate buttons in a row depends on the number of columns defined for the list box. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. This property is present only when the List Box is in Managed Mode.11 or higher) . List Row Height An integer value indicating the height (in pixels) of all the rows in the list box (i. The height of one row bigger than the rest is needed for easy thumb access via the touch screen. This button property is available for List Box Container buttons only. A list box row contains one or more subordinate buttons of the same height. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. and the Preferred Row is greater than zero "0". Only the preferred row can have a separate height specification. All other rows are specified the same height. At creation. List Preferred Row Height An integer value indicating the height of the preferred row in the list box. This way you can keep track of which row the button is identified with.

Password Protection This option allows you to apply password protection to the selected button(s). TPDesign4 (v2. This button property is available for Text Input buttons only. use this drop-down list to select which of four possible passwords to apply to the selection (none. Button/Popup 2. Modal This setting (Yes/No) controls the user's ability to press a button outside the boundaries of the popup page when the popup page is visible. separated by a colon (i. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. Password The password supplied by the designer.. Max Text Length Use this field to specify the maximum number of characters allowed to be entered via this button.) to open the Button Page Flip Actions dialog. password 1. default = No). The range is 0-2000 (default = 0). password 3.. and you cannot apply the Job name (set in the New Project Wizard) to a page. You must use a unique name for each button. Button/Popup 3 etc. This button property is available for Text Input buttons only. See the Generated Button Names section on page 99 for details. You can set up to four passwords per panel. Page Flip Use this option to assign a page flip (type and target page) to the selected button(s). Default = 5900. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only.. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only.Working With Properties Lock Button Name This option controls how the name of the selected button is managed by the program (Yes/No. page and popup page. Remote Port The port to be used on the PC whose desktop is to be displayed. "Button 2 : multi-state general". Password Character Type a single character to be used as the password to access this Text Input button on the panel. Remote Host The IP or DNS resolvable address of the PC whose desktop is to be displayed. where you can type the new name. click Name in the Properties Control Window (General tab) to activate the text field. This property is available for Popup Pages only. by default the buttons are automatically given a sequential two-part name composed of the button number (relative to the number of buttons already created in the Project) and button type. "Button 1 : general". Click the browse button (. This password must match the password entered into the PC remote desktop server. S See the Page Flips section on page 107 for details. etc). or password 4). password 2. Name To give the button a specific name other than the default Button/Popup 1.11 or higher) 185 . When new buttons are created.e.

If the state count is increased. Scale To Fit Select wether to automatically scale the image to fit the button (Yes/No. depending on the page design and graphics. the popup page will always appear at the position established during popup page design each time it is displayed. State Count This field indicates the number of states currently associated with the selected button. measured in 1/10th-second increments. Depending on the Slide Show Effect selected. This property is available for Popup Pages only. scaling is disabled. This property is available for Popup Pages only. Show Effect X/Y Pos Measured in pixels. This property is available for Bargraph buttons only. to be invoked when the popup is opened (shown).. To change the state count for the selected button. the Show Effect X/Y Pos (position) fields allow you to specify the starting point on the page for the selected Slide Show Effect. you may decide to start the slide at some other point than the absolute left edge of the page. If the count is decreased. you can set the X position for the start of the slide transition effect (range = 0 . click inside the text field and enter the desired number. This property is available for Multi-State (General and Bargraph) buttons only. This might be desirable if the popup page contains a button which provides the end user with the ability to move the popup page at will. The default is 0 (the left edge of the page). or Show Effect Y Pos.9999). option may become available: This property is available for Popup Pages only. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. This property is available for Popup Pages only. This feature allows the state count to be changed via Edit > Find & Replace and with the Paint Properties tool. If you have selected a top or bottom slide effect. Show Effect Time This property allows you to specify the total amount of time it will take to execute the Fade Hide effect.. new states are added to the end of the set as a duplicate of the last existing state. Use this option to synchronize your popup page transition effects. Click the browse button (. The default setting is 0 (top edge of the page).9999). you can set the Y position for the start of the slide transition effect (range = 0 . 186 TPDesign4 (v2. By default.11 or higher) . This property is available for Bargraph buttons only. If you have selected a left or right slide effect. In some cases. Slider Color Select a color to apply to the bargraph slider. default = No).) to open the Colors dialog.Working With Properties Reset Pos. On Show If this option is turned on. Slider Name Select the desired visual style for the bargraph slider from the list of Slider types. either the Show Effect X Pos. states are removed from the end of the set. Show Effect This property allows you to apply a transition effect to the popup page.

This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. Top Left/Top . Active Touch requires total transparency on the button in order to work. these values constantly update to indicate the button's current position. by using transparencies you could create a button that appears to be round (although the actual shape of the button is rectangular). in terms of the shape and border style used. TPDesign4 (v2. TakeNote Host Enter the IP or DNS resolvable address of the PC whose desktop is to be displayed on this TakeNote button. TakeNote Port Enter the port to be used on the PC whose desktop is to be displayed on this TakeNote button (default = 1541). If there is no other button underneath the pass through button.) to select an image to use as the Touch Map image. Similarly. in 1/10th second increments. The Left and Top rows indicate the position of the selected button. Touch style describes the way buttons behave when pressed. Popup Page Timeout specifies how long a popup page will remain open and active without a button press (default = 0). To make a button totally transparent. in pixels. Touch Style This selection drop-down allows you to set a "touch style" for the selected button(s). Bounding box: This touch style forces the panel to respond to a press anywhere within the rectangular boundaries of the button (regardless of transparencies or border styles). Timeout This property allows you to specify the Popup Page Timeout. if a transparent button has a visible border but no icon. only the border will respond to a press.. via the Select Resource dialog. You can edit these fields to apply specific positioning info for the button. set the Overall Opacity (state) setting to 0. Touching the transparent areas of the button does not active the button. Touch Map Click the browse button (. Areas of the button that are totally transparent will not respond to a press. in which case you may not the button to respond if the user presses outside of the circular border. Active Touch will not work. and only if the Value Direction is set to Touch Map. only the icon would respond to a press. This button property is available for TakeNote buttons only. This button property is available for Multi-State Bargraph buttons only. Pass through: This style allows the user to press "through" one button to press another button underneath. For example.Working With Properties TakeNote Enabled Select wether to enable TakeNote functionality on the selected Computer Control button (Yes/No.11 or higher) 187 . Note that if you select the button and manually move it around on the page. if you created a totally transparent button with no border and an icon.. relative to the upper-left corner of the Design View window. This property is available for Popup Pages only. Active touch: This touch style limits the active touch area to the visible area of the button. This button property is available for TakeNote buttons only. the user simply presses the page (with no resulting action). default = No).Position values. If Overall Opacity is set to any other value (for partial transparency). For example.

Note that if you select the button and manually resize it on the page. these values constantly update to indicate the current dimensions. You can edit this field to apply specific dimension info for the button.11 or higher) . For Multi State Bargraph buttons. This property indicates the horizontal width in pixels of every button in the column. or Touch Map.Working With Properties Type The Type (button type) defaults to the button type that was set when the button was created. click Type in the Properties Control Window (General tab) to activate the button type drop-down menu. Value Direction Click the down arrow to select the orientation of the bargraph. containing a list of all available button types. the options are Vertical. the options are Vertical or Horizontal. 188 TPDesign4 (v2. Horizontal. This property is available for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons only. Width Size value. For non-multi state Bargraph buttons. To change a selected button's type.

) to open the Enter Text dialog.the button will change states (Off to On) on a Push/Release to indicate a channel event inverted channel . blink. Channel Port Select or enter the port to which the selected button's channel code will be applied. These codes cannot be re-assigned to other pages or buttons in the panel project.the button will always display the On state (and will not indicate a Push/Release) momentary . momentary. you can click on Channel Code to open the Basic Codes options. This button property is available for Joystick buttons only. Feedback Select the type of feedback to associate with this button (channel. Address Port Select or enter the port to which the selected button's address code will be associated. These properties are editable via the Programming tab of the Properties Window: Address Code Select or enter the address code sent to the master on the selected port. Enter the command output and click OK (or Cancel to exit without saving). The NXP-PLV (PosiTrack Video Touch Panel) uses a set of reserved channel and level codes that are reserved for hardware functionality.the button will change states. only while the button is being pressed..11 or higher) 189 .the button will always display the Off state (and will not indicate a Push/Release) channel . and only if a Level Code has been assigned. If the Channel Port is set to 0 = Setup Port.the button will change states (On to Off) on a Push/Release to indicate a channel event always on . Popup Page and Button properties) are listed below. Click the '+' sign beside Computer Control. inverted channel. 2. Click the browse button (. then click on Advanced Codes to access the advanced codes menu. Command Port Select or enter the port to which the command string output will be applied.the button will "blink" (switch between On and Off states) on a Push/Release Level Aux This (read-only) field indicates the auxiliary level sent to the Master on the selected port. The combination of Address Port and Address Code must be unique. blink . none . The combination of Channel Port and Channel Code must be unique. or none). to expand the Advanced Codes menu to show the available functions.Working With Properties Programing Properties All Programming properties (including Page. TPDesign4 (v2.. Channel Code Select or enter the channel code sent to the master on the selected port. 1. Command Output Specify the command string sent to the master on button push. always on.

Select Auto-Assign to automatically assign a level code to this button. this value determines the level value that will be recalled by this button. 190 TPDesign4 (v2. this value determines the amount of adjustment relative to the current level resulting from this button. Range Aux Inverted If set to Yes. the user can hold the button down for one second to cause the level to raise or lower repeatedly (according to the specified Level Control Value) without having to press the button each time. the user can touch anywhere inside the joystick button and move the level (according to the Range Drag Increment setting). Level Control Type These options allow General buttons to directly control a level without the need for NetLinx code. Drag: This option creates an active bargraph or joystick button that responds to a relative touch distance on the button after the initial touch. if this value is set to 1000. Relative or None). Select 0 (Setup port) or 1 as the level port for this button.Working With Properties Level Code Select or enter the level code sent to the Master on the selected port (none. When set to Drag. For relative level control. Drag Centering: This option creates an active drag bargraph or joystick button that returns to it's center position when released. Level Control Repeat Time This value determines the repeat time (in 1/1000th-second increments) for Relative level control. this value can be entered as a positive integer (to raise the relative level setting) or a negative integer (to lower the relative level setting). Select the desired level function: Display Only: This option creates a bargraph or joystick button that only displays level information (but cannot be used to control levels). These codes cannot be re-assigned to other pages or buttons in the panel project. Relative: The button increments or decrements the current level value by a fixed amount. 1. only the Level Aux range is inverted (default = No). 2 or auto-assign). For example. The NXP-PLV (PosiTrack Video Touch Panel) uses a set of reserved channel and level codes that are reserved for hardware functionality. Select a level control type for the selected button (Absolute. Active: This option creates a bargraph or joystick button for controlling levels according the other button parameters set here.11 or higher) . Level Function This option is only available for Bargraph. Level Control Value For Absolute level control. This button property is available for Joystick buttons only. Level Port Select or enter the port to which the Level Code will be applied. Multi-State Bargraph and Joystick buttons. Absolute: The button acts like a preset and sets the level to the desired value. to allow for glide-point style controls. For Relative level control. Active Centering: This option creates an active bargraph or joystick button that returns to it's center position when released. These options require additional Level Control parameters to be defined.

Working With Properties

Range Drag Increment
This field allows you to specify the amount of change that will be registered by one full drag across the control, to allow for fine/coarse adjustments. This property is available for Bargraph, Multi-State Bargraph and Joystick buttons only, and only if Drag is selected as the Level Function.

Range Low
Set the bottom of the level range (0-255).

Range High
Set the top of the level range (0-255).

Range Inverted
If set to Yes, the range is inverted, so that the top of the level range is 0 and the bottom of the range is 255 on both the X and Y axis (default = No). This button property is available for Bargraph, Multi-State Bargraph and Joystick buttons only.

Range Time Up
Specify the amount of time (in 1/10th seconds) it will take for the bargraph to go from the bottom to the top of the specified range (default = 2). This button property is available for General buttons, if a Level Control Type (other than "none") has been selected. This button property is available for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons, and only if one of a specific set of Level Functions was selected. These are: Active Active Centering Drag Drag Centering It is not applicable if the Level Function property is set to "display only".

Range Time Down
Specify the amount of time (in 1/10th seconds) it will take for the bargraph to go from the top to the bottom of the specified range (default = 2). This button property is available for General buttons, if a Level Control Type (other than "none") has been selected. This button property is available for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons, and only if one of a specific set of Level Functions was selected. These are: Active Active Centering Drag Drag Centering It is not applicable if the Level Function property is set to "display only".

String Output
Specify the output string sent to the master on button push, on the specified String Output Port.

1. Click the browse button (...) to open the Enter Text dialog. 2. Enter the output string and click OK (or Cancel to exit without saving). String Output Port
Select or enter the port to which the String Output will be applied.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

191

Working With Properties

State Properties
All State properties (including Page, Popup Page and Button properties) are listed below. These properties are editable via the States tab of the Properties Window:

Bitmap
To apply an image file as the background image to the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select an image file from among those imported into the project. If pairs of image resources exist that end in *off/*on, *f/*n, *0/*1, *1/*2 (case insensitive), and the first in the pair is applied to the Off state of a General button, the second will be automatically applied to the On state to make it easier to set up images on a General button.

Bitmap Justification
To set or reset the justification setting for the bitmap (on the selected state(s)), click the down-arrow and select an option from the list. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Bitmap X Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the bitmap (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button, for each state. This property is available only if the Bitmap Justification State property has been set to Absolute.

Bitmap Y Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the bitmap (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button, for each state. This property is available only if the Bitmap Justification State property has been set to Absolute.

Border Color
To change the border color for the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Border Name
To change the Border Name for the selected button, click Border Name, and select the desired border from the drop-down list. If a Border Style was specified (in the General tab), then the borders listed here are limited to those contained in the selected Border Style. If no Border Style was specified (none), then all border names are available in the provided list. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Chameleon Image
This field allows you to apply a Chameleon Image to the selected state(s). This property is only available only if the Border Name has been set to None. Chameleon Images can be used to create special effects such animated glow and drop-shadows. Click the browse button (...) to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select an image to apply as a Chameleon Image.

192

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

Draw Order
This field allows you to specify the order in which the elements of a button, page or popup page are drawn. By default, the draw order is: 1) fill, 2) bitmap,3) icon, 4) text, 5) border. Click the browse button (...) to access the State Draw Order dialog to change the draw order. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Fill Color
To change the fill color for the selected state, click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog. For bargraph buttons, the preview image in the State Manager works differently than for the other button types. For bargraph buttons, the on and off states are used to indicate a level setting rather than a push/release. As a result, the button image in the Design View window will indicate the bargraph button as it will appear on the touch panel, but the thumbnails in the State Manager window indicate each state as a separate preview image. For example, the bargraph button shown below uses yellow as the On state fill color, and green as the Off state fill color. In the State Manager window you would see the On state (yellow) and the Off state (green) as individual thumbnails. The Button Preview window works differently for bargraph buttons than for the other button types. Rather than using the Push button to view the different states, click and drag on the slider with your mouse cursor (in the Button Preview window) to preview the feedback. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Font
To change the font used for text on the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Font dialog, where you can select a Font, Style and Size for the button text. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Icon Justification
To set or reset the justification setting for the icon (on the selected state(s)), click the down-arrow and select an option from the list. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Icon Slot
To apply an icon to the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select a slot assignment (icon) to apply.

Icon X Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the icon (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button. This property is only available only if the Icon Justification State property has been set to Absolute.

Icon Y Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the icon (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button. This property is only available only if the Icon Justification State property has been set to Absolute.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

193

Working With Properties

Marquee Direction
This field allows you to specify the direction in which marquee text will move. By default, this property is set to Disabled. Click inside the field to activate the down arrow, to select from the other marquee direction options: The marquee direction options include: Disabled - When this property is set to Disabled, the text on the button will not be treated as marquee text. Scroll left - Text scrolls horizontally to the left. Scroll right - Text scrolls horizontally to the right. Ping-pong - Text "bounces" back and forth horizontally between the left and right boundaries of the button area. Scroll up - Text scrolls vertically upward. Scroll down - Text scrolls vertically downward. Both Marquee Direction and Marquee Repeat are disabled if Word Wrap is set to Yes.

Marquee Repeat
This field allows you to specify whether the marquee text element on a button will appear to repeat the text string once it has moved all the characters beyond the boundaries of the button. The movement of marquee text is specified by the Marquee Direction button state property. By default, this property is set to No. To enable repeat marquee text, click inside the field to activate the down arrow to change to Yes. Both Marquee Direction and Marquee Repeat are disabled if Word Wrap is set to Yes.

Overall Opacity
Use this field to specify the level of opacity for the selected button (0 - 255, where 0 is totally transparent, and 255 is totally opaque). The default is 255. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Scale Bitmap To Fit
This property is available only if the Bitmap selected for this button/state is a dynamic image. Note that this option is available only for Dynamo Dynamic Images (not for Dynamo Resource Images) This option scales the Dynamo Dynamic Image down to fit the container button, popup or page. It will not scale Dynamo Dynamic Images up to fit. To automatically scale the dynamic image (down only) to fit the button, click the down-arrow and select Scale To Fit (default = No). The options available for Scale Bitmap To Fit depend on the panel type associated with your project: No - The Dynamo Resource image will not be scaled at all, and the image will be arbitrarily centered on the container button, popup or page. If the Dynamo Resource image is larger than it's container, the image will be cropped on all sides by equal amounts. This is the default setting. Use the Bitmap Justification State property to position the dynamic image bitmap within the button borders. 2x - This option doubles the size of the Dynamo Resource image. Note that this option is only available for Dynamo Resource Images (not for Dynamo Dynamic Images). See the AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images section on page 6. If the resulting image is larger than it's container, the image will be cropped on all sides by equal amounts. Scale To Fit - This option automatically resizes the Dynamo Dynamic image, maintaining the aspect ratio of the image.

194

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

Sound
To change or apply a new sound file to the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select a sound file (WAV or MP3) from among those imported into the project.

Streaming Source
Enter the URL or IP Address of the server that will provide the video stream. This property is available only if Streaming Video is selected as the Video Fill). Streaming Video is only available as a Video Fill option if the project specifies a touch panel that supports streaming video.

Text
To change or enter the text to be displayed on the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Enter Text dialog, where you can type the new button text. Use the Preview Using Font option to view the text as it will appear in the selected font, style and size (on by default). Unicode characters may be entered via the Enter Text dialog only (not through in-place editing in the States tab of the Properties Control window). When Unicode text is input, the name of the button will not match it's Off state text. Formatting codes can be used in the state text for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons.

Text Color
To change the text color for the selected state, click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in a selected column.

Text Effect
Text effects are graphic effects that can applied to button/page/popup text (for example, the Glow effect applies a neon glow or halo effect to the text on the selected button/state(s). Each text effect is available in several variations ((i.e. Small, Medium, Large or XtraLarge). To apply a text effect to the button text, click the browse button (...) to access the Text Effect sub-menu. This sub-menu presents all available text effects, sorted by type. Click the + symbol next to any effect type in the sub-menu to see all of the variations on that effect. Once you have selected a text effect, use the Text Effect Color field to specify a color for the effect. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Text Effect Color
If you have selected to apply a text effect, use this field to specify the color of the selected effect. Click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Text Justification
To set or reset the justification setting for the button text (on the selected state(s)), click the down-arrow and select an option from the list. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column

Text X Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the text (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button. This property is available only if the Text Justification State property has been set to Absolute).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

195

Working With Properties

Text Y Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the text (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button. This property is available only if the Text Justification State property has been set to Absolute).

Video Cropping
Use this field to specify the number of scan lines to be removed from both the top and bottom of the video signal. For best results, set the video button's aspect ratio to match the video input aspect ratio. This property is only available if the Video Fill State property is set to either Composite Video or Component/RGB Video.

Video Fill
Click the down arrow to select from a drop-down list of video formats that are supported by the touch panel specified in your project. Video-capable Modero panels support Composite video, and Enhanced Modero panels support Composite, Component/RGB and Streaming video formats. If you have specified the NXP-TPI4, click the down-arrow to select from the list of available video slots on the TPI4 (video slot 1,2,3 or 4) to use as the source for this video fill. If you select Streaming Video as the Video Fill, then the Streaming Source state property is made available. Enter the URL or IP Address of the server that will provide the video stream. This property is only available for video-capable panels. See the Video Capabilities for Modero Panels section on page 5 and the Video Capabilities for Enhanced Modero Panels section on page 5 for details.

Video Touch Pass-Thru
Select Yes from the drop-down menu to enable video pass-thru (disabled by default). This property is enabled only if the Video Fill State property has been set to either Composite Video or Component/RGB Video. Video pass-thru allows you to pass touch/control information from a touch input device (touch panel, mouse or keyboard) through a NXP-TPI/4 to a controlled device with video-out capabilities. This feature is also used in conjunction with the MPS (mouse pass-thru) and KPS (keyboard passthru) commands.

Word Wrap
Use this option to enable the wrapping of text strings that are too long to be displayed across the page on one line. Click the down-arrow and select Yes or No from the drop-down list (default = No). Note that both Marquee Direction and Marquee Repeat are disabled if Word Wrap is set to Yes. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Using the All States Option
Use the All States option (in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to apply any changes you make to all states on the selected button. Note that if you have multiple buttons selected (Shift+click to select multiple buttons a page), the All States option only affects states for the button that has Edit Focus. The button with edit focus would be the last one selected, and is indicated by having red-colored square handles (as opposed to the black squares that indicate that a button is selected, but does not currently have edit focus).

196

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

or across the entire Project. Select Select All to close the Find dialog and select every button that meets the criteria. and state count (among many others). FIG. In the Search Criteria table. based on the specified criteria and scope. to select all State-oriented button properties. To select all General button properties. TPDesign4 (v2. If the scope of the search is set to Entire Panel. 188 Find dialog 2. 4. border style. You can specify to search for any General or State button property. Open the Find dialog (FIG. Click the minus symbol (-) next to the General and States headings to collapse the sections.Working With Properties Searching For Button Properties Select Edit > Find (or click the toolbar button) to access the Find dialog. 3. you can perform a search based on button type. Select Find Next to continue the search. You can include any General or State button property as search criteria. Scroll down to view all of the available button properties that can be used as search criteria. select either Entire Panel or Current Page. Click the plus symbol (+) to expand the views. and the first button found that satisfies the search criteria is selected in the Design View. the Select All button is disabled. the Find In Page dialog is compressed to only show the buttons that satisfy the search criteria. name. The program will inform you if no buttons are found that match the search criteria. which allows you to search for any button property value either within the currently open Page. For example. If the scope of the search is set to Current Page. in which case you can use the Find Next button to cycle through the pages that contain buttons whose values match the search criteria. In the Search Scope area. use the Find Next button to search the current page only. or any combination of search criteria.11 or higher) 197 . select the button properties to use as the search criteria. To search for button properties: 1. click in the checkbox next to the States heading. click in the checkbox next to the General heading. 188). When the first instance of the criteria is found. General and State properties are separated into two sections (labeled as General and States).

Working With Properties

When you select a General as well as a State-oriented search criteria, only buttons that match the General criteria, and within that set, the states that match the State criteria will be candidates for the replace operation. For example, if you set the search criteria to include both the Glow-S border style (a General property) and yellow as the Fill Color (a State property), only those buttons with a Border Style of Glow-S are candidates, and within that set of candidates, only those states whose Fill Color is set to yellow satisfy the search criteria.

Searching and Replacing Button Properties
Select Edit > Find & Replace (or click the toolbar button) to access the Find and Replace dialog, which allows you to find (and optionally replace) any button property value with another value of your choosing. You can specify the scope of the search to either the currently open Page only, or across the entire Project (FIG. 189).

FIG. 189 Find and Replace dialog,

To search and replace button properties:

1. Open the Find & Replace dialog (see above). 2. In the Search Criteria table, select the button properties to use as the search criteria. You can include any
General or State button property as search criteria. General and State properties are separated into two sections (labeled as General and States). Scroll down to view all of the available button properties that can be used as search criteria. Click the minus symbol (-) next to the General and States headings to collapse the sections. Click the plus symbol (+) to expand the views. To select all General button properties, click in the checkbox next to the General heading; to select all State-oriented button properties, click in the checkbox next to the States heading.

3. In the Search Scope area, select either Entire Panel or Current Page.
If the scope of the search is set to Entire Panel, the Select All button is disabled, in which case you can use the Find Next button to cycle through the pages that contain buttons whose values match the search criteria. If the scope of the search is set to Current Page, use the Find Next to search the current page only, based on the specified criteria and scope.

4. In the Replace Values table, select the button properties to use as the replace values. The Replace Values
do not necessarily have to match the Search Criteria (although they may). It is also possible to replace multiple values or establish multiple search criteria. For example, to change the Border Style on one or more buttons, select Border Style in the Search Criteria table, then select the particular border style to search for from the drop-down list. Then, select

198

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

Border Style in the Replace Values table, and select the desired replacement border style from the dropdown list. Repeat this process for as many other button properties as needed.

5. When the first instance of the criteria is found, the Find In Page dialog is displayed, listing the buttons
that satisfy the search criteria, and the first button found that satisfies the search criteria is selected in the Design View. Select Find Next to continue the search. Select Replace All to close the Find dialog select every button that meets the criteria. The program informs you of the number of buttons affected by this change. All replace actions support full Undo / Redo capabilities. The program will inform you if no buttons are found that match the search criteria. When you select a General as well as a State-oriented search criteria, only buttons that match the General criteria, and within that set, the states that match the State criteria will be candidates for the replace operation. For example, if you set the search criteria to include both the Glow-S border style (a General property) and yellow as the Fill Color (a State property), only those buttons with a Border Style of Glow-S are candidates, and within that set of candidates, only those states whose Fill Color is set to yellow satisfy the search criteria.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

199

Working With Properties

200

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With States

Working With States
Overview
All G4 panel entities (Pages, popup pages and buttons) have at least one state. Pages and popup pages have only one state. General, Bargraph and Text Input buttons have only two states (on/off). Joystick buttons only use one state (Off). Multi-State General and Multi-State Bargraph buttons can have up to 256 states. States start at 1. The ability to set the State Properties (including border name, border color, fill color, text color, video fill, bitmap, bitmap justification, icon assignment, icon justification, font, text, text justification, word wrap preference and sound) is provided at the state level, via the States tab of the Properties Window.

State Manager Window
The State Manager window allows you to view and modify individual states. The State Manager window supports full Cut, Copy, Delete, Insert, Replace and Paste as well as drag and drop capabilities (FIG. 190).

FIG. 190 State Manager window - showing a multi-state button (6 states)

The State Manager context window (open via right mouse click on any thumbnail in the State Manager) support allows the user to Add single or multiple states, Replace states, Insert single or multiple states and Remove states. For Multi-State General buttons the different states are used to animate a button from Off to On (Range Time Up) and back again to Off (Range Time Down). When the button is turned on it will display all the assigned states from first to last with a specified time interval between each state's display. When the button is turned back off, the states will be displayed in reverse order. The interstate time intervals are user definable in 1/10th second increments. A zero entry will automatically advance / retreat to the ending / beginning state without displaying any intervening states. For Multi-State Bargraph buttons, the level will directly reflect the displayed state. You can set an allowable range within a bargraph that has states. Anything outside of that range will not be represented by a state. For buttons with multiple states, Send Commands can set the state number, provided it is not a level type button.

State Manager Context Menu
Right mouse click on any thumbnail in the State Manager window to open the State Manager context menu, which includes options to add single or multiple states, replace states, insert single or multiple states, and remove states. Use Ctrl+click to select multiple individual button states. Use Shift+click to select a range of states (between two selections). Use Ctrl+A to select all button states.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

201

Working With States

The items in this context menu include: Size - This option sets the size of the button thumbnail views as they appear in the State Manager window. Add States - This option opens the Add States dialog, which allows you to add multiple states to the selected button (up to a total of 255 states). Insert States - This option opens the Insert States dialog, which allows you to insert multiple states to the selected button. This option inserts the specified number of states directly after the selected (highlighted) state. Quick Input - Click to open the Quick Input sub-menu, where you can specify how to use the Quick Input feature (Current Property, Text or Disabled). Use Quick Input to make fast edits to various page and button elements and properties. Cut/Copy/Paste - Use these options to either cut, copy or paste a selected button state to/from clipboard memory. Replace - Use this option to replace the selected button state with the contents of clipboard memory. Delete - Use this option to delete the selected button state(s) from the button. Select All - This option selects all states associated with the selected button. Reverse States - This option reverses the order of states selected in the State Manager window. The selected states do no have to be contiguous. Set As Display State - This option sets the state that is currently being displayed in the Design View as the display state for the button. Image/Text Positioning - This option opens the Text/Image Position dialog, which allows you to specify the position of images and/or text on the selected button state(s). Animation Wizard - This option launches the Animation Wizard. The Animation Wizard guides you through the process of creating an animated button. Tweeners - Click to open the Tweeners sub-menu where you can select from several types of tweeners to use (for animation purposes).

Adding States To a Button
There are three ways in which new states can be added to a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button (the number of states is fixed for the other button types): Duplicating an Existing State on the Button Adding States From the Clipboard Adding States Through Drag-and-Drop

Duplicating an Existing State on the Button
One way to add new states to a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button is by duplicating an existing state on the button:

1. If the new states are to be added to the end of the collection (in the State Manager window), right-click to
open the State Manager Context Menu, and select Add States.

2. If the new states are to be inserted elsewhere in the collection, first select the state prior to which the new
states will be created, then right-click to open the State Manager Context Menu and select Insert States.

3. The Add States dialog (or the Insert States dialog if you selected Insert States) is displayed (FIG. 191).

FIG. 191 Add States dialog & Insert States dialogs

202

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With States

Use these dialogs to specify the number of states to be created, and which existing state to duplicate (which will be highlighted in the State Manager as the state number is changed).

4. When the desired number of states and the state to duplicate have been chosen, press OK and the new
states will be added to the collection in the desired location. Otherwise, press Cancel to exit the dialog without creating any states.

Adding States From the Clipboard
One way to add new states to a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button is by pasting states from the clipboard. Pasting states from the clipboard offers more power and flexibility than single state duplication. States may be copied from another button, page, or popup page, or even from a different panel:

1. First select the button, page, or popup page whose states will be copied. 2. In the State Manager window, select the source states. Hold down the Ctrl key while left-clicking to add
states to the selection. Left-click + Shift to select a range of states.

3. When the source states have been selected, copy them to the clipboard (Ctrl-C). 4. With the source states copied to the clipboard, select the Multi-General or Multi-Bargraph button to
which the states in the clipboard should be copied (in the State Manager). Select the state prior to which the new states will be inserted. To add the copied states to the end of the series, ensure that no states are currently selected in the State Manager (or select the last state in the series).

5. Paste the states from the clipboard (Ctrl-V).
When copying states from another button or from a popup page, the pasted state's border style may be modified to ensure that it is an acceptable style in the button's border family.

Drag & Drop To Add States
A simplified alternative to using the clipboard to add copies of states within the same button is to use drag-anddrop:

1. First select the source state(s). Hold down the Ctrl key while left-clicking to add multiple states to the
selection. Hold down the Shift key while left-clicking to select a range of states.

2. With the source states selected, press and hold the right mouse button while over one of the selected
states. While continuing to press the right mouse button, move the mouse to the location where the states will be copied (FIG. 192).

FIG. 192 Drag & Drop To Add States

If the states are to be added to the end of the collection, drag the source states beyond the last state. If they are to be added elsewhere in the collection, drag the source states either over the state prior to which the new states will be inserted, or over the space between state thumbnails where the new states will be inserted.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

203

Working With States

3. Release the right mouse button and select Insert copy... from the drag-and-drop menu (FIG. 193).

FIG. 193 Drag & Drop To Add States (Insert Copy...selected)

4. The new States are added according to the option selected in the drag-and-drop menu (FIG. 194):

FIG. 194 Drag & Drop To Add States (States copied before State 3)

Setting the Maximum Active State For a Button
You can set the maximum active state on a multi-state button by selecting the last state in a sequence (in the State Manager window) and selecting the States > Set As Max Active State option. The state tagged as the max active state will be the last one included in the multi-state sequence. All states beyond the max active state are ignored when the button is pushed. Note that the states that occur after the max active state in the sequence are displayed with crosshatching across the labels on the thumbnails in the State Manager window, to indicate which states will not be included in the multi-state sequence.

Removing States From A Button
States can be removed from a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button (the number of states is fixed for the other button types) by either deleting them from the collection, or by cutting them to the clipboard. Multi-General or Multi-Bargraph buttons must have at least two states. Actions that would cause the number of states to drop below two are not allowed.

Deleting States 1. Select the states to be deleted. Hold down the Ctrl key while left-clicking to add states to the selection.
Hold down the Shift key while left-clicking to add a range of states to the selection.

2. Delete the selected states by selecting the Edit > Delete, State Manager Context Menu > Delete, or the
Del key.

204

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With States

Cutting States To the Clipboard 1. Select the states to be cut. Hold down the Ctrl key while left-clicking to add states to the selection. Hold
down the Shift key while left-clicking to add a range of states to the selection.

2. Cut the selected states to the clipboard by selecting Edit > Cut, State Manager Context Menu > Cut, or
the Ctrl-X keyboard accelerator.

Changing the Order Of States On A Button
Changing the order of states in a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button can be accomplished either through the clipboard or by drag-and-drop:

Reordering States Through the Clipboard 1. In the State Manager window, select the states to be moved.
Ctrl + click to select multiple states individually. Shift + click to select a range of states.

2. Cut the selected states to the clipboard (Ctrl-X). 3. If the states are to be moved to the end of the collection: a. Ensure that no states are currently selected in the State Manager (click anywhere outside of a state
thumbnail, or press ESC).

b. Then, paste the states from the clipboard by selecting Edit > Paste, State Manager Context Menu >
Paste, or the Ctrl-V keyboard accelerator.

4. If the states are to be moved elsewhere in the collection: a. Left-click to select the state prior to which the new states will be inserted. b. Then insert the states from the clipboard by selecting Edit > Insert, State Manager Context Menu >
Insert, or the Ctrl-V keyboard accelerator.

Reordering States Through Drag-and-Drop
A simplified alternative to using the clipboard to reorder states is to use drag-and-drop.

1. Select the states to be moved.
Ctrl + click to select multiple states individually. Shift + click to select a range of states.

2. Press and hold the left mouse button while over one of the selected states. While continuing to press the
left mouse button, move the mouse to the location where the states will be moved. If the states are to be moved to the end of the collection, drag the states beyond the last state. If they are to be moved elsewhere in the collection, drag the states over the space between state thumbnails where they will be moved.

3. Release the left mouse button (the same operation can also be performed with a right mouse button dragand-drop, selecting "Move…" from the drag-and-drop menu).

Copying/Pasting States From a Page, Popup Page or Button
Copying a State to the Clipboard
Copying a state from a page or popup page is possible by selecting the desired states in the State Manager then either clicking Edit > Copy from the main menu or clicking on the Copy button from the main toolbar. You may also right click and select copy from the context menu.

Pasting a State from the Clipboard
You may paste (by either clicking Edit > Paste from the main menu or by clicking the Paste toolbar button) a previously copied state onto a corresponding state in the State Manager (for the page or popup page).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

205

Working With States

Pasting a state on the panel name in the Panel Navigator (which is for pages or popup pages only), on the folder named Pages (which is for pages only), on the folder named Popup Pages (which is for popup pages only) is not allowed.

Draw Order (Z-Order)
Z-Order, or "Draw Order" refers to the order in which the various visual elements of a Page, Popup Page or Button are drawn on the screen. The element at the top of the Z-Order overlaps all other elements. The top of the Z-Order is like the top layer in a multi-layer drawing. The element at the bottom of the Z-Order is overlapped by all other elements. The bottom of the ZOrder is like the bottom layer in a multi-layer drawing. By default, the state draw order is:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

fill bitmap icon text border

You can change the draw order via the options in the State Draw Order dialog.

Changing the Draw Order for Selected States
Use the State Draw Order dialog to specify the draw order for selected states:

1. Select a button, page or popup page. 2. Click the Browse button (...) in the Draw Order State property to access the State Draw Order dialog
(FIG. 195).

FIG. 195 State Draw Order dialog

3. Select an element in the list, and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to move the element up or
down in the list.

4. Repeat with the other elements in the list to rearrange the order as desired. 5. Click OK to close the dialog.
Note that the new draw order is indicated in the Draw Order state property.

206

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Function Codes

Working With Function Codes
Overview
In terms of designing buttons that interact with and control the various devices on the control system, TPD4 uses a concept that is familiar to TPDesign3 users, but which has a new name in TPD4: Function Codes. Function Codes were known as Channel Codes and Variable Text Codes in TPDesign3. In TPD4, the term Function Codes refers to all three of the code types that can be assigned to buttons: Channel Codes: Displayed in the upper-left corner of the button, the channel codes indicate the port number and the channel code associated with the button. The channel codes represent communication out of the panel to the master controller. Address Codes: Displayed in the lower-right corner of the button, address codes in TPD4 are similar to the Variable Text Codes in TPDesign3. The address code represents communication from the master controller to the panel, causing the panel to do something (i.e. indicate feedback, display a text string, etc). Level Codes: Displayed in the lower-left corner of the button, level codes represent bi-directional communication between the panel and the master controller (i.e. the panel can cause a change in a level setting, and a changed level setting generates feedback on the panel). Each function code is a two-part number separated by a colon: Port Number:Channel/Address/Level Number (depending on which function code you are looking at). In the example below, the button function code assignments all indicate port 1 and channel/level/address 1 (FIG. 196).

FIG. 196 Button Function Code Assignments

The easiest way to handle function codes is to create and finalize your touch panel pages and buttons (with function codes) before generating the supporting Axcess or NetLinx program code. That way, in case you have to change any aspect of the project (i.e. add/remove controlled equipment, test strings, graphics, etc), you can update the function code assignments in TPD4, rather than having to re-write your code. There are several key differences in the way Function Codes work in TPD4 relative to the way they worked in TPDesign3: "Devices" in TPDesign3 are known as "Ports" in TPD4 (the maximum number of available ports in TPD4 is 100). Where there was a maximum number of 255 channel codes per device in TPDesign3, you can assign up to 4000 codes per port in TPD4. Unlike TPDesign3, TPD4 lets you to assign Address and Channel Codes directly to a page.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

207

FIG.11 or higher) . as well as the current state of buttons in the Design View window via the View > Display Function Codes option (or the toolbar button). The maximum number of address codes per port is 4000. If Display Function Codes is enabled. Alternatively.Limitations The maximum number of channel codes per port is 4000. 197). 197 Function Code Map 208 TPDesign4 (v2. they will also be included in printed output.Working With Function Codes Show/Hide Function Codes You can choose to display function codes. The maximum number of ports in TPD4 is 100. Function Codes . press the F7 key to toggle the function codes. Function Code Map Click the Function Maps tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Navigator window) to view the Function Code Map (FIG. The maximum number of level codes per port is 600.

and within Port by Code. You can use the Function Code Map to delete codes as well as drag and drop items from one port to another. they will now appear in the Function Map and can be modified there just like button function codes. motion. Channel or Level port to the setup port ("0") provides a list of predefined actions. A double-click action on the item will open the associated page (or popup page) and place the edit focus on that item. Selecting an item in the tree and then left clicking again will provide an in-place edit of the code value. battery.e. Level Codes). Select Panel > Verify Function Codes to automatically verify the active project's Function Code Map. and fix any problems that are found. In the event that an inappropriate code is selected for a given panel type. TPDesign4 (v2. and/or cradle). 0. These can only be edited via the Programming tab of the Properties Control window. While you can (in-place) edit the Channel. String Outputs and Command Outputs utilized in the panel file. Setting the Address. Channel or Level port to the setup port provides a list of predefined actions.Setup Port Setting the Address. displayed in a hierarchical tree format in the Function Map tab of the Workspace Navigator window. Address Codes.Working With Function Codes The Function Code Map is a representation of the Channel codes. within the primary folder the selected item belongs to (i. Channel Codes. If codes have been assigned to any of the panel's sensors (light. This list is sorted by Port. Therefore. For example. Address codes. you cannot edit String or Command Outputs the same way. ensure that the codes selected apply to your particular panel type.11 or higher) 209 . you cannot drag and drop an Address Code (regardless of the port folder that contains it) into any port folder contained in either the Channel or Level folders. Some of the actions may be hardware dependent. Neither String or Command Outputs support any type of drag and drop operations. that code will be ignored. Address and Level codes via these folders. Level codes.

Select Button > Power Assign (or press F8) to open the Power Assign dialog (FIG. Click Assign. Clear Channels First One powerful feature of Power Assign is the ability to clear the various function codes from the buttons. 2. this may be what you want to have happen. they will show up as used when Power Assign does its' checks. Under Function Code Action.Working With Function Codes Using Power Assign One of the big time-eating factors of creating a touch panel file is correctly setting up the channel. by following the instructions below and utilizing the Begin Assignment At and Ensure Contiguous Code Assignment options. Under Function Code Type. 198). 3. Once you ensure that the desired button or buttons have been selected. select each of the remaining buttons in the set in the order in which you want the channel / address codes to be assigned. 2. The Power Assign feature can operate on a single button. Under Function Code Action. select Channel. select Channel. left-click on the button in the set that should receive the first channel / address code. Click Assign. It is good practice to clear the function codes before any Assign Codes operations. you need to understand the nuances of some of the options involved: 210 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) . To accomplish this. then: 1. To use take full advantage of Power Assign. and any of the buttons in the group you are assigning already have codes assigned. FIG. Assign Codes Next assign new function codes: 1. and other properties that depend on button type. Use Power Assign to streamline this process. select Assign. Under Function Code Type. then by holding down the CTRL key. select Clear. or on a group of selected buttons. Power Assign works only at the button level. Finally. Address or Level. but usually you'll want to clear them before assigning. one can assign channel / address codes to every button in the set with significantly fewer mouse clicks and keystrokes than would otherwise be possible. Address or Level. In some cases. 198 Power Assign dialog One valuable use of this feature is to establish a contiguous range of channel / address codes on a set of buttons. all you need to do is bring up the Power Assign dialog. and does not affect pages or popup pages. 3. address and level function codes for any given button. If you don't clear the codes first.

If you don't check the Begin Assignment At option. if the order is important to you. if you make a mistake. uncheck this option. Next. skipping used channels and continuing on until all available channels have been assigned. Then supply the port and channel code values.11 or higher) 211 . Wrap Within Port ID (Power Assign) Since touch panels support more than one port. Look for a clear range of channel and address codes large enough. address. TPDesign4 (v2. In either of these cases. click Channel under Function Code Type.Working With Function Codes Begin Assignment At (Power Assign) When Begin Assignment At is selected (in the Power Assign dialog) you can specify the starting value of the Port and Function (Channel. which ensures that all channel codes assigned fall within a single port. Ensure Contiguous Code Assignment (Power Assign) This is used when the channel codes have to be in order. Next. Remember that Power Assign processes the function code assignments based on the order in the selection so. This will visually display the channel. or Level) code. just like the standard Auto Assign. check the Wrap Within Port ID option. and click Assign again. If the channels are split across ports. If you don't care what channels are assigned. In these cases. you're not limited to 256 channel and address codes. with no breaks between them. click Address under Function Code Type. the feedback part of the System Call won't work. 2. and level codes (in addition to the currently displayed state) in the corners of the buttons. since the order is important. as in a numeric keypad. Another thing that comes into play with being able to use multiple ports is that you may need to confine certain ranges of channel codes to a single port to take advantage of the DEFINE_MUTUALLY_EXCLUSIVE channel grouping in the code. While initially somewhat confusing. Check Begin Assignment At and Ensure Contiguous Code Assignment. and TPD4 will find the next available free channels. one must ensure that the group of buttons is entirely within a single port. However. the assign operation begins at the first available channel. things like SYSTEM_CALLS are based upon all the channels coming from a single device (port). First. 3. Here's the setup you would use: 1. since you might be using offset math in your code to process the button pushes. use the Functions tab of the Workspace Navigator and click back and forth between the channel and address options. One nice thing about the Power Assign palette is that it retains its settings after use. open the Power Assign dialog. One can also simply undo the action if desired. and click Assign. an immense amount of power is available in the options within the floating Power Assign dialog. The Begin Assignment At function is particularly useful for setting up things like numeric keypads. In this case the values will be subject to whether or not you've set the Begin Assignment At checkbox. Address. make sure to create the selection using CTRL-Select. it's easy to click Clear Codes and hit the assign button again. Since MUTUALLY EXCLUSIVE works on a particular port. where you need the channel codes to begin at a specific value. which is handy when you need both the channel and address codes to have the same numeric values. and make a note of the start channel. You can visually verify that the desired action was accomplished by ensuring that the Display Function & State Overlay option is selected from the View menu. use CTRL-select to select the buttons in the order you want to assign the channels. Since the selection is retained after any operation.

11 or higher) .Working With Function Codes 212 TPDesign4 (v2.

In most cases. transparencies (popup pages and buttons). or a custom palette file previously saved from within the application. and buttons). The Colors dialog supports three ways to select colors from the RGB color palette: 1. Additionally. Palettes are saved as part of the panel file. plus Hue. you might see some slight variation in some colors if you switch from the RGB Color palette to Palette Index. TPD4 supports the importing of either a JASC® formatted palette file. or by dragging the cursor around the palette. and text (pages. Click to select an existing page. FIG. then click More Colors. There are several ways to open the Colors dialog: When setting new button parameters. popup pages and buttons). 199 Colors dialog . which allows you to specify RGB (Red. popup pages. click on the Border Color. and click on Fill Color in the States tab of the Properties Control Window. The RGB palette offers millions of possible colors (FIG. Because the RGB Color palette supports more colors than the Palette Index.RGB Color TPDesign4 (v2. any variation that occurs in the translation is extremely subtle. popup page or button. Brightness and Opacity) values numerically. TPD4 also allows you to save or load custom palettes. Blue and Green) values.Working With Colors and Palettes Working With Colors and Palettes Working With Colors A key feature of TPD4 is it's ability to utilize the full 32-bit RGB color palette. Color assignments are made through the Colors dialog. Every color element that is not assigned either directly via an RGBA selection or the named color table will reference this palette and be affected by any changes made to it. since TPD4 tries to match the color exactly. The RGB palette offers millions of possible colors that can be applied to fills (pages.11 or higher) 213 . Saturation. Brightness and Opacity. RGB Color: a full-feature RGB palette that allows you specify RGB (plus Hue. 199). a Microsoft® formatted palette file. Saturation. Fill Color or Text Color toolbar icons to open the base palette.

Color Name 214 TPDesign4 (v2. FIG. These Base 88 colors are identical to those provided in previous versions of TPDesign3. Palette Index: a default palette that provides the Base 88 colors (which the can be modified if desired). and include the transparent color in position 255 (FIG. 201).Working With Colors and Palettes 2.11 or higher) . 200). 200 Colors dialog .Palette Index 3. FIG. The Palette Index offers a maximum of 255 colors (FIG. 201 Colors dialog . Color Name: a named color selection dialog based on the Base 88 color scheme.

Color Schemes allow you to apply different color schemes to an entire template (in G4 PanelBuilder). this can cause color shifting on the button. Creating New Palette Entries 1. FIG. you could create a single template file with four different color palettes that would allow you to use the same template to quickly produce four different variations on the design . the pasted button will use the palette that is currently active in the project that the button is copied into (as opposed to the palette that was used to create the button).PAL files that can then be imported/exported for use in other projects.one color scheme for each season. custom palettes cannot be reopened in another graphics package. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG.11 or higher) 215 . Working With Palettes TPD4 supports creating and saving multiple custom color palettes within a project. Use the options in the Edit Palettes dialog to create custom palettes and save them as *. without having to edit the buttons directly. Custom palettes can be used to enable the Color Schemes feature in the G4 PanelBuilder application. For example. Depending on the differences between the palette in the button's source project and the palette in the target project. Working With Multiple Color Palettes TPDesign4 supports multiple color palettes to allow easy switching between color schemes.PAL files. which can then be imported/exported for use in other TPD4 projects. 202 Edit Palettes dialog TPDesign4 (v2. 202). so once imported. Custom Palettes can be saved as *. and named palette entries. When you copy a button from one project into another project that is using a different palette.Working With Colors and Palettes Neither JASC nor Microsoft palette files support transparency in the same manner that TPD4 utilizes transparency. Use the options in the Edit Palettes dialog to create and save custom palettes.

Note that it is tagged as (active) in the drop-down list. To edit an existing palette entry. 4. This is optional. Select the palette that you want to add a new palette entry (color) to. Renaming Palettes 1. FIG.Working With Colors and Palettes By default. 2. Click the Rename button to open the Rename dialog (FIG. Creating Custom Palettes 1. By default. 6. but highly recommended since this is the name that will appear with the color in the palette when the view option is set to details. but highly recommended since this is the name that will appear with the color in the palette when the view option is set to details. By default. in conjunction with the Hue/Sat/Bright. 6. 203 Rename dialog 4. 3. Red/Blue/Green. the palette that is currently being used for the active Project is selected. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. Click on the Commit button to add the selected color (and color name if applicable) to the selected slot in the palette. as indicated in the palette selection drop-down list in the upper-left corner of this dialog. the palette that is currently being used for the active Project is selected. Click the New button to clear the palette index of all entries. 202 on page 215). Red/Blue/Green. the palette that is currently being used for the active Project is selected. and each palette entry is represented by an index number (1-256). opacity (and/or Hex value) to specify the color that you want to add to the palette. 3. Note that it is tagged as (active) in the drop-down list. 202 on page 215). Use the cursor in the Color Value chart. Enter a description of the new palette entry in the Name text field. in conjunction with the Hue/Sat/Bright. Repeat steps 3 . Select a palette entry: To add a new palette entry to the palette. 2. 4. Click on the Commit button to add the selected color and color name (if applicable) to the selected slot in the palette. opacity (and/or Hex value) to specify the color that you want to add to the palette. Each color that is listed in the palette is considered to be a palette entry. in the palette selection drop-down list. 216 TPDesign4 (v2. Select the palette that you want to rename from the palette selection drop-down list.11 or higher) . Enter the new name for this palette in the text field and select OK. 5.5 to add as many additional colors to this palette as needed. By default. Enter a description of the new palette entry in the Name text field. the new palette is titled Unnamed. 3. 203 on page 216). Note that it is tagged as (active) in the palette selection drop-down list (in the upper-left corner of this dialog). 5. This is optional. select a slot with no color assignment. select an existing color. in the upper-left corner of this dialog. The index numbers correlate to the slot in the palette that this color occupies. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. use the cursor in the Color Value chart. 2. To add palette entries (colors) to this palette.

select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to access the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG.Working With Colors and Palettes 5. Click the New button to open a new (empty palette) or select an existing one from the drop-down list. Select the slot that you want to paste the copied palette entry into and click Paste Entry. as a *. you must select the Set Active button at the top of the dialog. Copying Palettes Use the Copy and Paste buttons at the top of the Edit Palettes dialog to copy and paste entire palettes: 1. The new name of the palette is indicated in the palette selection drop-down list. the copied color will overwrite the original. If you desire to make the imported palette the active palette. Click the Copy button. 3. you could open an existing palette and paste over the existing palette entries. 4. 5. 4. 3. Click to select the palette entry that you want to copy. 202 on page 215). Click the Paste button to paste the contents of the source palette into the new (target) palette. Changing the Active Palette To select a different palette to use. Importing Palette Files You can import palette (*. Select the palette that you want to copy from the palette selection drop-down list (in the upper-left corner of the dialog).PAL file. 202 on page 215). Use this dialog to save the palette to a specified directory. Note that the new name overwrites the previous name (removing the previous name from the list). and select from the listing of available palettes in the palette selection drop-down list. Select Panel > Edit Palettes to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG.11 or higher) 217 . Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. Copying Palette Entries Use the Copy Entry and Paste Entry buttons at the bottom of the Edit Palettes dialog to copy and paste individual palette entries (colors): 1. Click the Export button to access the Save As dialog. 202 on page 215). 4. 202 on page 215). Use this dialog to locate and select the desired *.PAL) files for use in other projects via the Export option in the Edit Palettes dialog. 2. TPDesign4 (v2. Alternatively.PAL file. Click the Copy Entry button. 6. If you select a slot that already has a palette entry. Use this feature to save and distribute custom palettes that can be imported back into TPD4 via the Import option: 1. Select Panel > Edit Palettes to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. 3. 2. 202 on page 215). Click the Import button to access the Open dialog. in the upper-left corner of the dialog.PAL) files for use in your project via the Import option in the Edit Palettes dialog: 1. Exporting Palette Files You can export palette (*. Select the palette that contains the color(s) that you want to copy from the palette selection drop-down list (in the upper-left corner of the dialog). Click Open to import the selected palette file and close the Open dialog. 2. 2.

Using custom palettes to create Color Schemes requires the use of both TPDesign4 and G4 PanelBuilder: Custom palettes are created in TPDesign4. Custom palettes can be used to enable the Color Schemes feature in the G4 PanelBuilder application. the buttons in the project must use the border types that come with TPD4 (as opposed to a custom image that defines the button's look). While it is not an enforced requirement. These preview images are used to display the color schemes that are available for this template in G4 PanelBuilder. the Color Schemes feature is applied via the Project menu in G4 PanelBuilder. Note that if the exported project does not meet these requirements. Not all TPD4 projects support the Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder. 218 TPDesign4 (v2. without having to edit the buttons directly. Refer to the Paint online help for instructions on using Microsoft® Paint. and then opened in the G4 PanelBuilder application. The project must include one preview image for each of the custom palettes that are included. TPDesign4 is also required to export the project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template (*. In order to utilize Color Schemes in G4 PanelBuilder. the TPD4 project must meet several requirements before being exported as a G4 PanelBuilder template file (via the File > Export as G4 PanelBuilder Template option): The project must include at least one custom palette (in addition to the default palette). You can also use Chameleon Images in conjunction with custom palettes to further enhance the use of Color schemes in G4 PanelBuilder. For example. in order for the project to actually make use of multiple palettes in G4 PanelBuilder. Using the Microsoft® Paint Utility Program Select Tools > Paint to launch the Microsoft Paint Utility program. However.Working With Colors and Palettes Using Custom Palettes to Enable Color Schemes in G4 PanelBuilder TPDesign4 supports creating and saving multiple custom color palettes within a project. Color Schemes allow you to apply different color schemes to an entire template (in G4 PanelBuilder).one color scheme for each design.TPT). and saved as part of the TPD4 project. you could create a single template file with four different color palettes that would allow you to use the same template to quickly produce four different variations on the design . the Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder will be disabled for this template. When a valid TPD4 project file is exported as a G4 PanelBuilder template. the Project > Color Schemes option (in the G4 PanelBuilder application) allows you to apply different color schemes to the template with a single click.11 or higher) .

Select (or a create) a Page in your project. 204 State Properties: Video Fill options If you are working with an existing page with buttons. Displaying a Video Source on a Page TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page.11 or higher) 219 . 3. The NXP-TPI/4. TPDesign4 (v2. Enter the URL or IP Address of the server that will provide the video stream in the Streaming Source field. The Video Fill options available will depend on the video capabilities of the panel type selected (FIG. If Streaming Source is selected from the drop-down list of Video Fill options (in the States tab of the Properties Window). you can assign a "video fill" to a page. The NXP-TPI/4 and TPI-PRO accommodate up to four video source inputs. then Streaming Source is added to the list of state properties. and you can select any available video source (1-4) as the source for a video fill. and you can select any available video source (1-4) as the source for a video fill. 2. Streaming Video Fills If the project specifies a touch panel that supports streaming video (NXD/NXT-1200VG. TPI-PRO and TPI-PRO-DVI accommodate up to 4 video source inputs. In the Properties Control window . and not a button on the page. Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the Page. 204). FIG. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources. NXD/NXT-1500VG. Streaming Source is available as a video fill option. be sure to click on the page (not on a button) to bring up the State Properties for the Page. TPD4 supports video fills directly to the page/popup page.Working With Video Fills Working With Video Fills Overview If you are designing a project targeted at a video-capable panel. without having to create a page-size button (as was the case in TPDesign3).States Tab. and NXD/NXT-1700VG only). popup page or button. To apply a video fill to a Page: 1. Popup Page or Button.

2. Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the button. To apply a video fill to a Popup Page: 1.Working With Video Fills Displaying a Video Source on a Popup Page TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page. Displaying a Video Source on a Button TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page. you can use Ctrl+A to select all states in the State Manager window. 3. Select (or a create) a Popup Page in your project.11 or higher) . In the Properties Control window . and not a button on the Popup Page. be sure to click on the popup page (not on a button) to bring up the State Properties for the Popup Page. 2. Since this is a state-oriented setting. 220 TPDesign4 (v2. use the All States option in the Properties Control window (States tab).States Tab. Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the Popup Page. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources (Source 1-4). Popup Page or Button. be sure to consider all of the button states when applying the video fill. Popup Page or Button. Alternatively. In the Properties Control window . To apply a video fill to a Button: 1. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources (Source 1-4).States Tab. To apply the video fill across all states. If you are working with an existing Popup Page with buttons. Select (or a create) a Button in your project. 3.

11 or higher) 221 .Working With Video Fills TPDesign4 (v2.

Working With Video Fills 222 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .

cool_button_spin04. TPDesign4 (v2. This opens the first of six dialogs: Animation Wizard . This opens the Select Resource dialog. Ctrl+click to select multiple files.jpg. To create a simple button animation using the Animation Wizard: 1. Select Chameleon Image to use (32-bit PNG) chameleon images in the animation. This however. they will be available via this drop-down list. and set the sequence of the images. by creating a series of states and applying a different bitmap or icon to each state and treating each state as an individual frame.. Select Button > Animation Wizard to start the wizard.e. and there are no other options in this dropdown list until at least one sequence has been created. The Sequence selection is set to "[custom]" by default. Note that the only images that are available to choose from are those that have been imported into the project.11 or higher) 223 .Select Type (Step 1 of 6). where you can select which images to include in the animation. click the Add button. cool_button_spin02. Although you can edit the sequence of the images in the animation manually. Note: If you select a General (two-state) button to use with the animation wizard. To add the images that will comprise the animation sequence. Animation Wizard . Also. Select Icon to use icons in the animation.Create Sequence (Step 2 of 6) dialog. The Animation Wizard automates most of the process and makes the task easy.e. or Shift+click to select the range of files between two selections.jpg.Working With Animation Effects Working With Animation Effects Overview TPD4 utilizes three main concepts for supporting animation effects in your projects: Animation Wizard Tweening Chameleon Images Using the Animation Wizard The Animation Wizard is a powerful tool included with TPD4. and set the sequence of the images. would be a very tedious and time-intensive process. the wizard will allow you to add the necessary number of states to the button to accommodate the animation sequence (and automatically change the button type to Multi-State General). Animation Wizard . make sure the numbering convention used for the files is consistent (i. Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard . Once you import a series of images with identical names except for a post-fixed numeric indicator. Select Bitmap to use bitmaps in the animation.Select Type (Step 1 of 6) Use the radio buttons in this dialog to specify the type of animation to create (Bitmap or Icon). it makes things easier if you take naming into consideration before importing the files. through the File > Import Resources option. Multi-state buttons can have up to 256 states. all of which are available to be used as "frames" in an animation. In order for images to appear in the Sequence drop down for selection. the images that you use to create the animation must be named in sequence (i. It guides you through the steps of generating an animation sequence that can be applied to a multi-state button to apply impressive visual effects to your buttons. etc. cool_button_spin03. cool_button_spin01..). don't mix "1" and "01" or "001").jpg.jpg. or via the Import button on the Resource Manager dialog (see the Importing Image Files Into Your Project section on page 54 for details).Create Sequence (Step 2 of 6) Use this dialog to specify the images to be included in the animation. 2. You can create an animation sequence for a multi-state button manually. Use this dialog to specify the images to be included in the animation.

for a ten-frame animation.Assign Frames (Step 4 of 6) dialog.Assign Frames (Step 4 of 6) Use this dialog to create enough states to accommodate the number of frames in the animation sequence. 3. 0.11 or higher) . Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard . Use the options in the lower-half of this dialog to specify the positioning of the animated image relative to the button containing it. Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard . use the X and Y fields to indicate the desired position. meaning that the upper-left corner of each page is represented by the X-Y value of 0.Appearance (Step 5 of 6) dialog. All position (X-Y) values in TPD4 are zero-based (measured in pixels). Note that since TPD4 does not support the (proprietary) . Click OK in the Select Resource dialog to return to the Animation Wizard .GIF file type. The image files you selected now appear in alpha-numeric order in the preview window of this dialog. Select the desired position option from the drop-down list. If you select Absolute. a warning message is displayed along the bottom of the dialog. you shouldn't have to modify the sequence at all. So. Obviously. Use the first field to indicate which state to start the animation on (default = 1. you'll have to add at least eight states to the button (one frame per button state). and open the Animation Wizard before adding any states. and the size of the button that will contain it. For example. you will have to save the frames out to a supported file type. and the animated image will be clipped (cropped) to fit in the button. This dialog tells you two important pieces of information: the size of the animated image. the first state). 5. if more states are required for the animation.Create Sequence (Step 2 of 6) dialog.Working With Animation Effects You can bring existing animated GIF files into your project via a third-party application (for example JASC® 's Animation Shop which comes bundles with Paint Shop Pro . 4.version 7 or higher. and the number of states available on the button to which the animation is to be applied. Once extracted. Use the radio buttons in the top-half of the dialog to specify wether to scale the button to fit the animated image. If the images were named consecutively. use the radio buttons to indicate how to handle them (Leave Alone or Remove). The general concept is that you start with an existing animated GIF image.Size & Position (Step 3 of 6) Use this dialog to specify the size and position of the animation relative to the button that will contain it. If you are applying an animation that is bigger than the containing button. 224 TPDesign4 (v2. Use the Move Left and Move Right buttons to re-arrange the image sequence (if necessary). Animation Wizard . If button states exist beyond the end of the animation. and the original GIF animation can be simulated. these files can be imported into your TPD4 project. Lets say that your sequence has ten frames. Use the next field to indicate which of the existing states to duplicate. or to simply apply the animation to the button at its current size.Size & Position (Step 3 of 6) dialog. Use the Add and Remove buttons to add/remove selected images from the sequence (if necessary). if you create a multi-state button. the animation sequence will have more than two frames. there are also many freeware applications available). Animation Wizard . and save each frame in the animation out as an individual image file (resulting in a series of image files). The options in this dialog allow you to automatically detect the number of frames in the animation sequence. you have only two states on the button. Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard .

and the animation type (Bitmap or Icon). these options default to no border (Set to "none") and transparent fill (Set to "transparent"). "tweening" is the process of altering the display properties of intermediate frames between two images to give the appearance that the first image evolves smoothly into the second image. Tweening is a common concept in all sorts of animation software.Working With Animation Effects Animation Wizard . the tweening process greatly simplifies the process of generating each state individually by automatically creating a gradual transition across all states based on the state properties of the first and last states. to make a button fade completely in/out on a page. and Button Fill Color on the resulting button. Remember. When the multi-state button is turned On it will display all the assigned states from first to last within a specified time interval. TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 225 . including: The number of states to be added to the button. many other animation effects can be achieved via the Tweening tools of TPD4.Finish (Step 6 of 6) This dialog lists the actions to be taken to generate the button animation. Animation Wizard . Note that the animation is indicated in the State Manager window. it is also possible to use tweening to make buttons fade in and out on the page. Provided you are not creating an image-based animation. The position of the animation on the button.Appearance (Step 5 of 6) Use this dialog to specify how treat the Button Border Style. if you create a multi-state button with 256 states. If creating a icon animation. This is called "Animate Time Down". the states will be displayed in reverse order. TPD4 supports multi-state buttons. Beyond simplifying the process of creating motion animations. So. also definable in 1/10th second increments. 6. This is called "Animate Time Up". Since transparent borders are not supported in this version of TPD4. When the button is turned back Off. you might say that you have 256 frames available for the animation.Finish (Step 6 of 6) dialog. When used in combination with TPD4's ability to handle RGB colors (including the opacity setting). and is definable in 1/10th second increments. and click Push). Use the Button Preview window to view the animation (select View > Button Preview. which can have up to 256 states which are used to animate a button push from Off to On and back again to Off. you would have to create the button without borders. and which state to duplicate. If creating a bitmap animation. The Animate Time Up and Animate Time Down values are set in the General tab of the Properties Control window. Click Finish to generate the animation. these options default to leave both border an fill color alone (Leave alone). Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard . Tweening Short for in-betweening. each state of a multi-state button can be thought of as an individual frame. In TPD4. The starting state for the animation. tweening also generates very smooth color transition effects that would be difficult or impossible to do any other way. A listing of each state and the image file associated with it. the number of frames in the animation.

and is definable in 1/10th second increments. 206). The color tweeners can be used individually. since transparent borders are not supported in this version of TPD4. 206 Multi-State Button (4 States) To create a fade effect. Ctrl+click to select two states in the State Manager window that are separated by at least one state (do not select the intermediate states). An opacity setting of 255 (max) makes the button totally opaque. Text Effect Color or any combination) to the last state that is different from that of the first state (FIG. it is also possible to use tweening to make buttons fade in and out on the page. Border Color. the smoother the transitions will appear. most color transition effects don't require that many frames to produce a very smooth fade. When the button is turned back Off. or in combinations to create smooth fades from one color to another when the button is pressed. Text Color. With 256 states available to use as "frames" in a tweened animation. The color tweener(s) will generate a transition effect that fades the first color into the second (FIG. Select (or create a new) multi-state button with at least three states (FIG. Apply a color (Fill Color. When used in combination with TPD4's ability to handle RGB colors (including the opacity setting). Fill Color and Text Color tweeners to easily apply color transition effects to multi-state buttons. However. Fill Color. This is called "Animate Time Up".Working With Animation Effects Creating Color Transition Effects Use the Border Color. 205). The Animate Time Up and Animate Time Down values are set in the General tab of the Properties Control window. Text Color and Text Effect Color): 1. FIG. leave the colors the same for the first and last states. you would have to create the button without a border assignment. To create a color transition effect: The following steps apply to all three button color attributes (Border Color. An opacity setting of zero makes the button totally transparent. the states will be displayed in reverse order. This is called "Animate Time Down". When the button is turned On it will display all the assigned states from first to last within a specified time interval. 205 Multi-State Button (4 States) 2. Note that to make buttons fade in/out completely. Note that the more states you use. FIG. set to RGB colors). 226 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) . 3. 207). but change the opacity on one of them to zero (via the Colors dialog. these effects can be made to be very subtle and smooth. also definable in 1/10th second increments.

Select (or create a new) multi-state button. 208 Multi-State Button (4 States) Use the All Colors Tweener to tween all colors applied to the button. 2. Select one or more of the color tweeners to apply effects. 8. Ctrl+click to select just the two states containing the icon start and end positions in the State Manager window. However. They must be separated by at least one stage. Creating Animated Bitmap Effects Use the Icon Position and Bitmap Position tweeners to apply animated bitmap effects to multi-state buttons. Experiment with applying multiple color tweens to the same button. FIG. 5. 7. the TPD4 tweening tools are not limited to one tween effect per multi-stage button press. 4. The Bitmap Position tweener allows you to cause a bitmap to move around the button area when it is pressed. Duplicate the state that the tweening should begin across all states to be included in the tween. and select Tweeners from the context menu to open the Tweeners sub-menu.11 or higher) 227 . and with different combinations of tweeners. and you should not select the intermediate states). Animated bitmap effects can be used alone or in conjunction with the other tweeners to create all sorts of eyecatching visual effects. Insert at least one state (tweeners require at least three states to work). 207 Multi-State Button (4 States) The most basic type of color transition effect starts at the first state (or frame) and ends at the last. TPDesign4 (v2. In the last state included in the tween. 5. 3. 208). Set the Icon Justification property to Absolute.Working With Animation Effects FIG. To create animated bitmap effects with an icon: 1. Add an icon to the button (via the Icon field in the Properties Control window . place the icon in its end position in the animation via the Image/ Text Positioning dialog (select Image/Text Positioning from the State Manager context menu). The results are displayed immediately in the State Manager window (FIG. 6. The Icon Position tweener allows you to cause an icon to move around the button area when it is pressed.States tab). 4. Right-click on one of the highlighted states in the State Manager window. Move the icon into it's starting position for the animation via the Image/Text Positioning dialog (select Image/Text Positioning from the State Manager context menu).

To create animated text effects: 1.11 or higher) . The text position tweener allows you to have the button text move around the button area when it is pressed. Animated text effects can be used alone or in conjunction with the other tweeners to create all sorts of eye-catching visual effects. Set the Text Justification property to Absolute. Fill.This option tweens the Text Effect Color (only) between two selected button states. the justification for the icon. All Positions . They must be separated by at least one stage.Working With Animation Effects To create animated bitmap effects with a bitmap image. In order to apply tweening to an icon. Ctrl+click to select just the two states containing the text start and end positions in the State Manager window. Icon Position . some of these options may not be available. Text Position . bitmap or text must be set to Absolute. Icon. 3. For example.This option tweens the Fill color (only) between two selected button states. The Text Position tweener will generate a motion effect that moves the text across the button. bitmap or text must be set to Absolute. the justification for the icon. All Colors . Add text to the button (via the Text field in the Properties Control window . Overall Opacity . bitmap or text. 228 TPDesign4 (v2. In order to apply motion tweening to an icon. Copy the text from the first state to the last state to be tweened.This option tweens the position of an icon applied to two selected button states. 2.This option tweens the position of text applied to two selected button states. 7. Creating Animated Text Effects Use the Text Position tweener to apply animated text effects to multi-state buttons. Bitmap Position . the Bitmap Position option is only available if the selected buttons use a bitmap. Fill Color . and move it to its end position in the animation via the Image/Text Positioning dialog (select Image/Text Positioning from the State Manager context menu). Select (or create a new) multi-state button. Tweeners sub-menu Select Tweeners from the States Menu or the State Manager context menu to open the Tweeners sub-menu. and Text positions applied to two selected button states all at once. 4. Move the text into it's starting position for the animation via the Image/Text Positioning dialog (select Image/Text Positioning from the State Manager context menu). and Text Effect colors between two selected states all at once. Insert at least one state (tweeners require at least three states to work). and you should not select the intermediate states). The options in this menu include: Border Color . bitmap or text. 5.This option tweens the Border color (only) between two selected button states. The only difference is that you will select and apply a bitmap rather than an icon to the button. This menu allows you to select a type of tweener to use in creating animations on multi-state buttons. follow the steps outlined above.States tab). 6.This option tweens the Border. Text Effect Color .This option tweens the Text color (only) between two selected button states. Text Color .This option tweens the position of a bitmap applied to two selected button states. Text. Note that depending on the elements of the selected buttons.This option tweens the Overall Opacity (only) between two selected button states.This option will tween the Bitmap.

Working With Animation Effects Text Size . Refer to the Chameleon Images.This option tweens the size of text applied to two selected button states. The Blue channel is not used. When creating an image to be used as a Chameleon image in TPD4. when applied to a button/state. some images make more sense and would give better results than others. when placed on top (via the Draw Order state property). This file can be viewed in G4 PanelPreview or on an actual G4 panel.amx.com as a dealer. The basic requirements that allow an image file to be recognized as a chameleon image in TPD4 are: It is a PNG image file It uses RGB color (8 bits/channel) It has an alpha channel defined In order for a chameleon image to be applied to buttons or popup pages. Red. then the colors used in the chameleon image will change accordingly. the Border Name state property must be set to none. Green and Blue). Custom Palettes and G4 PanelBuilder help topic for details. uses the Fill and Border colors assigned to the button/state to determine the colors in the image. When the border name is set to none. The Green channel defines the area that will be filled with the state's Border Color. To access AMX Tech Notes. Ideally. while virtually any PNG file could be applied as a chameleon image. the image to be used is one that either was created or was selected specifically with the concept of colorizable regions that could be changed to suit different design needs. Furthermore. When used with multi-state buttons. That is. The position-oriented tweener options only work when the selected elements are set to use absolute positioning.11 or higher) 229 . then the Chameleon Image property becomes available. you must be logged into www. Note that chameleon images are not necessarily different from any other PNG image file. when used in conjunction with custom palettes. refer to the "Chameleon Demo" TPD4 file attached to Tech Note TN733 to provide an example of chameleon images. A chameleon image is a PNG image file that. The Red channel defines the area that will be filled with the state's Fill Color. Requirements for Chameleon Images Chameleon images can be applied to buttons to create animated highlighting. they enable the ability to create multiple color schemes that can be applied to a single template in the G4 PanelBuilder application. In other words. chameleon images can also take advantage of TPD4's tweening tools to easily create color transition effects. For an example of a chameleon image. it is an image that can have its colors changed on the panel itself (at runtime). and chameleon images use the button/state's Fill and Border color assignments to determine the colors used in the image as follows: The Alpha channel of the Chameleon image defines the overall shape mask for the state. Chameleon Images TPD4 supports a button state property called Chameleon Image. One possible benefit of using chameleon images is that. set the image properties to RGB Color and 8 Bits/Channel. if the Fill and/or Border colors are changed. PNG images consist of four separate color channels (Alpha. can add highlighting and shadow effects to convincingly create an illusion of depth. As a result. TPDesign4 (v2. The Chameleon Image state property is available for all button types except Text Input. chameleon images may also use a companion bitmap which. Computer Control and TakeNote buttons. glow and drop-shadow effects.

It has been applied to a button as the Chameleon Image (via the Chameleon Image state property).Example Here's an example of creating a simple chameleon image. the PNG file must be saved with RGB colors (32-bit). 3. When creating an image to be used as a chameleon image. Using an image editing program to create an image to use as the chameleon image: Only PNG image files can be used as chameleon images.Working With Animation Effects The characteristics that define any image as a chameleon image are: 1. In a Design View window. The Blue color channel is not used for chameleon buttons. Export the image as a PNG file. Blue. For the transparent color to be interpreted correctly by TPD4. create or select a button to which you wish to apply the chameleon image. since in TPD4. The exported file must be a 32-bit RGB Color (8 Bits/Channel) file in order to be interpreted correctly by TPD4 as a chameleon image. only PNGs accommodate transparency as a color. 230 TPDesign4 (v2. Keep in mind that the Chameleon Image state property is not available for Text Input. Use the alpha channel to define the overall desired shape of the button (see Working with Transparent Backgrounds for more information). Green and Alpha) that comprise 32-bit images to define separate colorizable regions (FIG. Computer Control or TakeNote button types. FIG. It meets the technical requirements for a chameleon image. keep in mind that the Red and Green color channels will be replaced by the colors specified as the Fill and Border colors in TPD4 for each state of the button.11 or higher) . 209). 4. 2. 209 Working With Chameleon Images Working With Chameleon Images . Import the image file into TPD4 (via the Import button on the Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog). Working With Chameleon Images Chameleon Images utilize the 4 color channels (Red. for the purpose of illustrating the basic concepts used: 1. 2.

In order to utilize Chameleon Images and Color Schemes in G4 PanelBuilder. The Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder allow you to apply different "color skins" to a single template. the colors used to render the chameleon image will change if and when a different color palette is applied to the template in the G4 PanelBuilder application. For example. TPDesign4 (v2. depending on what elements (Bitmaps. Using chameleon images coupled with custom palettes to create Color Schemes requires the use of both TPD4 and G4 PanelBuilder: Chameleon images are imported and applied to buttons (or popup pages) in TPD4. you can use the Fill Color and Border Color Tweening tools to quickly create color transition effects for each of the color channels (FIG. when opened in the G4 PanelBuilder application. Icons. the Chameleon Image property becomes available (directly beneath Border Name). click the browse button (. Not all TPD4 projects support the Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder. 210 Chameleon Image .Fill and Border colors tweened In fact. The project must include at least one custom palette (in addition to the default palette). 211): FIG. 211 Chameleon Image . 6. TPD4 is also required to export the project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template (*. Custom palettes are created in TPD4. Chameleon Images. and saved as part of the TPD4 project..Fill and Border colors Since chameleon buttons rely on the Border and Fill color settings. Select the chameleon image (in the Image tab) and click OK to apply it to the selected button. Text) make up your button. the Chameleon images can by used in conjunction with any of the other Tweening tools.) to access the Resource Manager dialog. Chameleon images utilize the 4 color channels that comprise 32-bit PNG images to define separate colorizable regions. are capable of switching from one color scheme to another without having to edit the buttons directly. 210): FIG. any portion of the image that exists on the Green color channel now matches the color specified in the Border Color state property. Custom Palettes and G4 PanelBuilder Chameleon images can be used in conjunction with custom palettes to create G4 PanelBuilder template files that. note that any portion of the image that exists on the Red color channel now matches the color specified in the Fill Color state property.one color scheme for each design. Now that the image has been applied as a chameleon image. There are also several requirements for images to allow them to be recognized as chameleon images by TPD4.11 or higher) 231 . set the button's Border Name to None.Working With Animation Effects 5. the TPD4 project must meet several requirements before being exported as a G4 PanelBuilder template file (via the File > Export as G4 PanelBuilder Template option): The project must utilize at least one chameleon image (meaning that a chameleon image has been applied to at least one button in the project). the primary benefits of these features are realized in the G4 PanelBuilder application (via the Project > Color Schemes feature). Similarly. In the States tab of the Properties Window. you could create a single template file with four different color palettes that would allow you to use the same template to quickly produce four different variations on the design . Since the Fill and Border colors are in turn associated with a particular color palette (which is saved as part of the TPD4 project). Note that at this point. A few examples of color changes resulting from changing the Fill and Border colors for the button/state with the chameleon image (FIG.. However.TPT). In the Chameleon Image property.

the Project > Color Schemes option (in the G4 PanelBuilder application) allows you to apply different color schemes to the template with a single click. and then opened in the G4 PanelBuilder application. 232 TPDesign4 (v2. Note that if the exported project does not meet these requirements.11 or higher) . When a valid TPD4 project file is exported as a G4 PanelBuilder template. These preview images are used to display the color options that are available for this template in G4 PanelBuilder.Working With Animation Effects The project must include one preview image for each of the custom palettes that are included. the Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder will be disabled for this template.

You'll have to be aware of the security settings on the target Master before trying to connect. There are three types of file transfer operations in TPD4 (both accessible via the Transfer menu): Send To Panel: Sends the currently open project (*. FIG. While all file transfer operations to touch panels are managed by the Master. the files themselves are routed to the panels. where they will reside (touch panel files never reside on the Master). Connections are maintained separate from the transfer itself. select Transfer > Connect (or click the toolbar button) to open the Connect dialog. via the User Name and Password fields in the Connection Settings dialog. all file transfer operations are routed through the NetLinx Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. you will be able to establish this connection (by selecting it by name in the Connect dialog) without having to type the authentication information each time you connect (FIG. 212). Refer to the NetLinx Studio (v2. Click the Connection requires authentication checkbox to enable the User and Password text fields. Specify the User Name and Password for NetLinx Masters that require authentication in the Connection Settings dialog. so they do not need to be established/dropped each time a transfer is performed. Once they are entered here.TP4) file to a specified Master. Send File To Panel: Sends a selected project file to a specified Master. without opening the file in TPD4. or select an existing configuration from the drop-down list and click Properties to edit those saved settings. Receive From Panel: Receives a project file from a Master. 4. 2.11 or higher) 233 . you must enter a User Name and Password in order to establish a connection. 212 Connection Settings dialog (Authentication enabled) TPDesign4 (v2.File Transfer Operations File Transfer Operations Overview In TPD4. To access the Connection Settings dialog. 1. 3. Secure NetLinx Connections If the target NetLinx Master has authentication enabled.3 or higher) online help for details on enabling authentication on NetLinx Masters. You can save the User Name/Password combination as part of the communication configuration for that Master. Use the Connect dialog to define and save one or more connection settings. and select New to create a new communication configuration. Enter the User Name/Password combination to save them as part of this configuration.

if the correct User Name/Password combination is not entered (or if the entries are incorrect).11 or higher) . they will be ignored. FIG. select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog. To recall a saved communication configuration.File Transfer Operations When attempting to connect to a secured NetLinx Master. 215). 215 Connect dialog . 214). 214 Connect dialog Anytime you establish a new communication connection configuration (via the New button in the Connect dialog). so it does not need to be established/ dropped each time a transfer is performed. and select the desired configuration from the Connection drop-down list (FIG. the connection will fail and TPD4 will display an error message indicating why the connection was denied. The status bar reflects the status of the connection as follows (FIG. the program requires you to enter a name for the configuration (in the Name field of the Connection Settings dialog). See the Connecting to a NetLinx Master section on page 235 for details on establishing a new connection.Connection drop-down list 234 TPDesign4 (v2. FIG. The configuration you specify under that name can then be accessed via the Connection drop-down list in the Connect dialog. If a User Name/Password is specified for a Master that does not require authentication. Use the Connect dialog to define and save one or more connection settings (FIG. 213 Connection Status (indicated in the Status Bar) Working With Communications Configurations Saving and Recalling Communication Configurations Connection information is maintained separate from the transfer itself. Specify the User Name and Password for NetLinx Master that require authentication in the Connection Settings dialog. 213): not connected connected to an unsecured master connected to a secured but unencrypted master connected to a secured and encrypted master FIG.

The invokes the Connection Settings dialog (FIG. 6. The IP Port should always be set to 1319 (default). 3.11 or higher) 235 . Therefore. This allows you to recall the configuration you specify later. 2. 4. 2. TPDesign4 (v2. Serial or Modem. In the Connect dialog. 3. If the target NetLinx Master has authentication enabled. as opposed to connecting directly to the panels. FIG. 216). Connecting to a NetLinx Master via TCP/IP These steps describe establishing TCP/IP communication with a NetLinx Master for the first time. There are three possible ways to connect to a NetLinx Master: TCP/IP. 216 Connection Settings dialog . Select Transfer > Connect to access this dialog. Edit the communication settings for the selected configuration as needed. Click the Edit button to invoke the Connection Settings dialog (FIG. you will prompted to enter a User Name and Password in order to establish a connection. without having to re-configure.TCP/IP selected as Transport 5. Select Transfer > Connect (or click the toolbar button) to open the Connect dialog. and save multiple connection configurations for easy access. Then the communication configuration can be easily reused by simply selecting it from the drop-down list in the Connect dialog. file transfer operations are routed through the NetLinx Master to which the panels are connected. Connecting to a NetLinx Master Typically. enter a unique name for the connection configuration that are you setting up (in the Name field). you will have defined a named communication configuration that will then be included in the Connection list (in the Connect dialog). Enter the IP Address of the target NetLinx Master in the IP Address/DNS Name field. Select the configuration that you want to edit from the Connection drop-down list.File Transfer Operations To delete a saved configuration. click New to establish a new connection. and click OK to save your changes and return to the Connect dialog. in order to transfer touch panel files for use on G4compatible panels. Select TCP/IP from the Transport drop-down list (FIG. select a configuration (in the Connect dialog) and click the Delete button. 212 on page 233). Select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog. Do not change this number. Editing the Settings on an Existing Communication Configuration 1. 4. 7. Once these steps have been completed. The Connect dialog allows you to set up communications. Specify the User Name and Password for NetLinx Master that require authentication in the Connection Settings dialog. 212 on page 233). you will first establish communication between the PC running TPD4 and the NetLinx Master to which the target panels are connected. 1. In the Connection Settings dialog.

Once they are entered here. 6.Serial selected as Transport 5. click New to establish a new connection. Parity. Click OK to save these settings and return to the Connect dialog.3 or higher) online help for details on enabling authentication on NetLinx Masters. Enter the User Name/Password combination to save them as part of this configuration. Click the Connection requires authentication checkbox to enable the User and Password text fields. 2. This allows you to recall the configuration you specify later. In the Connect dialog. Press the Connect button to establish the connection. 1. 8. without having to re-configure.3 or higher) online help for details on enabling authentication on NetLinx Masters. In the Connection Settings dialog. Once they are entered here. Configure the Settings parameters (COM Port. If the target NetLinx Master has authentication enabled. you will prompted to enter a User Name and Password in order to establish a connection. Connecting to a NetLinx Master via Serial Port These steps describe establishing serial communication with a NetLinx Master for the first time.File Transfer Operations Click the Connection requires authentication checkbox to enable the User and Password text fields.11 or higher) . you will be able to establish this connection (by selecting it by name in the Connect dialog) without having to type the authentication information each time you connect. Refer to the NetLinx Studio (v2. Select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog. Once these steps have been completed. 8. The invokes the Connection Settings dialog (FIG. Click OK to save these settings and return to the Connect dialog. 4. 7. Data Bits. Press the Connect button to establish the connection. 236 TPDesign4 (v2. 217 Connection Settings dialog . 3. enter a unique name for the connection configuration that are you setting up (in the Name field). FIG. 217). Stop Bits and Flow control) as needed. you will have defined a named communication configuration that will then be included in the Connection list (in the Connect dialog). Refer to the NetLinx Studio (v2. you will be able to establish this connection (by selecting it by name in the Connect dialog) without having to type the authentication information each time you connect. 212 on page 233). Select Serial from the Transport drop-down list (FIG. Then the communication configuration can be easily reused by simply selecting it from the drop-down list in the Connect dialog. Baud Rate. Enter the User Name/Password combination to save them as part of this configuration. 9.

Select Modem from the Transport drop-down list (FIG. Click OK to save these settings and return to the Connect dialog.Modem selected as Transport 4. 212 on page 233). Parity. Refer to the NetLinx Studio (v2. 7. 1. Data Bits. 218). Flow control and Phone #) as needed. enter a unique name for the connection configuration that are you setting up (in the Name field). In the Connect dialog. 3. In the Connection Settings dialog. Enter the User Name/Password combination to save them as part of this configuration. without having to re-configure. Then the communication configuration can be easily reused by simply selecting it from the drop-down list in the Connect dialog. you will be able to establish this connection (by selecting it by name in the Connect dialog) without having to type the authentication information each time you connect. Stop Bits. 218 Connection Settings dialog . This allows you to recall the configuration you specify later. you will have defined a named communication configuration that will then be included in the Connection list (in the Connect dialog). If the target NetLinx Master has authentication enabled. you will prompted to enter a User Name and Password in order to establish a connection. Press the Connect button to establish the connection. 6. Configure the Settings parameters (COM Port. FIG.3 or higher) online help for details on enabling authentication on NetLinx Masters.11 or higher) 237 . Once these steps have been completed. Click the Connection requires authentication checkbox to enable the User and Password text fields. 2.File Transfer Operations Connecting to a NetLinx Master via Modem These steps describe establishing modem communication with a NetLinx Master for the first time. 5. Once they are entered here. click New to establish a new connection. Baud Rate. The invokes the Connection Settings dialog (FIG. TPDesign4 (v2.

the Connect dialog is invoked (FIG. Panel File Transfers via TCP/IP In TPD4. Connections are maintained separate from the transfer itself. create and save a serial communication configuration via the Connection Settings dialog: a. Select Transfer > Send to Panel or Receive From Panel. Serial and Modem. the panel files are routed to the panels. This is the name that will b. Otherwise. Receiving a Panel File From a NetLinx Master Use the Transfer > Receive From Panel option (or click the toolbar button) to connect to a Master and upload a panel file from a compatible G4 touch panel on that Master's bus.01 or higher. select it from the dropdown list. Configure the TCP/IP connection (IP Address/DNS Name of the target/source device). In the Name field. In order to transfer touch panel files. so they do not need to be established/dropped each time a transfer is performed. There are three transport types available to transfer touch panel files: TCP/IP. Click Connect in the Connect dialog to establish the TCP/IP connection. There are three ways to connect and upload Panel files: TCP/IP. To transfer to a G4 panel. Serial and Modem. Use the Connect dialog to define and save connection settings. If you are not already connected to the Master. 238 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) . In TPD4. Earlier versions of the firmware and TPD4 software are incompatible with G4 panels. the panel files are routed to the panels. where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). appear in the drop-down list of the Connect dialog. verify that the NetLinx Master Firmware is build 85 or later. where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). Use the Send File To Panel option to send a project file without having to open it in TPD4. you must first establish communication between the PC and the NetLinx Master. Select TCP/IP from the Transport drop-down list. In TPD4. 214 on page 234). c. While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels. file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). In order to transfer touch panel files. While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels. To use TCP/IP as the transport type: 1. via the Connect dialog. via the Connect dialog. e. the panel files are routed to the panels. Do not change this number. The IP Port should always be set to 1319 (default). d. Verify the TPD4 program being used is Version 1. Click OK to save the configuration and close the Connection Settings dialog 2. If you have already established a TCP/IP communication configuration. Use the Connect dialog to define and save connection settings. While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels. you must first establish communication between the PC and the NetLinx Master. Connections are maintained separate from the transfer itself. so they do not need to be established/dropped each time a transfer is performed. file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. enter a name for this communication configuration.File Transfer Operations Transferring Touch Panel Files to/from a NetLinx Master Sending a Panel File To a NetLinx Master Select Transfer > Send To Panel (or Transfer > Send File To Panel) to send a panel file to a NetLinx Master with a G4-compatible panel (or panels) on its bus.

3. Click Connect in the Connect dialog to establish the serial connection. Once communication is established. verify the IP Address. Stop Bits and Flow Control). c.File Transfer Operations 3. Device #. To refresh the Online Devices Tree.none Stop Bits . either the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialog is invoked (depending on wether you selected Send to Panel or Receive From Panel from the Transfer menu). Select Serial from the Transport drop-down list. Select Transfer > Send to Panel or Receive From Panel. See the Transfer Options section on page 241. If you encounter a transfer error. Panel ID.1 Flow Control . disconnect and reconnect via the commands in the Transfer menu. 4. TPDesign4 (v2. Use the Options checkboxes in the Send to Panel or Receive From Panel dialog to enable/disable the transfer options. Click Send or Receive to begin the transfer.none These settings must match those of the selected COM port. select it from the drop-down list. The suggested settings are: Baud Rate . This is the name that will appear in the drop-down list of the Connect dialog.11 or higher) 239 . indicating all devices connected to the Master that are currently online (according to the Filter setting). To use Serial as the transport type: 1. While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels. Panel File Transfers via Serial Port In TPD4. create and save a serial communication configuration via the Connection Settings dialog: a. Click OK to save the configuration and close the Connection Settings dialog 2. enter a name for this communication configuration.8 Parity .38400 Data Bits . file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. either the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialog is invoked (depending on wether you selected Send to Panel or Receive From Panel from the Transfer menu). displaying an online device tree. Configure the selected serial (COM port) connection (Baud Rate. displaying an online device tree. b. and Manufacturer. Description. If you are not already connected to the Master. d. Once communication is established. In the Name field. and connection status of both NetLinx Master and Modero panel. the Connect dialog is invoked. the panel files are routed to the panels. The online device tree lists the online devices by System #. (firmware) Version. Data Bits. 5. If you have already established a serial communication configuration. where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). indicating all devices connected to the Master that are currently online (according to the Filter setting). Otherwise. Parity.

Flow Control and Phone Number). See the Transfer Options section on page 241. and Manufacturer. disconnect and reconnect via the commands in the Transfer menu. b. the panel files are routed to the panels. The suggested settings are: Baud Rate .none These settings must match those of the Modem. 240 TPDesign4 (v2. Device #. c. Configure the selected modem connection (Baud Rate. Description. (firmware) Version. the Connect dialog is invoked. In the Name field. select it from the dropdown list. 5.11 or higher) .none Stop Bits . This method can range in speed but on average communicates at 3 Kbps. The online device tree lists the online devices by System #. Click Send or Receive to begin the transfer.File Transfer Operations The online device tree lists the online devices by System #. To use Modem as the transport type: 1. Data Bits. If you are not already connected to the Master. file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. To refresh the Online Devices Tree. Use the Options checkboxes in the Send to Panel or Receive From Panel dialog to enable/disable the transfer options. This is the name that will appear in the drop-down list of the Connect dialog. Click OK to save the configuration and close the Connection Settings dialog 2.1 Flow Control . 4. Panel File Transfers via Modem In TPD4. Device #. displaying an online device tree. Parity.8 Parity . Once communication is established. Note: Modem transfer is the slowest method of transferring TPD4 panel files to the target device. create and save a modem communication configuration via the Connection Settings dialog: a. either the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialog is invoked (depending on wether you selected Send to Panel or Receive From Panel from the Transfer menu). and Manufacturer. To refresh the Online Devices Tree. Select Transfer > Send to Panel or Receive From Panel. Otherwise. Description. indicating all devices connected to the Master that are currently online (according to the Filter setting).38400 Data Bits . disconnect and reconnect via the commands in the Transfer menu. Click Connect in the Connect dialog to establish the modem connection. 3. d. enter a name for this communication configuration. While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels. Stop Bits. Select Modem from the Transport drop-down list. where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). (firmware) Version. If you have already established a modem communication configuration.

Select Ethernet as the Master Connection. 5. since any existing panel files on the target panel will be wiped out anyway. Set the System Number to 0 (zero). you don't need to use the Full Clean option. Use the Options checkboxes in the Send to Panel or Receive From Panel dialog to enable/disable the transfer options. using your PC as a Virtual NetLinx Master. Press the System Connection button to access the System Connection Setup page.File Transfer Operations 4. See the Transfer Options section on page 241. Click Send or Receive to begin the transfer Transfer Options Smart transfer (updated panel files only): Select to utilize the Smart Transfer feature. Select URL as the Connection Mode. 2. Open received panel (uploads only): Select this option to automatically open the panel file once it is received. This feature is primarily intended for use by graphic designers. to allow them to create panel files and then test them on a panel without necessarily having access to a Master. The Full Clean option adds considerable time to the transfer. press and hold the Setup Access button (on the front panel. and is not necessary in most cases. which reduces the transfer time by only replacing those panel files that have been updated (relative to the files already loaded in the panel). Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers 2. sound files and fonts that all already resident on the target panel. 6. you can use your PC's Ethernet connection to connect directly to the panel. 4. Full clean transfer (all panel & system graphic files): Select this option to automatically wipe out any existing project files resident in the target panel before loading the new panel file. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the password (the default password is 1988). On the Touch Panel. Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Connection Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers If it is not already powered up and connected. 3. since it involves sending many more files. 7. Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers 3. If you are simply sending a panel file to a panel. 8. Normal transfer (all panel files): This option sends all panel files. To configure the panel for Virtual NetLinx Master transfers via TCP/IP: 1. apply power to the touch panel and verify that it is connected to the LAN via the TCP/IP connector on the rear (or side) of the panel (G4 panels only). Press the Protected Setup button to access the Protected Setup page. or in your panel file on your PC (for uploads) are not included in the transfer. Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers TPD4 supports direct connection to G4 panels via TCP/IP. TPDesign4 (v2. Select the Master URL / IP input box and enter the IP address of your PC (displayed in the Virtual NetLinx Master Properties dialog). for situations where the target panel is not connected to a NetLinx Master. Any bitmaps. Clear from status queue when complete: This option (enabled by default) clears each transfer from the Transfer Status Window when complete. In this situation. 5. below the touch screen) for 3 seconds to access the Setup page. There are three basic steps to Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP file transfers: 1.11 or higher) 241 .

2. Select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog (or click the toolbar button). Click the Send button to initiate the transfer. Click the Properties button to access the Virtual NetLinx Master Properties dialog. Select Transfer > Send to Panel to open the Send To Panel dialog. Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Connection Once you have configured both the touch panel and TPD4 for Masterless TCP/IP Transfers. Press the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page and press the Reboot button to reboot the panel. listed as Virtual NetLinx Master.File Transfer Operations 9. 10. 242 TPDesign4 (v2. the panel should appear in the online device tree. you are ready to transfer files to/from the panel without the need for an intermediate master: Sending Files To the Panel 1. Normal Transfer or Full Clean) as desired. b. Verify that an Ethernet cable is connected from either the rear (NXT models) or side (NXD models) of the panel to a valid Ethernet Hub. 5. a. 3. Verify the green Ethernet LED (on the rear Ethernet port) is illuminated (indicating a proper connection). Allow several seconds after the panel is rebooted for it to appear in the Online Device list in the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialogs. which displays the Host Name and IP address for your PC. Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers 1. Select <Virtual NetLinx Master>[] from the Connection drop-down list. Enter this IP address as the Master's URL/IP on the System Connection Setup page on the touch panel. Select any Options (Smart Transfer. 2. 4. Write down the IP address. The Virtual NetLinx Master connection allows G4 devices to directly connect to TPDesign4 instead of a physical NetLinx master for transfers. you may transfer panel files to and from the G4 device without the need for an intermediate NetLinx master. select Transfer > Receive From Panel.5 power cable to the 12 VDC power connector on the rear/side of the touch panel. Connect the terminal end of the PSN6.11 or higher) . The panel should appear in the list of Online Devices. After several seconds. Once you can see the device online. Once you can see the panel online. Select Transfer > Send to Panel to open the Send to Panel dialog. 2. 3. Once you have entered the IP address of the PC (acting as a Virtual NetLinx Master). Powering Up and Connecting the Panel (via TCP/IP) 1. you may transfer the files. To receive files from the panel. The progress of the transfer is indicated in the Status column of the Transfer Status Window. press the Reboot button on the System Connection Setup page to reboot the panel. 3.

This feature is primarily intended for use by graphic designers. 5. Double click on the icon to bring up the list of USB devices (you should see the AMX USB LAN LINK device in the list). the panel should appear in the online device tree. Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers TPD4 supports direct connection to G4 panels via USB.File Transfer Operations Receiving Files From The Panel 1. click on the Next buttons. 5. This is acceptable. Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers 3. The progress of the transfer is indicated in the Status column of the Transfer Status Window. panel. 2. 6. Press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button (below the touch screen) for 3 seconds to access the Setup page. In this situation. to allow them to create panel files and then test them on a panel without necessarily having access to a Master. you can use your PC's USB connection to connect directly to the panel. 7. 2. Select Transfer > Receive from Panel to open the Receive from Panel dialog. Select USB as the Master Connection (this selection causes all other fields in the Master Connection section become read-only). Power up the Panel without the USB cable connected to the panel. using your PC as a Virtual NetLinx Master. please follow the steps below to ensure a valid USB connection to the G4 panels: 1. 3. you are ready to connect to the USB port of the G4 panel. Press the Protected Setup button to access the Protected Setup page. You should see an USB icon show up in the System Tray. select the Properties button and then the Update 6. 3. Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers 2. This is done via the Virtual NetLinx Master connection in the Connect dialog (Transfer > Connect). apply power to the touch panel and verify that it is connected to the LAN via the TCP/IP connector on the rear (or side) of the panel (G4 panels only). select to continue the installation. for situations where the target panel is not connected to a NetLinx Master. When the Install Driver dialog does appear. listed as Virtual NetLinx Master. in the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialog TPDesign4 (v2. Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers If it is not already powered up and connected. 2. Driver button. If the Install Driver dialog doesn't appear automatically. Click the Receive button to initiate the transfer. Press the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page and press the Reboot button to reboot the 7. To configure the panel for Virtual NetLinx Master transfers via USB: 1. There are three basic steps to Virtual NetLinx Master USB file transfers: 1. The OS will complain about the fact that the driver you are installing/updating does not have a digital signature. 4.11 or higher) 243 . Press the System Connection button to access the System Connection Setup page. Normal Transfer or Full Clean) as desired. accepting all the default prompts. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the password (the default password is 1988). Plug in the USB cable into the G4 panel. 4. After installation is complete. 3. Select any Options (Smart Transfer. After several seconds. Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master USB Connection Installing the AMX USB Driver for G4 Touch Panels After installation of TPD4.

File Transfer Operations Once you can see the device online. Click the Receive button to initiate the transfer. The Virtual NetLinx Master connection allows G4 devices to directly connect to TPDesign4 instead of a physical NetLinx master for transfers. 2. Select Transfer > Send to Panel to open the Send to Panel dialog. Receiving Files From The Panel 1. 2. 3. you are ready to transfer files to/from the panel without the need for an intermediate master: Sending Files To the Panel 1. Select Transfer > Receive from Panel to open the Receive from Panel dialog. Powering Up and Connecting the Panel (via USB) 1. Normal Transfer or Full Clean) as desired. Select <Virtual NetLinx Master>[] from the Connection drop-down list. Select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog (or click the toolbar button). Select any Options (Smart Transfer. Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master USB Connection Once you have configured both the touch panel and TPD4 for Masterless USB Transfers. Once you can see the panel online. The panel should appear in the list of Online Devices. 2. Select Transfer > Send to Panel to open the Send To Panel dialog. you may transfer panel files. Connect the terminal end of the PSN6. 3. Normal Transfer or Full Clean) as desired. To receive files from the panel. 3. 2. Select any Options (Smart Transfer. Click the Send button to initiate the transfer. select Transfer > Receive From Panel. Use a (type-A) USB cable to connect the panel to an available USB port on your PC. then connect to the panel. The progress of the transfer is indicated in the Status column of the Transfer Status Window. 244 TPDesign4 (v2. The progress of the transfer is indicated in the Status column of the Transfer Status Window.5 power cable to the 12 VDC power connector on the rear or side (depending on the model) of the touch panel. Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers 1. First plug the USB cable into the PC. Allow several seconds after the panel is rebooted for it to appear in the Online Device list in the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialogs.11 or higher) . you may transfer panel files to and from the G4 device without the need for an intermediate NetLinx master.

This invokes the Local Area Connection Properties dialog (FIG. When the MVP-5200i device is connected to the computer. Right-click on the Network Connection that indicates "AMX USB Device Link". you must edit the properties of the TCP/IP interface of the connection itself. and select Properties from the context menu. Launch the Network Connections dialog (select Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications > Network Connections . 220 Local Area Connection Properties dialog TPDesign4 (v2. 219). FIG. via Windows Network Connections settings: 1. This driver utilizes Ethernet-over-USB. It is necessary to supply a static IP address for this LAN connection.11 or higher) 245 . FIG.FIG. To enter a static IP address for the connection. it should create a new LAN connection (see My Computer | My Network Places | View network connections). 219 Network Connections dialog 2. 220).File Transfer Operations MVP-5200i USB Driver The MVP-5200i utilizes a native RNDIS USB driver.

The static IP assigned to this connection should be on the same subnet as the IP address entered on the device Setup Pages (Protected Setup | System Settings | IP Settings | IP Address).File Transfer Operations 3. 221 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog 4. 221). 246 TPDesign4 (v2. This invokes the Internet Protocol (TCP/ IP) Properties dialog (FIG. 5.11 or higher) . and click on Properties. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP). Click OK to save your changes. and enter the desired (static) IP Address and Subnet Mask for the panel. Select Use the following IP address. FIG.

Select File > Import Touch Panel Template to open the Import Touch Panel Template dialog. containing a set of system pages and popup pages (FIG. Depending on the size of the template.VAT template files are created and exported using the VisualArchitect application.VAT) as well as TPD4 template files (*. FIG. 222).TPT). Once the template has been loaded. this could take several minutes. Working With the System Page Template The System Page Template is a set of pages. *. Select File > Open System Page Template to open the system page template.TPT template files are created and saved as templates in TPD4. *. To import a touch panel template file into TPD4: 1. When a VAT or TPT template file is imported. it is opened in TPD4 as a project file. popup pages and buttons that are pre-defined with functions that allow you to view/edit various panel and system parameters.TPT) to import into TPD4 for editing.VAT or *. copied and pasted just like any other TPD4 project. TPD4 automatically selects the template that matches the panel and resolution specified for the active project. 222 Example System Page Template TPDesign4 (v2. Locate and select a Touch Panel Template file (*. a Status dialog indicates the progress as the various component files are loaded. You will see the System Page Template open in the Workspace Navigator as a separate project folder. When you open the System Page Template. 2.VAT or *.Working With Templates Working With Templates Importing Template (*. The buttons and pages can be edited.11 or higher) 247 .TPT) Files TPD4 allows you to import VisualArchitect (VA) template files (*.

Keep in mind that if the System Page Template was opened as part of the Workspace. you may want to include the entire RGB Setup page in your project. "__RGBsetup"). Channel Port: Since System Page buttons require communication out of the panel to the master controller. Note that the System Page Templates all have names that begin with two underscores (i. and paste them into any page in your project. it is fully editable. the Reload last workspace option (in the Application tab of the Preferences dialog) will cause the application to attempt to open the (protected) System Page Template as part of the last opened workspace. you can edit function codes (and all other page and button parameters). The pages and the buttons they contain are not editable until they are copied out of the System Page Template folder. The double-underscore prefix indicates that the System Pages are intentionally locked.e. Once the System Page is pasted into your project. you only want to use some of the features on a System Page. In this case. and once these pages or buttons exist within your Project they can be modified as needed. The pages that make up the template cannot be modified directly. Alternatively. Channel Code: System Page buttons are each assigned a descriptive name as the Channel Code for easy identification. System Page buttons always use these settings: Address Port: System Page buttons which require communication from the master controller to the panel.setup port) by default. When these pages are pasted into a Project. Note that if you click on a button on a System Page. it is treated like any other page in your project. However. Address Code: System Page buttons are each assigned a descriptive name as the Address Code for easy identification. Once you copy the System Page into your project.e. TPD4 treats the System File Template as a password-protected file to avoid accidentally modifying the template pages directly. and pasted into a Project. The pages and popup pages included in the System Page Template are displayed in the Pages tab. Again. or copy/paste selected elements from a System Page into a page in your project. TPD4 will not allow you to save any Page using the doubleunderscore prefix. To avoid potential conflicts with the System Page Template. just like you would for any other page in the Project. In this case you will be presented with the Enter Access Password dialog. are always set to the reserved setup port (0 . you can copy/paste just the buttons you want out of a System Page. the Channel Port is always set to the reserved setup port (0 . the Address and Channel Port/Code assignments work differently than the buttons you create.e. since they always retain their function codes. you may decide that rather than pasting an entire system page into your project. For example. This is to protect the original System Page Template pages from being edited. and the name is (automatically) changed to use a single-underscore prefix.setup port) by default. Since there is not a password to unlock the file. You can open the System Page Template (via the File menu) and copy entire pages or particular elements from a page. System Pages and the buttons they contain will remain fully functional when they are copied into your project. Note that each System Template page has a descriptive name that begins with two underscores (i. and them paste them into your Project. TPD4 will not allow you to create and save a page with the two underscore prefix. Copying/Pasting Entire System Pages into a Project You can add System Pages to your project by copying and pasting. the name is automatically changed to a single underscore (i.11 or higher) .Working With Templates The System Page template is a resource that you can use to copy/paste entire System Pages into your project. To copy an entire System Page out of the System Page Template folder and paste it into a project: Select File > System Page Template to open the System Page Template folder as a separate project folder in the Workspace Navigator window (Pages tab). "__RGB setup"). once the System Page Template is copied into a Project. the only option is to open the System Page Template as a Read-Only file. You can edit or modify the page and contained buttons. "_RGB setup"). just like any other page in the Project. 248 TPDesign4 (v2. if necessary. The System Page Template Pages are all intentionally locked.

Shift. Use the keyboard and keypad System Popup Pages anytime you need to add text/numeric entry functions to your Project. Similar to the keypad popup page. and the buttons they contain are locked for editing.to a single-underscore prefix (i. Like the other System Pages in the System Page Template. You cannot cut a System Page out of the System Page Template. You can use these keyboards and keypads in your Project without having to build the keys or assign the function codes. Once you bring the keyboard/keypad popup pages into your Project. and International functionality. The pages in the System Page Template. Note that once the System Page is pasted into the project..11 or higher) 249 . • keyboardPrivate: This is a more secure version of the keyboard popup page. Select the target project and select Edit > Paste (or use the Paste toolbar button). you may want to use just the Red. This is generally used as the primary standard keyboard. the System Page name automatically changes from a double. However. TPD4 allows you to copy/paste specific items from a System Page into an existing page in your project. and they will be fully functional. Select the System Page (or pages) that you want to copy (in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator). Copying/Pasting System Page Elements into a Project page In some cases. The System Popup Pages include: • keyboard: This is a full 63-key keyboard. where only asterisks are displayed when you type.Working With Templates 1. these popup pages and their contained buttons are locked to editing. you would simply select and copy that set of bargraph buttons from the RGBsetup System Page and paste them right into an existing page in your project. for text/numeral entries made on the panel. In this case. . Once the System Page button(s) are pasted into your project. :. Simply copy/paste these popup pages into your Project. allowing text/numeric entries on the panel. This indicates that the page will be treated like a "normal" project page from this point on. Double-click the copied System Page to open it in a Design View window. Working with System Page Keyboards and Keypads One of the most helpful features of the System Page Template is the set of keyboard and keypad System Popup Pages it contains. you can edit the associated function codes (and all other button parameters). until they are pasted into a Project. For example. since they always retain their function codes. Clear. you may have a need for a particular element or set of elements in one of the System Page Templates in your project. including Caps Lock. Green and Blue Level bargraphs into a page. 2. This is a more secure version of the keypad popup page. 3. Similar to the keypadExtend popup page. they can be modified just like any other button in the project. for use with telephone connections. Select Edit > Copy (or use the Copy toolbar button). Abort and Done buttons). while you may not necessarily want to include the entire RGBsetup System Page as a page in your project. once the copied buttons are pasted into a page in your project. • keypad: • keypadExtend: • keypadPrivate: • keypadTele: This is standard 10-key numeric keypad (also includes Backspace. TPDesign4 (v2. but includes asterisk and pound symbols additional symbols. and edit the page and contained buttons like you would any other page in the project. /. the popup pages and all of their buttons can be edited just like any other popup pages and buttons in your Project.e. In addition to copying/pasting entire System Page Template pages into your project. "_RGBsetup"). System Page buttons will remain fully functional when they are copied into your project. '). but with several additional symbols (-. where only asterisks are displayed when you type. if necessary.

then enter the text for each button in the States tab of the Properties Control window. containing options for various system identification information (IP Settings. This page contains options to allow you change any passwords associated with this Project. etc). System Page Template Reference The System Page Template is a set of pages. Copy and Paste the entire Keyboard or Keypad Popup Page into an existing project: Select the appropriate System Template Popup Page in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). This page contains a Progress Bar. Video/RGB Adjustment. Time Adjustment. Panel Volume and Default Panel Sounds . Revision. However. Use the Time page to set the system clock. Master Connection. When you open the System Page Template. Copy and Paste only selected elements from a Keyboard or Keypad Popup Page into an existing project: Open a Keyboard or Keypad Popup Page. containing the following pages. then select the target Project in the Workspace Navigator and select Edit > Paste. etc). you won't have to do any additional work to make the keyboard/keypad work on the panel. select Edit > Copy. Dealer ID. popup pages and buttons that are pre-defined with functions that allow you to view/edit various panel and system parameters. Use the elements in this page to store information specific to your Project (File Name. The pasted popup page is automatically pasted to the Popup Pages folder for the target Project. • Protected: • Protected ID: • Protected Password: • Protected Secondary ID: This page contains options to allow you to apply password protection to a secondary (wireless) connection. This page allows you to match the outgoing screen resolution on an NXP-TPI/4 to the connected touch panel.single or double-beep). TPD4 automatically selects the template that matches the panel and resolution specified for the active project. Bus Blink.11 or higher) . copy/paste the system page (or just those elements that you want to use in your project) into your Project. Panel Information. Baud Rate. This is the Protected Setup page. The Setup page allows you to set several basic setup options (Panel Timeout. Select File > Open System Page Template to open the system page template. Job Name. Panel Information. these popup pages and buttons are fully editable. used to indicate the progress of file transfer operations. This page also contains buttons that have page flips to other related System Pages (Project Information. • Time: 250 TPDesign4 (v2. Use the elements in this page to store information specific to the target panel for this Project. remember that once pasted into your Project. System Page Template Reference • Battery: • Calibrate: • Calibrate Test: • Panel: • Progress: • Project: The Battery Base page allows you to configure various battery and power related options. To use these pages in your project. This is the Project Information page. You will see the System Page Template open in the Workspace Navigator as a separate project folder. Version. including one protected password (which only displays asterisks when the password is being entered for additional security). and to specify how time and date values will be displayed on the panel. etc).Working With Templates There are two ways to add a keyboard or keypad to your Project: 1. • Protected Sensors: • Resolution: • Setup: This page contains options to allow you to configure light and motion sensors on the panel. which contains various setup options that are not usually exposed to the end-user (Device Number. Protected Setup). The elements on this page allow you to reset the vertical and horizontal touch points on the LCD. The elements on this page allow you to confirm that the calibration was done properly. Either way. Touch Input Select. This is the Protected ID page. 2. and copy only the buttons/keys that you plan to use into an existing page in a Project.

Input and Format). Contrast. where only asterisks are displayed when you type. Version and Status text-area buttons. Clear. • RGB Setup: • Video Setup: • Volume: System Page Template Popup Pages The System Page Template also includes several popup pages: Keyboard: This is a full 63-key keyboard. Warning Message: This is the Battery Base warning message. Full Screen Edit. save changes and other textarea buttons relating to video sources (Version.) • RGB Full Screen: This page contains options to allow you to adjust various aspects of the RGB signal (Red. This page also contains a clock adjust button for setting the system clock. Undo changes. This page contains all of the items in the RGB Full Screen System Page. The options in this page allow you to configure the master volume settings for the panel. for use with telephone connections. '). but with several additional symbols (-. . where only asterisks are displayed when you type. /.Working With Templates System Page Template Reference (Cont. Save Settings. including Caps Lock. plus buttons for returning to default settings. TPDesign4 (v2. Green and Blue levels. Keyboard Virtual: For use with Computer Control buttons to simulate the keyboard on the PC. undo changes. Abort and Done buttons). The Video Setup page contains options for setting/adjusting the video sources coming from the NXP-TPI/4 (Brightness. KeypadPrivate: This is a more secure version of the keypad popup page. Shift. KeyboardPrivate: This is a more secure version of the keyboard popup page. and several other buttons to allow a return to the Default RGB values. and International functionality. Keypad: This is standard 10-key numeric keypad (also includes Backspace.11 or higher) 251 . but includes asterisk and pound symbols additional symbols. Horizontal and Vertical Size/Position and Tracking). for text/numeral entries made on the panel. Status. plus buttons to indicate video source slot assignments (which relate to video sources coming from the NXP-TPI/4). KeypadTele: Similar to the keypadExtend popup page. Saturation and Hue). KeypadExtend: Similar to the keypad popup page. This is generally used as the primary standard keyboard.. :.

According to the table there are only 6 resolutions. This dialog indicates errors and warnings relating to the G4 PanelBuilder Template (*. Suggestion: Create a simple TPD4 file showing the desired output. What navigation model are you going to use? You know you're going to have the required template elements but are some of your menus so complex they will require sub-menus? What devices and features will the template include? Consider using some optional template elements. Both examples are situations where you might consider making specific templates for those panel types. etc. then make copies of it.TPT) file. based on the established elements. Images do not have to be full size. Select Page > Copy Image To Clipboard. G4 PanelBuilder looks for navigations with the name. Then open the resource manager and select Paste. The menu option to export a project as a G4 PanelBuilder template will be disabled for R-4 projects. On the other hand.TPT) file that will be created from this project. in fact AMX templates utilize a 1/4 screen size to reduce the template file size. 4 items. it is suggested you create one for each resolution totaling 6.11 or higher) . You are ready to begin restructuring the elements to fit your needs. Now rename the new image to the appropriate element name. [nav#navName]pageName. TPD4 does not support the creation of G4 PanelBuilder templates for R-4 remote devices (since R-4 remotes must implement navigation elements in the form of pages in order for the Back and Up/Down buttons on the remote to function correctly). Also. 3. Select File > Export As G4 PanelBuilder Template to open the Export As G4 PanelBuilder Template dialog. This method allows you to modify and delete thus the pages are more likely to be similar. The key for creating your own elements naming conventions. You cannot create a "drill-down" style of navigation with G4 PanelBuilder. Then. 1. Any number of template files (*. Your navigation menus will always be on top of your Devices. You must have a minimum of 1 Placeholder element. 252 TPDesign4 (v2. Suggestion: Mock up the interface in TPD4 by opening the corresponding page and display all applicable popups. Create the preview images for the elements. popups and buttons. named in a manner that G4 PanelBuilder will understand the relationship between all of the elements. Things to remember: You must have a minimum of 1 Navigation element. You must have a main preview image ("[preview]. Start with the Device and Navigation elements first and the Placeholder elements last. G4 PanelBuilder customizes the TPD4 file based on the navigation flow you designed. Careful consideration will reveal the type of navigation you will need. the minimum number to make a template family.Working With Templates Exporting Your Project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template TPD4 allows you to export your TPD4 project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template (*.jpg" or "[preview]. Make sure they do not conflict with each other. 2.png"). G4 PanelBuilder requires that navigation elements in a template be implemented as pop-ups. A G4 PanelBuilder template is a TPD4 file complete with pages.. but many more panel types.). The resolutions and panel types are provided here. Suggestion: Start with the most complex Device element first. Doing this gives you a starting point to begin looking at how to modify the TPD4 file to create a template. You should spend some time deciding what you want the panel to do. where the Pixels Per Inch is higher than the CV12 and the MVP-7500's limited color depth.TPT) can be created to constitute a template family. create several different variations of Navigation and Sub-Navigations (3 items. You only need one template per resolution but you should consider instances such as the MVP-8400..

FIG.Example G4 PanelBuilder Template TPDesign4 (v2. Repeat the design for other resolutions. Things to remember: You can use TPD4's Save As Other Panel Type when appropriate or as a starting point.11 or higher) 253 . The pages are highlighted in the color of the element they represent (FIG.TPT file is created and a list of errors and warnings are displayed at this time. do a generate. 223 TPD4 Workspace . A . 223).Working With Templates 4. if applicable. Leave the "Job Name" in the Panel Properties the same for all related TPD4 files. this is the basis of a template family. After you have completed the template design. If necessary you can build the ones you currently need and address the other resolutions as they present themselves. 5. Below is the workspace for TPD4. Not all resolutions have to be done at once.

Working With Templates G4 PanelBuilder Templates . The chart below demonstrates these rules (FIG. Only one of the pages or popups in A Navigation element can contain an Info button. Consists of at least one popup but can contain multiple popups.The name of the Navigation as it will appear within G4 PanelBuilder. [item]buttonName buttonName . The Info button contains the page flip information for displaying the Navigation element and can contain an optional icon image.Required Template Elements The template must have at least one of each of the following elements: Navigation Elements This is the main menu where most of your navigation selections are made. Element Specific Conventions: [nav#navName]pageName navName . 254 TPDesign4 (v2.This is the button name used in the generated TP4 project.This is the button name used in the generated TP4 project. Popups in a Navigation element can contain one or more Title buttons. 224 G4 PanelBuilder Templates . Item buttons are ordered within the Navigation element in order of left to right then top to bottom. The text will be replaced with the name given to the Navigation in the generated TP4 project. buttonName. [title]buttonName buttonName . [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouse-over element description in the toolbox. 224). pageName . The popups in the Navigation element must contain at lest one item button that will be filled with navigation information.This is unused and the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.Required Template Elements When designing a template it is important to remember the rules that govern elements and their relation with the templates. Cannot contain any pages Only one can be displayed at a time.11 or higher) .The base page name that will be used in the generated TP4 project. FIG.

The base page name used in the generated TP4 project.The button name will be used in the generated TP4 project. TPDesign4 (v2. pageName .This is the button name used in the generated TP4 project. [title]buttonName buttonName . buttonName .11 or higher) 255 . The Info button contains the page flip information for displaying the Placeholder element and can also contain an optional icon image.This is unused and the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. buttonName . [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouse-over element description in the toolbox. Only one Placeholder element can be displayed at a time. buttonName .Working With Templates navName .This is the button name used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName .The name of the Navigation as it will appear within G4 PanelBuilder. The pages and popups in a Placeholder element can contain one or more Title buttons.This is unused and the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. Element Specific Conventions: [placeholder#placeholderName]pageName placeholderName . Only one page or popup within a Placeholder element can contain an Info button.The base page name that will be used in the generated TP4 project. Consists of one page and may have optional popups. Placeholder Elements This is a blank device element that allows you to represent unique items in the diagram area.The name of the Placeholder element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. The text is replaced with the name given to the Placeholder element in the generated TP4 project. pageName .

Optional Template Elements Your templates can have any of the following: Mode Elements This element is generally used for designating "modes" your system will work in. pageName .The button name used in the generated TP4 project. Element Specific Conventions: [mode#modeName]pageName modeName . Only one Mode element can be displayed at a time.11 or higher) . Mode elements can be associated with rooms. There are rules that govern all template elements (FIG. [item]buttonName buttonName . Consists of a single page and can contain multiple popups. 225): FIG." Additionally. Only one page in a Mode element can contain an Info button.e. i. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox.Unused.Working With Templates G4 PanelBuilder Templates . the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.The name of the Mode as it will appear in G4 PanelBuilder. 256 TPDesign4 (v2. "Video Conference Mode" or "Presentation Mode.Optional Template Elements There are required elements when developing templates but G4 PanelBuilder also supports a series of optional elements that will make your templates more robust. Item buttons are ordered within the Mode element by left-to-right then top-to-bottom.The base page name used in the generated TP4 project. The page in the Mode element must contain at least one Item button that contains the navigation information. The Info button contains the page flip information for displaying the Mode element and can also contain an optional icon image. buttonName .. 225 G4 PanelBuilder Templates .

Cannot contain pages.The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project.The name of the Splash element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. [item]buttonName buttonName . buttonName . Sub-Navigation Elements This element is a submenu and can occur on screen with Navigation elements. buttonName . buttonName .e.Unused. i.Unused. The text within the Title buttons are replaced with the name given to the Sub-Navigation in the generated TP4 project. TPDesign4 (v2. whose text is replaced with the name given to the Mode in the generated TP4 project.The button name used in the generated TP4 project..Unused. navName .The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project.The button name used in the generated TP4 project. Cannot contain pages. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. pageName . pageName . Consists of at least one popup and can contain multiple popups.The button name used in the generated TP4 project.Working With Templates Popups in a Mode element can contain one or more Title buttons. buttonName . the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. buttonName . Popups in the Sub-Navigation element must contain at least one Item button that will contain navigation information. The popups in a Sub-Navigation element can contain one or more Title buttons.The name of the Sub-Navigation element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder pageName . modeName . Splash Elements This element is a popup that can contain an image. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.The name of the Mode as it will appear in G4 PanelBuilder. buttonName .The button name used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName .The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project.11 or higher) 257 . corporate logo.The name of the Sub-Navigation element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder pageName . Element Specific Conventions: [splash#splashName]pageName splashName . Only one of the popups in a Sub-Navigation element can contain an Info button. [title]buttonName buttonName . Element Specific Conventions: [subnav#navName]pageName navName . Item buttons are ordered in the Navigation element left-to-right then top-to-bottom. [title]buttonName buttonName . Consists of at least one popup and can contain multiple popups.The button name used in the generated TP4 project.The button name used in the generated TP4 project. which contains the page flip information for displaying the Sub-Navigation element and can also contain an optional icon image.The button name used in the generated TP4 project.The base page name used in the generated TP4 project.

consult AMX templates where we list the most commonly used devices.The base page name used in the generated TP4 project. 258 TPDesign4 (v2.Unused. deviceName . Popups in a Splash element can contain one or more Title buttons. buttonName . there can only be one Feature element in a panel design. [title]buttonName buttonName . this button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.Unused. this button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. buttonName .The base page name used in the generated TP4 project. Consists of one page and can contain multiple popups.The name of the feature as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. The text within the buttons is replaced with the name given to the Splash element in the generated TP4 project. pageName . [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox.The name of the Splash element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder.Working With Templates Only one of the popups in a Splash element can contain an Info button.e. buttonName . buttonName .The name of the Device as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. buttonName . Device Elements This element is the actual device used. The text within the buttons is replaced with the name given to the Device element in the generated TP4 project. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.Unused. Feature Elements This element resembles the Device element.The button name used in the generated TP4 project. However. pageName .The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. Only one Device element can be displayed at a time.The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. splashName . [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox.Unused.11 or higher) . i.The button name used in the generated TP4 project. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.The name of the Device as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. Only one Feature element can be displayed at a time. Consists of one page and can contain multiple popups. pageName . Only one page or popup in a Device element can contain an Info button which contains the page flip information for displaying the Device element and can also contain an optional icon image. which contains the page flip information for displaying the Splash element and can also contain an optional icon image. Element Specific Conventions: [device#deviceName]pageName deviceName . the "Clean Panel" feature. [title]buttonName buttonName . Element Specific Conventions: [feature#featureName]pageName featureName . buttonName .The button name used in the generated TP4 project. Pages and popups in a Device element can contain one or more Title buttons. For reference. pageName ..The button name used in the generated TP4 project.

the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.Unused. Sub-Feature Elements This element represents the "universal" features that appear on many pages.The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName . Only one of the pages or popups in a Sub-Feature element can contain an Info button. buttonName . whose text is replaced with the name given to the Sub-Feature element in the generated TP4 project. whose text is replaced with the name given to the Feature in the generated TP4 project. which contains the page flip information for displaying the Feature element and can also contain an optional icon image. Show any popups for the linked Sub-Feature.The button name that is used in the generated TP4 project. featureName . [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox.The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName .e.Unused.The name of the Sub-Feature element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. i. Perform the standard page flip to the page for that element.The name of the feature as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. subFeatureName . [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox. Cannot contain pages. The pages and popups in the Feature element can contain one or more Title buttons. buttonName . Rules for Navigating a G4 PanelBuilder Template In addition to the template requirements and required elements. pageName .The button name that is used in the generated TP4 project." Consists of at least one popup and can contain multiple popups. TPDesign4 (v2.Unused. which contains the page flip information for displaying the Sub-Feature element and can also contain an optional icon image.The button name that is used in the generated TP4 project. pageName . Feature or Placeholder element from a Navigation element: Hide all popups on the page for that element. pageName ..The name of the Sub-Feature element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. Show any popups for the element.Unused.The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. When navigating to a Device.The button name that is used in the generated TP4 project.Working With Templates Only one page or popup in a Feature element can contain an Info button. Show the Navigation element that is linked to the element.11 or higher) 259 . buttonName . when applicable. Popups in a Sub-Feature element can contain one or more Title buttons. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. [title]buttonName buttonName . "volume. there are rules for navigating the templates and template wide conventions you need to heed. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. [title]buttonName buttonName . Element Specific Conventions: [subFeature#subFeatureName]pageName subFeatureName . buttonName .

i. The main preview image should be named '[preview].. If the text on a button to be replaced does not contain '[text]" then it is unchanged.A template can contain as many buttons named "[panelTitle]" as necessary. then show the Sub-Navigation element that is linked to the element." There can only be one preview image per element.e. Show the Navigation element that is linked to the Sub-Navigation element or chain.Working With Templates Any Sub-Navigation elements that may have been currently displayed will be hidden. If the Info button is omitted. if not all popup pages should be initially shown. The element previews should follow the same naming conventions as their page prefixes. Show any popups for the element. When navigating to a Device. Info buttons are optional and only have to be included within an element if the order the popup pages is shown is important.jpg. Feature or Placeholder element from a Sub-Navigation element: Hide all popups on the page for that element.The string "[text]" is required on the button wherever text is to be replaced in the output file.jpg" (or . they are replaced with the "Job Name" of the panel. when applicable. G4 PanelBuilder Templates . the Sub-Navigation is not shown. For Sub-Navigations the user must set "Hide On Action" to No. Perform the standard page flip to the page for that element.11 or higher) . Panel Title . Show any popups for the linked Sub-Feature. Preview Images . popup pages are shown in alphabetical order.A template must contain a main preview image and can also contain a preview image for each element. The string "[text]" allows you to prepend/postpend text with characters. Otherwise.Template Wide Conventions Text Replacement . "[device#DVD]. or if an icon is used on the corresponding Navigation or Sub-Navigation button. 260 TPDesign4 (v2.png).

Single Example [feature#US Weather Maps]US Weather Maps Example [mode#Mode 3]Mode 3 Example [nav#Nav 3]Nav 3 Description [mode#Mode x] x = the number of mode options Description [nav#Nav 3]Nav 3 x = the number of navigation options G4 Computer Control [device#Computer Control]G4CC TPDesign4 (v2. G4 PanelBuilder Templates .Dual HVAC .Dual Volume .Dual [device#Volume . Errors could occur if the elements do not match from template to template.AMX Naming Conventions AMX urges you to use the following naming convention to allow for portability between templates.Single Feature Names US Weather Maps Mode Names Mode X Navigation Names Nav X Example [device#Audio Conference]Audio Conference [device#Cable Box]Cable Box [device#Camera]Camera [device#Cassette Deck]Cassette Deck [device#CD]CD [device#Document Camera]Document Camera [device#Door]Door [device#DSS]DSS [device#DVD]DVD [device#DVR]DVR [device#HVAC .Dual [device#HVAC .Working With Templates G4 PanelBuilder Templates .Dual]HVAC .Single]HVAC .Single Lift Light Zone Monitor Pool Screen Security Shade Slide Projector Spa Switcher size Radio TV VCR Video Projector Volume .11 or higher) 261 .AMX Naming Convention Device Names Audio Conference Cable Box Camera Cassette Deck CD Document Camera Door DSS DVD DVR HVAC .Single]Volume .Single [device#Lift]Lift [device#Light Zone]Light Zone [device#Monitor]Monitor [device#Pool]Pool [device#Screen]Screen [device#Security]Security [device#Shade]Shade [device#Slide Projector]Slide Projector [device#Spa]Spa [device#Switcher size]Switcher size [device#Radio]Radio [device#TV]TV [device#VCR]VCR [device#Video Projector]Video Projector [device#Volume -Dual]Volume .

11 or higher) . VA Templates . These two buttons are named [scrollbartop] and [scrollbarbottom]. Also. Both examples are situations where you might consider making specific templates for those panel types. popups and buttons. VA Templates .Working With Templates Exporting Your Project as a VisualArchitect Template TPD4 allows you to export your TPD4 project as a VisualArchitect Template (*.Navigations as Pages TPD4 modifies the export of panel projects as VisualArchitect templates to allow navigation elements to be implemented as pages instead of popup pages for panel projects of device class "remote". Then. VisualArchitect customizes the TPD4 file based on the navigation flow you designed. where the Pixels Per Inch is higher than the CV12 and the MVP-7500's limited color depth. A VisualArchitect template is a TPD4 file complete with pages. but 12 different panel types.VAT) file. Any number of template files (*. named in a manner that VisualArchitect will understand the relationship between all of the elements. Select File > Export As VisualArchitect Template to open the Export As VisualArchitect Template dialog. it is suggested you create one for each resolution totaling 6. TPD4 limits navigation elements of device class "panel" to pop-up pages only. based on the established elements.VAT) file that will be created from this project. 262 TPDesign4 (v2.TPT) can be created to constitute a template family. You only need one template per resolution but you should consider instances such as the MVP-8400. This dialog indicates errors and warnings relating to the VisualArchitect Template (*.Logical Page Scroll Bar Elements Logical pages contain two button elements that are used to implement a scrollbar. The resolutions and panel types are as follows: Resolution 640x480 800x600 Panel Type • MVP-7500 • TPI4 • MVP-8400 • CA12 • CV12 • TPI4 800x480 • CV7 • CV10 • CV10/PB 1024x768 • CV15 • CA15 • TPI4 1280x1024 1280x768 • TPI4 • CV17 According to the table there are only 6 resolutions. the minimum number to make a template family.

or placeholder implementation.Logical Page Info Element Logical pages must contain a [logicalinfobtn] button element that will be used to identify the first page of a logical page group. Each logical page must contain one of each of these elements.Working With Templates VA Templates . These two buttons are named [logicalupbtn] and [logicaldownbtn]. There should be one and only one [logicalinfobtn] button element for each logical page group. A logical page that is itself the only page of a logical page group must still contain a [logicalinfobtn] button element containing at least one page flip (to itself).List Box Page Up and Down Elements List box pages contain two button elements that will be used to implement list box single up/down operations. These two buttons are named [listboxupbtn] and [listboxdownbtn]. TPDesign4 (v2. VA Templates . VA Templates .11 or higher) 263 . Each list box page must contain one of each of these elements. starting with itself. This button should contain the list of individual logical pages belonging to the logical page collection. feature. A [logicalinfobtn] button element must be present in addition to a [info] button element that might be required to indicate that the logical page belongs to a device.Logical Page Up and Down Elements Logical pages contain two button elements that will be used to implement page flips within the logical page group.

Working With Templates 264 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .

Editor Selection: The items in this tab allow you associate external editing programs with image and sound files that can be accessed through TPD4.11 or higher) 265 . Reload last workspace: This option will reopen the last panel file and the pages (including popup pages) that were open when the application was closed (assuming that a panel file was open when the application was closed). 226 shows the Application tab of the Preferences dialog: FIG.Application tab The items in the Application tab include: Startup Prompt for system generated name: This option will default the checkbox for system generated filenames (in the New Project Wizard) to the checked position. 226 Preferences Dialog . Use the Customize dialog to customize the TPD4 GUI.Program Preferences Program Preferences Overview Select Edit > Preferences to open the Preferences dialog. "Directories: The items in this tab allow you to specify default directories for Panel files. Undo/Redo Support and Miscellaneous program settings. system generated filenames are not generated. This dialog contains four tabs: Application: The items in this tab relate to Startup.Application tab FIG. Appearance: The items in this tab relate to the Design View window. Backup copies and the image library directory. With this option unchecked. where you can set general program preferences for TPD4. although the data that makes them up is still saved. Preferences Dialog . TPDesign4 (v2.

the tool is reverted to the Selection Tool at the completion of every button draw operation. 266 TPDesign4 (v2. if a name conflict occurs. Retain selected tool: This option locks the selected tool (Selection Tool or Button Draw Tool). which is a much slower operation. State Manager. but will take effect the next time you open a project file.11 or higher) . Reset: Click to reset all options in this tab to their default settings.Program Preferences If the System Page Template was opened as part of the Workspace. The image cache size value specifies the amount of memory allocated for images used in displaying buttons (in the Design View. without saving any changes. If an image is not found in the in-memory cache. Click Apply to apply any changes. Image Cache Size (MB): Use the up and down arrows to adjust the size of the image cache (default = 8 MB). With this option unchecked. Expand Workspace Navigator: This option will expand the tree structure (in the Workspace Navigator . Increase the cache size to keep more images in memory (potentially. it must be loaded again from disc. Note that this option does not take effect immediately on pressing Apply. In this case you will be presented with the Enter Access Password dialog. the Reload last workspace option will cause the application to attempt to open the (passwordprotected) System Page Template as part of the last opened workspace. depending on their size) to speed up loading and displaying those images. the user will be asked to resolve the name conflict. Use "Copy of" prefixes: This option automatically adds the prefix "Copy of" to any pasted pages and popup pages. Since there is not a password to unlock the file. Click Cancel to close the Preferences dialog. Miscellaneous Flush Closed Pages on Save: When enabled. by design the only option is to open the System Page Template as a Read-Only file. and Button Preview). when the project is saved successfully (default = enabled). Warning Messages When deleting resources in use: Click to receive a warning from TPD4 when you attempt to delete resources that are currently being used by the open project. With this option unchecked. Reset All: Click to reset all options in all tabs to their default settings. this option flushes system memory of any pages that were previously opened but now closed.Pages tab) on application startup. Create backup copy: This option saves a backup copy of the panel file to the backup folder every time you perform a save operation. Click OK to save your changes and close the Preferences dialog.

Because there are variations in dots per inch measurements among panels and among computer monitors. Default = enabled.Program Preferences Preferences Dialog . TPDesign4 (v2. most 21" monitors typically have between a 19. This number should represent the diagonal measurement of the visible portion of the monitor or of the space occupied by a fullscreen image. Auto Stack New Windows: This setting causes all page windows to stack directly on top of the last active (selected) page window. you must first specify their monitor's visible size (in the Monitor Size field . To use this option.Appearance tab FIG.see below). Fit Width.11 or higher) 267 . For example. and you want to work with multiple pages without cascading them (which could result in part of the page window being outside of the viewable area). This setting does not affect the zoom setting for pages that are already open. Use this option if you are working on a resolution or zoom setting that takes up most or all of your screen area. or select the zoom setting (including Fit Page. as opposed to the monitor's overall diagonal size.5" and 20" viewable area. You can also manually set the zoom factor on any page or popup page by selecting the page and using the Zoom Toolbar. Fit Height) from the drop-down list. Once of the Initial Zoom options is called Actual Size. this option allows you to see how large a page will appear when actually displayed on the panel. Monitor Size: Use this field to specify the size of the visible portion of the monitor that your pages will actually be displayed on (see Initial Zoom and Note above).Appearance tab The items in the Appearance tab include: Window Initial Zoom: Click the down arrow to open a drop-down list of the zoom settings that can be applied as the default initial zoom setting for all new Design View windows. Click the down arrow to open a palette used to set the default color for the gutter on all new Design View windows. where you can either use the zoom in and out icons to zoom in/out (in 25% increments). Gutter Color: The Gutter is the area around the outer edge of the Design View windows. 227 shows the Appearance tab of the Preferences dialog: FIG. 227 Preferences Dialog .

Dashed Line or Dots). The options are Light. the default setting is 8. Custom Colors: If Custom was selected as the Style (see above). the Custom Colors option is enabled (see below). and in the Button Preview when a state is transparent. Grid Color: Click the down arrow to open a palette used to set the default color for the grid (if enabled) on all new Design View windows. shades and/or colors can facilitate viewing and working with graphics. Transparency Transparent colors in TPDesign4 are represented by a checkerboard pattern. Grid Grid Style: Select from the drop-down list of styles that the grid can be displayed in (Line. The range is 4 . Reset: Click to reset all options in this tab to their default settings. If Custom is selected. 268 TPDesign4 (v2. The snap tolerance represents the number of pixels within which objects in the Design View window will "snap" to the nearest grid line (applicable only when the Snap To Grid option is enabled. Click Cancel to close the Preferences dialog.11 or higher) . Small. via the Button Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar). Dark and Custom. This set of options allow you to modify the way that the transparency checkerboard appears. without saving any changes. Click Apply to apply any changes. Size: Click the down arrow to open a drop-down list of available checkerboard sizes. Grid Size: Use the up/down arrows to set the default grid size (measured in pixels). The Transparency checkerboard is visible on pages and popup pages that are transparent. Snap Tolerance: Use the up/down arrows to specify the snap tolerance for the grid. Style: Click the down arrow to open a drop-down list of available checkerboard styles that can be used to represent transparency. in the State Manager when a state is transparent. then you can specify a custom color combination for the checkerboard by selecting from these two drop-down lists. changing the checkerboard style to different sizes.Program Preferences The Auto Stack and Initial Zoom settings are retained the next time you launch the program. Reset All: Click to reset all options in all tabs to their default settings. In certain situations. Medium. Click OK to save your changes and close the Preferences dialog.255. Medium and Large. The options are Tiny.

Temp folder location: Use this field to set the location of the folder TPD4 uses for any temp files. Click Apply to apply any changes.) to open the Browse For Folder dialog.Directories tab The items in the Directories tab include: Default Directories Panels: This text box displays the directory that is currently set as the default directory for all Panel (or project) files (*. In these situations the Temp folder cannot be changed since it is being actively used. Click the browse button (. Backup copies: This text box displays the directory that is currently set as the default directory for all *. If you either have a panel open or a transfer in progress the Temp Folder Location field is disabled. without saving any changes.) to open the Browse For Folder dialog. This field is re-enabled once all panels are closed and transfers are completed. Reset: Click to reset all options in the Directories tab to their default settings.TP4 Backup files.Directories tab FIG. 228 shows the Directories tab of the Preferences dialog: FIG..11 or higher) 269 . TPDesign4 (v2.. Click the browse button (. Reset All: Click to reset all options in all tabs to their default settings.Program Preferences Preferences Dialog .TP4). Click OK to save your changes and close the Preferences dialog.. where you can navigate to an alternative folder. This feature accommodates the potential for large projects which need an especially large amount of temporary disk space. where you can navigate to an alternative folder. 228 Preferences Dialog .. Click Cancel to close the Preferences dialog.

Click the down arrow to select either Image Editors or Sound Editors from the drop-down list. and disassociate it from image or sound files in TPD4.EXE and file path. Once you have associated an external program to image and/or sound editor. by filename (*. you can edit image and files by selecting the file in either the Images or Sounds tab of the Resource Manager and clicking the Edit button.11 or higher) . 229 shows the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog: FIG.Lists all external image or sound editing programs (depending on the Editor Type selected) that have been added.Editor Selection tab FIG. The items in the Editor Selection tab include: Editor Type menu .Program Preferences Preferences Dialog . Editors table . to accommodate in-place editing of the images and sounds used in your Project. Remove Editor button . 229 Preferences Dialog .With an editor selected (in the Editors list).Editor Selection tab The options in the Editor Selection tab allow you to associate external programs of your choice with image and sound files. 270 TPDesign4 (v2. click this button to remove it from the list. The Default column indicates which of the programs is currently set as the default editor.Click to add either an image or a sound editing program to the Editors list (depending on the Editor Type selected). Add Editor button .

this option is selected. Number of Undo Levels: Use the up/down arrows to change the number of undo actions allowed (default = 500). TPDesign4 (v2. Change selection on Undo: When enabled. this option is selected. Click Cancel to close the Preferences dialog.Program Preferences Preferences Dialog . the program will always display the page(s) affected by an undo operation. that page will automatically be reopened to show the button that was affected at the point that the Undo is performed. By default. By default. Click Apply to apply any changes. without saving any changes. 230 shows the Undo/Redo tab of the Preferences dialog: FIG.Undo/Redo tab The items in the Undo/Redo tab include: Undo / Redo Support Enable the Undo system: This option enables/disables the ability to undo actions. Pressing OK or Accept after enabling/disabling the undo system will result in a clearing of the undo/redo history. 230 Preferences Dialog . Show affected pages on Undo: With this option enabled. Reset: Click to reset all options in this tab to their default settings. Enable the Redo system: This option enables/disables the ability to redo actions. this option will automatically change the selection so that the item(s) affected by the Undo / Redo action are selected. even they have been closed since that action was performed. For example.11 or higher) 271 . if you changed a button property on a button that exists on a page that has been closed.Undo/Redo tab FIG. Click OK to save your changes and close the Preferences dialog. Reset All: Click to reset all options in all tabs to their default settings.

. Click the Browse button (.) to locate and select the desired program's executable (. Note that you can associate multiple editor programs with image files. Adding an External Editing Program for Sound Files Use the options in the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog to associate one or more image editing programs with image files in TPD4 projects. Select Edit > Preferences to open the Preferences dialog. Note that you can associate multiple editor programs with image files. and open the Editor Selection tab (FIG. in the Open dialog.EXE) file. Click the Add Editor (+) button to access the Choose Editor dialog. 231). Click OK in the Choose Editor dialog to add the selected program to the Editors list. 2. 2. 231 Preferences dialog . you have the option (in the Choose Editor dialog) to set the default image editor. 3.EXE) file.. 4. in the Open dialog.11 or higher) . If you add additional programs to the list.Editor Selection tab Note that Image Editors is already selected in the Editor Type drop-down menu. 3. Click the Browse button (.. Click the down arrow and select Sound Editors from the Editor Type drop-down menu.) to locate and select the desired program's executable (. The first program added to the Editors list is automatically designated as the default image editor. Select Edit > Preferences to open the Preferences dialog.Program Preferences Adding an External Editing Program for Image Files Use the options in the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog to associate one or more image editing programs with image files in TPD4 projects. 272 TPDesign4 (v2. but one is specified as the default image editor: 1. 4. Click the Add Editor (+) button to access the Choose Editor dialog. and open the Editor Selection tab (FIG. but one is specified as the default image editor: 1.. FIG. 231).

Double-click on any program in the list (other than the current default) to access the Choose Editor dialog. 3. 233 Choose Editor dialog (Default Editor option selected) 5. Click OK to close the Choose Editor dialog. 5. 2. Changing the Default External Image or Sound Editor Program You can change the default image or sound editor program via the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog: 1. Click OK in the Choose Editor dialog to add the selected program to the Editors list. Check the Default Editor checkbox to set the selected program as the default editor (FIG.Editor Selection tab The first program added to the Editors list is automatically designated as the default image editor. 232 Preferences dialog . and open the Editor Selection tab. Select the Editor Type that you want to change the default program for (Image Editors or Sound Editors) from the drop-down menu. FIG. 4. 233). you have the option (in the Choose Editor dialog) to set the default image editor.Program Preferences FIG. TPDesign4 (v2. The Default column indicates which program is the current default (TRUE = current default). This selection populates the Editors table with a listing of all editing programs that have been added. If you add additional programs to the list. Select Edit > Preferences to open the Preferences dialog.11 or higher) 273 .

Alternatively. select All Commands to view a full list of all commands. 2. While holding the mouse-button down. Position the command/icon right where you want to drop it in the toolbar. Open the Customize dialog (select View > Customize). 4.11 or higher) . 3. Select a command category (under Categories).Command tab Customizing the Toolbars Adding Buttons To Existing Toolbars 1. if one exists. The commands included in the selected category are displayed (under Commands). The command/icon is placed as a button in the toolbar. FIG. Note that the cursor symbol indicates that it is not allowed to be placed anywhere except inside the area of a toolbar (any toolbar). 235). Click to highlight a command/icon (under Commands). and release the mouse button. 234).Program Preferences The new default editor is indicated in the Default column of the Editors table (FIG. regardless of category. 274 TPDesign4 (v2. FIG. drag the command/icon to a toolbar. along with their associated toolbar icon. 234 Default Editor Indicated In the Default Column of the Editors Table Customizing the Menus and Toolbars Use the options in the Command tab of the Customize dialog to customize the contents of the TPD4 toolbars and menus (FIG. 5. 235 Customize dialog . 6. to the Commands tab.

For menu items. In the Button Appearance dialog. you can simply right-click on any button to open the New Command context menu. Associating an Icon With a New Command Once you have added a new command to a Toolbar or Menu.11 or higher) 275 . Select an icon from the User-Defined Image field. 5. Select Delete to delete the button. Alternatively. FIG. right-click on the select the button that you want to associate an icon with to open the context menu. TPDesign4 (v2. Click OK. Note that the cursor symbol changes to an "x" when the button is dragged outside of the toolbars. 6. select Image Only or Image and Text (the Text Only option does not allow you to associate an icon). Release the mouse button to delete the button from the toolbar. While holding the mouse button down. 3. 2.Program Preferences Removing Buttons From Existing Toolbars 1. Open the Customize dialog (select View > Customize). you can associate an icon with the command: 1. 236). 236 Customizing menu items 3. Click to select a toolbar button from an existing toolbar. drag the button to any area outside of a toolbar. Open the Customize dialog (select View > Customize). 237 Button Appearance dialog 4. 4. as long as the Customize dialog is open. FIG. For toolbar buttons. 237). right-click on a menu item (FIG. 2. Select Button Appearance to open the Button Appearance dialog (FIG.

240 Dragging a Command From the Commands List Into the New Toolbar Renaming Custom Toolbars 1. With the empty toolbar in place. Click and drag commands from the Commands list and drop them inside the area of the new toolbar.Toolbars tab 2. 2. 240). 239). and click Rename to open the Toolbar Name dialog (FIG. 4. FIG. Click and drag to move the new toolbar icon into position. Repeat this process to add as many commands as you like to your custom toolbar(s) (FIG. 238). 238 on page 276). open the Commands tab of the Customize dialog. 5. 238 Customize dialog . Enter the new name in the Toolbar Name text field and click OK to save the change. 7. 3. Open the Customize dialog to the Toolbars tab (FIG. Open the Customize dialog to the Toolbars tab (FIG. in an empty area near the other toolbars. Enter a name for the new toolbar in the text field and click OK. FIG. along with an empty new toolbar icon. Select the toolbar you want to rename from the list.Program Preferences Creating a New Custom Toolbar 1. 276 TPDesign4 (v2. 6. 239). 8. FIG. Click the New button. 239 Toolbar Name dialog 3. This opens the Toolbar Name dialog (FIG.11 or higher) . Select a command category (under Categories) to display a list of commands (under Commands). The new toolbar name appears in the Toolbars list.

7. select All Commands to view a full list of all commands. Click to highlight a command/icon (under Commands). While holding the mouse-button down. Open the Customize dialog. 3. and release the mouse button.11 or higher) 277 . if one exists. Position the command/icon right where you want to drop it in the menu. 4. 241). Click to select a custom toolbar. Note that the cursor symbol changes to an "x" when the menu item is dragged outside of the menus. you can simply right-click on any menu item to open the Command context menu. Alternatively. 3. 2. While holding the mouse button down. The standard TPD4 toolbars cannot be deleted. Alternatively. Customizing the Menus Adding Commands To Existing Menus 1. The command/icon is placed as a new option in the menu. FIG. Open the Customize dialog. along with their associated toolbar icon. 5. as long as the Customize dialog is open. Release the mouse button to delete the item from the menu. 2.Program Preferences Deleting Custom Toolbars To delete custom (user-added) toolbars from the TPD4 workspace: 1. drag the menu item to any area outside of a menu. regardless of category (FIG. Click to select a menu item from an existing menu. TPDesign4 (v2. 3. drag the command/icon to the open menu.Adding Commands To Existing Menus 4. Click Delete to permanently delete the selected toolbar. Select Delete to delete the button. Removing Commands From Existing Menus 1. to the Commands tab (FIG. 2. Open the Customize dialog to the Toolbars tab. 241 Customize dialog . Select a command category (under Categories). 6. Open the menu to which you want to add a command. 235 on page 274). The commands included in the selected category are displayed (under Commands).

and select Button Appearance. 244 Creating the New (Empty) Menu At the Cursor Location 5. Release the mouse button to create the new (empty) menu at the cursor location (FIG. drag the New Menu icon to a location within the Menu Bar (FIG. 243 Dragging the New Menu Icon To a Location Within the Menu Bar 4. Type the name for the new menu in the Button Text field and press OK. 243). Select a command category (under Categories) to display a set of commands (under Commands). right-click on the menu to open the New Command context menu. To name the new menu. 245 Dragging the New Menu Icon To a Location Within the Menu Bar 8. 242 Customize dialog . 3. FIG.Creating a New Custom Menu This item represents a new "empty" menu. 6.11 or higher) . Release the mouse button to place the selected command in the new menu.Program Preferences Creating a New Custom Menu 1. FIG. 245). FIG. 244). Open the Customize dialog. While holding the mouse button down. 278 TPDesign4 (v2. This places the "New Menu" entry in the Commands list (FIG. 235 on page 274). 7. Add commands to the new menu by clicking and dragging commands from the Commands list to the new menu (FIG. This opens the Button Appearance dialog. to the Commands tab (FIG. Select New Menu from the Categories list. FIG. 242). 2.

246). Enter a name for the application.) to locate and select the application's. 4. 7.Toolbars tab 2. Open the Customize dialog to the Tools tab (FIG. Specify an Initial Directory.EXE file in the Open dialog. The directory path is displayed in the Command text box. if necessary. Click the New (Insert) button to create an empty text field in the Menu Contents list. Click Close to close the Customize dialog. Specify any Arguments. 6. 3. 5. click the browse button (.Program Preferences Adding a Shortcut To an Application In the Tools Menu Use the options in the Tools tab of the Customize dialog to add/remove shortcuts to external applications in the Tools menu: 1.11 or higher) 279 . as you want it to appear in the Tools menu.. TPDesign4 (v2.. if necessary. 246 Customize dialog . Next to the Command field. The new shortcut should appear at the bottom of the Tools menu. New (Insert) button FIG.

Choose a command category in the Category drop-down menu.Keyboard tab 1. 280 TPDesign4 (v2. 5. or to modify existing ones (FIG. to the Keyboard tab. You can view all of the current hotkey assignments in the Help Keyboard dialog (Help > Keyboard Map). 2. Enter the new Hotkeys) in the Select New Shortcut Key field. Choose a command in the Commands list. as opposed to the minus key in the main key set. and click Remove. click Reset All. Click Assign to assign the key(s) to the selected menu item. To reset all hotkey assignments to their default settings. The information in this dialog is read-only. 247): FIG.11 or higher) . 247 Customize dialog . To remove a hotkey assignment. 3. always use the number pad on your keyboard. but only the first one will be displayed next to the item in the menu after this type of change. sometimes referred to as "Keyboard Accelerators" (such as CTRL+C for the "Copy" command) can be customized in TPD4.Program Preferences Hotkeys (Keyboard Accelerators) Hotkeys. Open the Customize dialog. Setting Custom Hotkeys Use the Keyboard tab of the Customize dialog to create new Hotkeys (Keyboard Accelerators). If you assign the minus key (-). 4. then highlight the command's hotkey assignment in the Current Keys list. select the command in the Commands list. Multiple hotkeys can be assigned to the same command.

11 or higher) 281 .Program Preferences TPDesign4 (v2.

AMX and the AMX logo are registered trademarks of AMX. RICHARDSON.0193 • 469.com 9/09 ©2009 AMX.amx. TX 75082 USA • 800.222. .6993 technical support • www.932.Take Control™ 3000 RESEARCH DRIVE.624. All rights reserved.It’s Your World .8000 • 469-624-7153 fax • 800. AMX reserves the right to alter specifications without notice at any time.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful